This forces EAP peer implementation to drop any possible fast resumption
data if the network block for the current connection is not the same as
the one used for the previous one. This allows different network blocks
to be used with non-matching parameters to enforce different rules even
if the same authentication server is used. For example, this allows
different CA trust rules to be enforced with different ca_cert
parameters which can prevent EAP-TTLS Phase 2 from being used based on
TLS session resumption.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is similar to wpa_msg_global() in the same way as wpa_msg_ctrl() is
to wpa_msg(). In other words, wpa_msg_global_ctrl() is used to send
global control interface events without printing them into the debug
log.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any configuration parameter and
dynamic data that contains private information like keys or identity.
This brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length
of time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the EAP-pwd server and peer implementations more robust
should OpenSSL fail to derive random number for some reason. While this
is unlikely to happen in practice, the implementation better be prepared
for this should something unexpected ever happen. See
http://jbp.io/2014/01/16/openssl-rand-api/#review-of-randbytes-callers
for more details.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
This changes OpenSSL calls to explicitly clear the EC_POINT memory
allocations when freeing them. This adds an extra layer of security by
avoiding leaving potentially private keys into local memory after they
are not needed anymore. While some of these variables are not really
private (e.g., they are sent in clear anyway), the extra cost of
clearing them is not significant and it is simpler to just clear these
explicitly rather than review each possible code path to confirm where
this does not help.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
This changes OpenSSL calls to explicitly clear the bignum memory
allocations when freeing them. This adds an extra layer of security by
avoiding leaving potentially private keys into local memory after they
are not needed anymore. While some of these variables are not really
private (e.g., they are sent in clear anyway), the extra cost of
clearing them is not significant and it is simpler to just clear these
explicitly rather than review each possible code path to confirm where
this does not help.
Signed-off-by: Florent Daigniere <nextgens@freenetproject.org>
FreeRADIUS releases before 1.1.4 did not send MS-CHAP2-Success in
EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2. A wpa_supplicant workaround for that was added in
2005 and it has been enabled by default to avoid interoperability
issues. This could be disabled with all other EAP workarounds
(eap_workaround=0). However, that will disable some workarounds that are
still needed with number of authentication servers.
Old FreeRADIUS versions should not be in use anymore, so it makes sense
to remove this EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 workaround completely to get more
complete validation of server behavior. This allows MSCHAPv2 to verify
that the server knows the password instead of relying only on the TLS
certificate validation.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
When driver interface is destroyed (via wpa_driver_nl80211_deinit) the
"preq" nl socket isn't always deleted but the callback struct associated
is. After the interface is destroyed we may still get event on the
socket but as the callback has been freed this will cause wpa_supplicant
to crash.
This patch ensures that the "preq" socket is destroyed when destroying
the interface.
Signed-off-by: Cedric IZOARD <cedricx.izoard@intel.com>
This allows external programs to use vendor specific information from
P2P peers without wpa_supplicant having to be able to parse and
understand all such vendor specific elements.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds following new control interface commands to allow arbitrary
vendor elements to be added into number of frames:
VENDOR_ELEM_ADD <frame id> <hexdump of elem(s)>
VENDOR_ELEM_GET <frame id>
VENDOR_ELEM_REMOVE <frame id> <hexdump of elem(s)>
VENDOR_ELEM_REMOVE <frame id> *
The following frames are supported in this commit (additional frames can
be added in the future):
0 = Probe Request frame in P2P device discovery
1 = Probe Response frame from P2P Device role
2 = Probe Response frame from P2P GO
3 = Beacon frame from P2P GO
4 = PD Req
5 = PD Resp
6 = GO Neg Req
7 = GO Neg Resp
8 = GO Neg Conf
9 = Invitation Request
10 = Invitation Response
11 = P2P Association Request
12 = P2P Association Response
One or more vendor element can be added/removed with the commands. The
hexdump of the element(s) needs to contain the full element (id, len,
payload) and the buffer needs to pass IE parsing requirements to be
accepted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
set_dfs_state() return value is not currently checked anywhere, so
remove the dead assignment to avoid static analyzer complaints.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any configuration parameter and
dynamic data that contains private information like keys or identity.
This brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length
of time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any hostapd configuration parameter
that contains private information like keys or identity. This brings in
an additional layer of protection by reducing the length of time this
type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any hs20-osu-client configuration
parameter that contains private information like keys or identity. This
brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length of
time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reduce the amount of time keying material (MSK, EMSK, temporary private
data) remains in memory in EAP methods. This provides additional
protection should there be any issues that could expose process memory
to external observers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reduce the amount of time keying material (MSK, EMSK, temporary private
data) remains in memory in EAP methods. This provides additional
protection should there be any issues that could expose process memory
to external observers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit memset call to clear any wpa_supplicant configuration
parameter that contains private information like keys or identity. This
brings in an additional layer of protection by reducing the length of
time this type of private data is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The pos pointer is not used after this now nor in future plans, so no
need to increment the value. This remove a static analyzer warning about
dead increment.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of using the pre-calculated length of the buffer, determine the
length of used data based on the pos pointer. This avoids a static
analyzer warning about dead increment.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the implementation less likely to provide useful timing
information to potential attackers from comparisons of information
received from a remote device and private material known only by the
authorized devices.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function is meant for comparing passwords or hash values where
difference in execution time could provide external observer information
about the location of the difference in the memory buffers. The return
value does not behave like os_memcmp(), i.e., os_memcmp_const() cannot
be used to sort items into a defined order. Unlike os_memcmp(),
execution time of os_memcmp_const() does not depend on the contents of
the compared memory buffers, but only on the total compared length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of using implicit limit based on 16-bit unsigned integer having
a maximum value of 65535, limit the maximum length of a fragmented
EAP-pwd message explicitly to 15000 bytes. None of the supported groups
use longer messages, so it is fine to reject any longer message without
even trying to reassemble it. This will hopefully also help in reducing
false warnings from static analyzers (CID 68124).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier for static analyzers to figure out which code paths
are possible within eap_sim_msg_finish() for EAP-SIM. This will
hopefully avoid some false warnings (CID 68110, CID 68113, CID 68114).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the earlier commit e6270129f6
('Clean up EAPOL-Key Key Data processing') design to be used with
PeerKey EAPOL-key processing as well. This avoids false warnings from
static analyzer (CID 62860, CID 62861, CID 62862).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This will be useful in wpa_supplicant part to signal if a peer got its
group changed.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
GroupMember is unusable in itself and all the necessary informations are
stored in Peer objects, thus replace the use of GroupMember by Peer.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
This will be useful in wpa_supplicant to match group's SSIDs against a
specific one.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
This will be useful for finding the interface related to this group
after formation based on the group SSID.
Signed-off-by: Tomasz Bursztyka <tomasz.bursztyka@linux.intel.com>
Use a helper function to avoid multiple copies of the same long list of
argument parameters to wpa_sm_tdls_peer_addset() from the peer entry.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Update the peer STA with full info sending TDLS Setup Response/Confirm
frames instead of after the full setup exchange. This makes it easier
for some drivers to properly negotiate QoS and HT information on the
direct link.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
There is no need to keep the peer entry in memory after the link has
been removed.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Tested-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
It's worth giving a try to fallback to re-starting BSSes at least once
hoping it works out instead of just leaving BSSes disabled.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Currently hostapd data structures aren't ready for multi-channel BSSes,
so make DFS work now at least with single-channel multi-BSS channel
switching.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Fix a bug where changing the mode of the interface to IBSS
fails because the interface is sitting on a channel where IBSS is
disallowed because of a previous association.
Signed-off-by: Christopher Wiley <wiley@chromium.org>
In preparation for another wrinkle around switching into IBSS mode,
refactor existing mode switch logic for simplicity at the expense
of some brevity.
Signed-off-by: Christopher Wiley <wiley@chromium.org>
Previously, eight character random passphrase was generated
automatically for P2P GO. The new p2p_passphrase_len parameter can be
used to increase this length to generate a stronger passphrase for cases
where practicality of manual configuration of legacy devices is not a
concern.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Hitting maximum number of AT_KDF attributes could result in an infinite
loop due to the attribute parser not incrementing the current position
properly when skipping the extra KDF.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use a local variable and size_t in length comparison to make this easier
for static analyzers to understand. In addition, set the return list and
list_len values at the end of the function, i.e., only in success case.
These do not change the actual behavior of the only caller for this
function, but clarifies what the helper function is doing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use size_t instead of int for storing and comparing the TLV length
against the remaining buffer length to make this easier for static
analyzers to understand.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was added by commit 8a45811638
('hostapd: Add Operating Mode Notification support'), but the validation
steps cannot be true either for the channel width (which is a two-bit
subfield that cannot encode more than the list four values) or Rx NSS
(which cannot encode a value larger 7). Furthermore, the VHT_CHANWIDTH_*
defines do not match the definition of the Channel Width subfield
values.
Since this check cannot ever match, it is better to remove it to make
the code easier to understand and to avoid getting complaints about dead
code from static analyzers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some APs (Cisco) may tack on a weird IE to the end of a TDLS Discovery
Request packet. This needn't fail the response, since the required IEs
are verified separately.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Some APs (Cisco) may tack on a weird IE to the end of the TDLS confirm
packet, which can fail negotiation. As an interoperability workaround,
ignore IE parser failures and reject the frame only if any of the
mandatory IEs are not included.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Commit 342bce63cd introduced a possibility
of a NULL pointer dereference on the error path if a new peer entry
fails to get added (i.e., memory allocation failure). Fix that by
skipping the wpa_tdls_peer_free() call if necessary.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit b36935be1a ('nl80211: Fix EAPOL
frames not being delivered') and commit
147848ec4d ('nl80211: Do not add all
virtual interfaces to drv->if_indices') were not fully in sync and it
was possible for some non-hostapd use cases to end up adding undesired
ifindexes into the list of interfaces from which events and EAPOL frames
are processed on the parent interface. This could result, e.g., in P2P
Device management interface on getting unexpected events, including
RTM_NEWLINK event that could end up getting interpreted as an
indication of the interface being down and unavailable.
Make both add_ifidx() calls use the same criteria for adding interfaces
to the local list. This is not really a complete solution, but it is
good enough for now to fix the most visible side effects of this issue.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
The driver might not be able to add the TDLS STA. Fail if this happens.
Also fix the error path to always reset the TDLS peer data.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
If a link is unreachable, the specification mandates we should send a
teardown packet via the AP with a specific teardown reason. Force this
by first disabling the link and only then sending the teardown packet
for the LOW_ACK event.
Rename the TDLS LOW_ACK event handler to better reflect its purpose.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Earlier commit related to MAC address based access control list
offloaded to the driver was not sending ACL configuration to the driver
if the MAC address list was empty. Remove this check as empty access
control list is a valid use case and sending ACL parameters should not
be dependent on whether the list is empty.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Performing a P2P Device flow such as p2p_listen or
p2p_find, can degrade the performance of an active interface
connection, if the listen frequency is different than the
frequency used by that interface.
To reduce the effect of P2P Device flows on other interfaces,
try changing the listen channel of the P2P Device to match the
operating channel of one of the other active interfaces. This change
will be possible only in case that the listen channel is not forced
externally, and will be delayed to a point where the P2P Device
state machine is idle.
The optimization can be configured in the configuration file and
is disabled by default.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
In p2p_get_pref_freq, if the channels argument is NULL, select a
preferred channel that is also one of the P2P Device configured
channels.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Use a single location in wpa_sm_rx_eapol() for preparing the pointer to
the Key Data field and to its validated length instead of fetching that
information in number of processing functions separately.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Re-order wpa_sm_rx_eapol() to first go through all EAPOL (802.1X) header
validation steps using the original message buffer and re-allocate and
copy the frame only if this is a valid EAPOL frame that contains an
EAPOL-Key. This makes the implementation easier to understand and saves
unnecessary memory allocations and copying should other types of EAPOL
frames get here.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These error messages had an incorrect frame name (likely copy-pasted
from the commit message handler) and couple of typos.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While this call cannot really fail, check the return value to be more
consistent with all the other wps_build_wfa_ext() calls.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While the hash functions would be very unlikely to fail in practice,
they do have option of returning an error. Check that return value more
consistently.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The additional eight octet field was removed from keydatalen without
proper validation of the Key Data Length field. It would have been
possible for an invalid EAPOL-Key frame to be processed in a way that
ends up reading beyond the buffer. In theory, this could have also
resulted in writing beyond the EAPOL-Key frame buffer, but that is
unlikely to be feasible due to the AES key wrap validation step on
arbitrary memory contents.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since there is a limit on the EAP exchange due to maximum number of
roundtrips, there is no point in allowing excessively large buffers to
be allocated based on what the peer device claims the total message to
be. Instead, reject the message if it would not be possible to receive
it in full anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Action code field is in a fixed location, so the IEEE80211_HDRLEN
can be used here to clean up bounds checking to avoid false reports from
static analyzer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There seemed to be an off-by-one error in the validation of GAS request
frames. If a Public Action frame without the Action code field would
have reached this function, the length could have been passed as
(size_t) -1 which would likely have resulted in a crash due to reading
beyond the buffer. However, it looks like such frame would not be
delivered to hostapd at least with mac80211-based drivers. Anyway, this
function better be more careful with length validation should some other
driver end up reporting invalid Action frames.
In addition, the Action code field is in a fixed location, so the
IEEE80211_HDRLEN can be used here to clean up bounds checking to avoid
false reports from static analyzer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Action code field is in a fixed location, so the IEEE80211_HDRLEN
can be used here to clean up bounds checking to avoid false reports from
static analyzer.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The implementation here was doing what it was supposed to, but the code
was indented in a way that made it quite confusing in the context of a
single line if statement body.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In tncc_read_config(), the memory allocted for the config
did not get freed if an error occured.
Signed-off-by: Philippe De Swert <philippe.deswert@jollamobile.com>
The driver may reject offchannel TX operation if the requested wait time
is longer than what the driver indicates as the maximum
remain-on-channel time. Two of the P2P action frame cases used long
enough wait times (1000 ms for DevDisc and 5000 ms for SD) that could go
beyond the limit with some drivers. Fix these to limit the maximum wait
to what the driver indicates as supported.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the set of supported cipher suites to include CCMP-256, GCMP,
GCMP-256, CMAC-256, GMAC, and GMAC-256 when ATH_GCM_SUPPORT=y is set in
the build configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It does not look like there is going to be any additional use for this
old build option that could be used to build the EAP-IKEv2 peer
implementation in a way that interoperates with the eap-ikev2.ccns.pl
project. Remove the workarounds that matches incorrect implementation in
that project to clean up implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While it does not look like that eapol_sm_get_key() would ever be called
with sm == NULL, the current implementation is inconsistent on whether
that is allowed or not. Check sm != NULL consistently to avoid warnings
from static analyzers.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The following kde.rsn_ie_len != peer->rsnie_i_len was already taking
care of enforcing the length to be within the target buffer length.
Anyway, this explicit check makes this clearer and matches the design in
TPK M1 processing.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In theory, gmtime() could return NULL if the year value would not fit
into an integer. However, that cannot really happen with the current
time() value in practice. Anyway, clean up static analyzer reports by
checking for this corner case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Must check that UDN was present before trying to parse it. Avoid a NULL
pointer dereference by checking the result before using os_strstr() when
parsing device description from an AP.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
prev cannot be NULL here in the hostapd_eid_country_add() call since
prev is set whenever start becomes non-NULL. That seems to be a bit too
difficult for some static analyzers, so check the prev pointer
explicitly to avoid false warnings.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This fixes an issue where a driver using the deprecated set_ieee8021x()
callback did not include rsn_pairwise bits in the driver configuration
even if mixed WPA+WPA2 configuration was used. This could result, e.g.,
in CCMP not being enabled properly when wpa_pairwise=TKIP and
rsn_pairwise=CCMP was used in the configuration. Fix this by using
bitwise OR of the wpa_pairwise and rsn_pairwise values to allow the
driver to enable all pairwise ciphers.
In addition, make the newer set_ap() driver_ops use the same bitwise OR
design instead of picking between rsn_pairwise and wpa_pairwise. This
makes the code paths consistent and can also fix issues with mixed mode
configuration with set_ap().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the peer provides a username with large part of it being non-ASCII
characters, the previously used buffers may not have been long enough to
include the full string in debug logs and database search due to forced
truncation of the string by printf_encode(). Avoid this by increasing
the buffer sizes to fit in the maximum result.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The off-by-one error in printf_encode() bounds checking could have
allowed buffer overflow with 0x00 being written to the memory position
following the last octet of the target buffer. Since this output is used
as \0-terminated string, the following operation would likely read past
the buffer as well. Either of these operations can result in the process
dying either due to buffer overflow protection or by a read from
unallowed address.
This has been seen to cause wpa_supplicant crash on OpenBSD when control
interface client attaches (debug print shows the client socket address).
Similarly, it may be possible to trigger the issue in RADIUS/EAP server
implementation within hostapd with a suitable constructed user name.
Signed-off-by: Stuart Henderson <sthen@openbsd.org>
If PMF was enabled, the validation step for EAPOL-Key descriptor version
ended up rejecting the message if GCMP had been negotiated as the
pairwise cipher. Fix this by making the GCMP check skipped similarly to
the CCMP case if a SHA256-based AKM is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Move to PTKINITDONE state and mark PTK valid after successful completion
of FT protocol. This allows the AP/Authenticator to start GTK rekeying
when FT protocol is used. Previously, the station using FT protocol did
not get the new GTK which would break delivery of group addressed
frames.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
I got the below prints on a particular Android platform:
I/wpa_supplicant( 2637): nl80211: send_and_recv->nl_recvmsgs failed: 20
I/wpa_supplicant( 2637): nl80211: send_and_recv->nl_recvmsgs failed: 20
In JellyBean libnl_2 code, I see that the nl_recvmsgs returns postive values
too. In some cases, nl_recvmgs return the output of nl_recv function. nl_recv
function can return Number of bytes read, 0 or a negative error code.
Looks like this positive return value for nl_recvmsgs may be specific to
Android. While this is not how the API is supposed to work, this does no
harm with upstream libnl which returns only 0 or -1 from the function.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
The dev_found() callback from NFC connection handover message processing
ended up using the p2p_dev_addr pointer that points to the parsed
message. However, that parsed data was freed just before the call. Fix
this by reordering the calls.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the randomly generated bignum does not meet the validation steps, the
iteration loop in sae_get_rand() did not free the data properly. Fix the
memory leak by freeing the temporary bignum before starting the next
attempt at generating the value.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Couple of code paths in hostapd.c could have left hapd->drv_priv
pointing to memory that was freed in driver_nl80211.c when a secondary
BSS interface is removed. This could result in use of freed memory and
segfault when the next driver operation (likely during interface
deinit/removal). Fix this by clearing hapd->drv_priv when there is
reason to believe that the old value is not valid within the driver
wrapper anymore.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These three calls were used already in three different paths. Use a
helper function to avoid adding even more copies of this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If for some reason interface setup fails mid-way when setting up
multi-BSS AP it was possible to get segmentation fault because driver
was not properly cleaned up.
One possible trigger, when using nl80211 driver, was udev renaming an
interface created by hostapd causing, e.g., linux_set_iface_flags() to
fail.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This variable is updated when calling hostapd_if_add(), so it makes
sense to do the same thing when calling hostapd_if_remove().
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Performing, e.g. `wpa_cli -p /var/run/hostapd raw DISABLE` twice led to
hostapd segmentation fault if multiple BSSes were configured. Fix this
by checking if there is anything to disable at all before trying.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Make sure to not remove interfaces that were not created by
hostapd/wpa_supplicant. This was already done on number of the error
paths, but not all.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
It is possible for the connect() call to fail (e.g., due to unreachable
network based on local routing table), so the current auth/acct_sock may
be left to -1. Use that as an addition trigger to allow server failover
operation to be performed more quickly if it is known that the
retransmission attempt will not succeed anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The re-open socket to the current RADIUS server code path did not work
in the expected way here. The pending authentication messages do not
need to be flushed in that case and neither should the retransmission
parameters be cleared. Fix this by performing these operations only if
the server did actually change as a part of a failover operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The current RADIUS server pointer was updated after each SET command
which broke parsing of multiple RADIUS servers over the control
interface. Fix this by doing the final RADIUS server pointer updates
only once the full configuration is available.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Both IPv4 and IPv6 sockets were not closed consistently in the paths
that tried to change RADIUS servers. This could result in leaking
sockets and leaving behind registered eloop events to freed memory on
interface removal.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While iterating through RADIUS messages in radius_client_timer(), one
message entry may get flushed by "radius_client_retransmit -->
radius_client_handle_send_error --> radius_client_init_auth -->
radius_change_server --> radius_client_flush". This could result in
freed memory being accessed afterwards.
Signed-off-by: Jerry Yang <xyang@sonicwall.com>
This is one more possible send() error that should trigger RADIUS server
change if multiple servers are configured.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for the RADIUS authentication/accounting socket to not be
open even if partial RADIUS server configuration has been done through
the control interface SET commands. Previously, this resulted in send()
attempt using fd=-1 which fails with bad file descriptor. Clean this up
by logging this as a missing configuration instead of trying to send the
message when that is known to fail.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes invitation process more consistent with GO Negotiation as far
as the debug log entries are concerned and the resulting log is more
helpful for understanding channel selection.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of using X509_print_fp() to print directly to stdout, print the
certificate dump to a memory BIO and use wpa_printf() to get this into
the debug log. This allows redirection of debug log to work better and
avoids undesired stdout prints when debugging is not enabled.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This configuration parameter was not used at all in the RADIUS server
implementation and instead, hard coded 0 was sent.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 04eff7d5ba or something around that
timeframe may have caused a regression on how drv->if_indices gets used
with wpa_supplicant. Most (curretly likely all) wpa_supplicant virtual
interface use cases should not actually use this. This could result in
issues with P2P group interfaces delivering events to incorrect
interface (parent rather than the group interface). The previous commit
removed some of the issues, but more complete fix is to undo some of
those merged hostapd/wpa_supplicant operations.
Filter add_ifidx() uses based on hostapd vs. wpa_supplicant and iftype
to get closer to the earlier wpa_supplicant behavior for the driver
events from virtual interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for a virtual interface to be added and removed by
different parent interfaces. This can happen, e.g., with P2P group
interfaces if the P2P parent interface does not happen to be the first
entry in the wpa_supplicant global interface list. That first entry is
used to remove the group interface while the addition would have
happened with the dedicated P2P management interface.
This can result in the interface that added a new virtual interface
getting stuck with an obsolete ifindex value in the drv->if_indeces list
and as such, deliver some extra events to incorrect destination wpa_s
instance. In particular, this can result in INTERFACE_DISABLED event
from deletion of a P2P group interface getting delivered incorrectly to
the parent wpa_s instance which would disable that interface even though
the interface remains in enabled state.
Fix this by clearing the removed interface from all if_indeces lists
instead of just the one that was used to delete the interface. This is
the simplest approach since the ifindex is unique and there is no need
to track which interface added the new virtual interface to always hit
the same one when removing the interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add regulatory classes for the 60GHz band.
Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signed-off-by: Boris Sorochkin <qca_bsoroc@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of silently dropping the response that requires fragmentation,
send an error response to the station to make it aware that no full
response will be available.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If p2p_listen is called while previous listen command's
remain_on_channel event is pending, the p2p_listen would fail
and it used to clear pending_listen_freq. Now when the remain-
on-channel event comes from the driver, the pending_listen_freq
doesn't match and gets ignored. This was leading to a case
where listen state was getting stuck (in case of WAIT_PEER_CONNECT
state).
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Previously, the NL80211_ATTR_AKM_SUITES was skipped if either of these
SHA256-based AKMs was negotiated.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
This is similar to the existing functionality that parsed ASN.1-encoded
RSA public key by generating a similar public key instance from already
parsed n and e parameters.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Follow the PKCS #1 v1.5, 8.1 constraint of at least eight octets long PS
for the case where the internal TLS implementation decrypts PKCS #1
formatted data. Similar limit was already in place for signature
validation, but not for this decryption routine.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Based on PKCS #1, v1.5, 10.1.3, the block type shall be 01 for a
signature. This avoids a potential attack vector for internal TLS/X.509
implementation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Verify that there is no extra data after the hash field. This is needed
to avoid potential attacks using additional data to construct a value
that passes the RSA operation and allows the hash value to be forged.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, hostapd had to be started with at least one of the
configuration files enabling TNC for TNC to be usable. Change this to
allow TNC to be enabled when the first interface with TNC enabled gets
added during runtime.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is for enabling easier testing of TNCS/TNCC functionality as part
of the test scripts without having to use the fixed /etc/tnc_config
location that could be used by the main system and would require changes
within /etc.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This patch adds epoll option for the eloop implementation. This can be
selected with the CONFIG_ELOOP_EPOLL=y build option.
[merit]
See Table1.
Table1. comparison table
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| | add fd | remove fd | prepare fd | dispatch fd |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| select | O(1) | O(1) | O(N) | O(N) |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| poll | O(1) | O(1) | O(N) | O(N) |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
| epoll | O(1) | O(1) | 0 | O(M) |
+--------+--------+-----------+------------+-------------+
"add fd" is addition of fd by eloop_sock_table_add_sock().
"remove fd" is removal of fd by eloop_sock_table_remove_sock().
"prepare fd" is preparation of fds before wait in eloop_run().
"dispatch fd" is dispatchment of fds by eloop_sock_table_dispatch().
"N" is all watching fds.
"M" is fds which could be dispatched after waiting.
As shown in Table1, epoll option has better performance on "prepare fd" column.
Because select/poll option requires setting fds before every select()/poll().
But epoll_wait() doesn't need it.
And epoll option has also better performance on "dispatch fd" column.
Because select/poll option needs to check all registered fds to find out
dispatchable fds. But epoll option doesn't require checking all registered fds.
Because epoll_wait() returns dispatchable fd set.
So epoll option is effective for GO/AP functionality.
[demerit]
The epoll option requires additional heap memory. In case of P2P GO, it is
about 8K bytes.
Signed-off-by: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
p2p_get_pref_freq() went through the full list only if the channels
arguments was provided. If no channel list contraint was in place, the
first pref_chan item was picked regardless of whether it is valid
channel and as such, a later valid entry could have been ignored. Allow
this to loop through all the entries until a valid channel is found or
the end of the pref_chan list is reached. As an extra bonus, this
simplifies the p2p_get_pref_freq() implementation quite a bit.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Before starting a 20/40 MHz BSS on the 2.4 GHz band, a 40-MHz-capable HT
AP is required by the rules defined in IEEE Std 802.11-2012 10.15.5 to
examine the channels of the current operational regulatory domain to
determine whether the operation of a 20/40 MHz BSS might unfairly
interfere with the operation of existing 20 MHz BSSs. The AP (or some of
its associated HT STAs) is required to scan all of the channels of the
current regulatory domain in order to ascertain the operating channels
of any existing 20 MHz BSSs and 20/40 MHz BSSs. (IEEE 802.11-2012 S.5.2
Establishing a 20/40 MHz BSS).
Add the check for an overlapping 20 MHz BSS to the initial AP scan for
the P == OT_i case in 10.15.3.2.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qti.qualcomm.com>
scard_gsm_auth() used SIM_CMD_GET_RESPONSE for both SIM and USIM. Convert
the command into USIM_CMD_GET_RESPONSE for USIM.
Since commit eb32460029 ("Fix switching from EAP-SIM to EAP-AKA/AKA'")
EAP-SIM is using the USIM if available. This triggers a probably ancient
bug in scard_gsm_auth(), which results in sending the wrong get response
command to the USIM. Thus, EAP-SIM stopped to work after this change on
USIMs that expect the proper command.
Signed-off-by: Simon Baatz <gmbnomis@gmail.com>
If WPS isn't enabled, hostapd_cli returns 'OK' even though WPS doesn't
get activated because WPS context is not valid:
$ hostapd_cli wps_pbc
Selected interface 'wlan0'
OK
$ hostapd_cli wps_cancel
Selected interface 'wlan0'
OK
Fix this by returning appropriate error when WPS fails to activate:
$ hostapd_cli wps_pbc
Selected interface 'wlan0'
FAIL
$ hostapd_cli wps_cancel
Selected interface 'wlan0'
FAIL
Signed-off-by: Petar Koretic <petar.koretic@sartura.hr>
CC: Luka Perkov <luka.perkov@sartura.hr>
Peer should handle a GO Negotiation exchange correctly when the
responding device does not have WSC credentials available at the
time of receiving the GO Negotiation Request. WSC Credentials
(e.g., Pushbutton) can be entered within the 120 second timeout.
Presently, if concurrent session is not active, the peer would wait for
GO Negotiation Request frame from the other device for approximately one
minute due to the earlier optimization change in commit
a2d6365760. To meet the two minute
requirement, replace this design based on number of iterations with a
more appropriate wait for the required number of seconds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the previous commit 0f1034e388 to
skip extended listen also based on ongoing provision discovery operation
(which does not show up as a separate P2P module state and as such, was
not coveraged by the previous commit).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
bss->freq was not updated for IBSS, so whatever old value was stored
from a previous AP mode operation could end up having been used as the
channel when trying to send Authentication frames in an RSN IBSS. This
resulted in the frame not sent (cfg80211 rejects it) and potentially not
being able to re-establish connection due to 4-way handshake failing
with replay counter mismatches. Fix this by learning the operating
channel of the IBSS both when join event is received and when a
management frame is being transmitted since the IBSS may have changed
channels due to merges.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
RFC 5106 is not exactly clear on the requirements for the "no data"
packet that is used to acknowledge a fragmented message. Allow it to be
processed without the integrity checksum data field since it is possible
to interpret the RFC as this not being included. This fixes reassembly
of fragmented frames after keys have been derived.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If invalid group was negotiated, compute_password_element() left some of
the data->grp pointer uninitialized and this could result in
segmentation fault when deinitializing the EAP method. Fix this by
explicitly clearing all the pointer with eap_zalloc(). In addition,
speed up EAP failure reporting in this type of error case by indicating
that the EAP method execution cannot continue anymore on the peer side
instead of waiting for a timeout.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The extra data (nonce_s) used in this message was pointing to the
parsed, decrypted data and that buffer was previously freed just before
building the new message. This resulted in use of freed data and
possibly incorrect extra data value that caused the authentication
attempt to fail. Fix this by reordering the code to free the decrypted
data only after the new message has been generated. This was already the
case for EAP-AKA/AKA', but somehow missing from EAP-SIM.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The current position pointer was not updated when issuerUniqueID or
subjectUniqueID were present. This could result in extensions being
ignored.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not perform extended listen period operations when either a P2P
connection is in progress. This makes the connection more robust should
an extended listen timer trigger during such an operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Propagate max associated STAs in AP mode advertised by the driver to
core wpa_supplicant implemantion. This allows wpa_supplicant to update
the P2P GO group limit information automatically without having to
configure this limit manually. The information (if available) is also
used in the generic AP implementation to control maximum number of STA
entries.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a new wowlan_triggers option to wpa_supplicant.conf. The triggers in
this key will be used to configure the kernel wowlan configuration.
For now, support only simple flags. More complex triggers can be added
later on.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Disabling the link only clears the local state. The remote peer will
still think we are connected and disallow the setup.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
When de-authenticating from the AP, disable each TDLS link after
sending the teardown packet. Postpone the reset of the peer state
data until after the link disable request.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arikx.nemtsov@intel.com>
Indicate to cfg80211 that interfaces created by the wpa_supplicant
or hostapd are owned by them, and that in case that the socket that
created them closes, these interfaces should be removed.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Got segfault, when freeing drv and there exists registered timeout for
blocked rfkill. This patch adds cancel timeout to avoid this.
Signed-off-by: Eduardo Abinader <eduardo.abinader@openbossa.org>
Commit 96ecea5eb1 did not consider
to pass the VHT/HT/WMM capabilities of the peer for BSS with
open mode.
Address this issue by passing the capabilities irrespective of
the security mode.
Signed-off-by: Pradeep Reddy POTTETI <c_ppotte@qti.qualcomm.com>
If a driver wrapper misbehaves and does not indicate a frame body in the
event, core hostapd code should handle this consistently since that case
was already checked for in one location.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
sta == NULL check is already done above based on category !=
WLAN_ACTION_PUBLIC, but that seems to be too complex for some static
analyzers, so avoid invalid reports by explicitly checking for this
again in the WLAN_ACTION_FT case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous check for dl_list_len() or having an entry from the list is
sufficient, but some static analyzers cannot figure out that
dl_list_first() and dl_list_last() will return non-NULL in this type of
cases. Avoid invalid reports by explicitly checking for NULL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Checking sm->pmksa is sufficient here, but that seems to be too
difficult for static analyzers to follow, so avoid false reports by
explicitly checking pmkid as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
clang scan-build does not seem to like the 'd' suffix on floating
constants and ends up reporting analyzer failures. Since this suffix
does not seem to be needed, get rid of it to clear such warnings.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
p2p_freq_to_channel() could return an error if the GO or P2P Client
operating channel is not valid. Check for this before generating the NFC
handover message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is not of any real use anymore with nl80211_set_channel() taking
care of channel setting operation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Configure driver with the new channel parameters (mainly, HT 20/40 MHz
bandwidth changes) as part of set_ap().
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes the initial OBSS scans in AP mode before starting 40 MHz BSS
more robust. In addition, HT20 can be used as a backup option if none of
the scans succeed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If a 2.4 GHz band AP receives a 20/40 Coexistence management frame from
a connected station with 20/40 BSS Intolerant Channel Report element
containing the channel list in which any legacy AP are detected or AP
with 40 MHz intolerant bit set in HT Cap IE is detected in the affected
range of the BSS, the BSS will be moved from 40 to 20 MHz channel width.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Extend the minimal HT 20/40 co-ex support to include dynamic changes
during the lifetime of the BSS. If any STA connects to a 2.4 GHz AP with
40 MHz intolerant bit set then the AP will switch to 20 MHz operating
mode.
If for a period of time specified by OBSS delay factor and OBSS scan
interval AP does not have any information about 40 MHz intolerant STAs,
the BSS is switched from HT20 to HT40 mode.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This provides information to allow the driver to be configured for
updated channel parameters, e.g., when dynamically changing HT20/HT40
bandwidth.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like the demangle.h from binutils-dev is not installed that
commonly anymore. Since we need only two defines from that file, replace
the header file with those defines to make it easier to build with
WPA_TRACE_BFD=y.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some trailing whitespace and spaces for indentation were present in the
driver wrapper and header files.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Move the definitions that depended in common.h into a separate header
file so that qca-vendor.h can be copied and used as-is in other
projects.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allocates a QCA vendor subcmd for extended statistics
functionality and also an attribute for delivering the payload
for extended statistics.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These functions are not standard and do not exist in all systems, e.g.,
variants of Android. Instead use the macros defined in common.h.
Signed-off-by: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
With hidden SSID (ignore_broadcast_ssid), an IOS device trying to
connect to the AP will send a probe request with ANT == 2. If
interworking support is just compiled (not enabled), we will drop the
probe request since default ANT is 0.
Check that interworking is enabled before filtering based on ANT or
HESSID to match the behavior of code without CONFIG_INTERWORKING.
Signed-off-by: Maxime Bizon <mbizon@freebox.fr>
This allows the specific SIM to be identified for authentication
purposes in multi-SIM devices. This SIM number represents the index of
the SIM slot. This SIM number shall be used for the authentication using
the respective SIM for the Wi-Fi connection to the corresponding
network.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Sometimes function hostapd_is_dfs_required() returns -1 which indicates
that it was not possible to check if DFS was required. This happens for
channels from the 2.4 GHz band where DFS checking should not happen.
This can be fixed by returning DFS-not-required for mode different from
IEEE80211A and when DFS support is not available (ieee80211h not set).
Signed-off-by: Marek Puzyniak <marek.puzyniak@tieto.com>
Some of the buffers used to keep a copy of PTK/TPTK/GTK in the
supplicant implementation maintained a copy of the keys longer than
necessary. Clear these buffers to zero when the key is not needed
anymore to minimize the amount of time key material is kept in memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The sample code here ended up trying to register an eloop socket with fd
== -1. This was not really ever supposed to be used, but it is now also
hitting an assert in eloop. Skip the unnecessary
eloop_register_read_sock() to avoid this.
This was causing issues for hostapd since CONFIG_L2_PACKET is not set by
default. If CONFIG_RSN_PREAUTH=y was not used for CONFIG_L2_PACKET was
not set in .config explicitly, the defaul use of l2_packet_none.c ended
up hitting the newly added assert() in eloop.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Rather than ignoring packets with a minimal 8-byte radiotap
header, which may occur elsewhere, tag generated (decrypted)
packets with an empty vendor namespace tag and ignore those.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Update the radiotap parser to the latest version of the
http://git.sipsolutions.net/radiotap.git/ library to get
parsing for vendor namespaces.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This was already done for the disconnect event, but
SME-in-wpa_supplicant case needs to do same with the deauth event to
avoid getting extra events during WPS disconnect-and-reconnect sequence.
This can speed up WPS processing by removing unnecessary failures or
retries due to the extra event being processed during the next
association attempt.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows external programs to monitor driver signal change events
through wpa_supplicant when bgscan is used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The first combination may allow single-channel concurrency for
P2P + managed, but there may be others that allow multi-channel
concurrency. Parse all of them to find the maximum number of channels.
Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
wpa_supplicant now retries for P2P_GO_NEG_CNF_MAX_RETRY_COUNT times if
it doesn't receive acknowledgement for GO Negotiation Confirmation
frame. Currently, P2P_GO_NEG_CNF_MAX_RETRY_COUNT is set to 1.
While this is not strictly speaking following the P2P specification,
this can improve robustness of GO Negotiation in environments with
interference and also with peer devices that do not behave properly
(e.g., by not remaining awake on the negotiation channel through the
full GO Negotiation).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
NL80211_CMD_LEAVE_IBSS was used only with wpa_supplicant-based SME.
Extend this to drivers that implement SME internally.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some OpenSSL versions have vulnerability in TLS heartbeat request
processing. Check the processed message to determine if the attack has
been used and if so, do not send the response to the peer. This does not
prevent the buffer read overflow within OpenSSL, but this prevents the
attacker from receiving the information.
This change is an additional layer of protection if some yet to be
identified paths were to expose this OpenSSL vulnerability. However, the
way OpenSSL is used for EAP-TLS/TTLS/PEAP/FAST in hostapd/wpa_supplicant
was already rejecting the messages before the response goes out and as
such, this additional change is unlikely to be needed to avoid the
issue.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Only the Neighbor Report element should be included here, so verify that
the element id matches. In addition, verify that each subelement has
valid length before using the data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes the definitions match the terminology used in IEEE Std
802.11-2012 and makes it easier to understand how the HT Operation
element subfields are used.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was used to fill in the "PSMP support" subfield that was defined
during P802.11n development. However, this subfield was marked reserved
in the published IEEE Std 802.11n-2009 and it is not supported by
current drivers that use hostapd for SME either. As such, there is not
much point in maintaining this field as ht_capab parameter within
hostapd either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
QCA vendor extension is used for NAN functionality. This defines the
subcommand and attribute to address this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Now that WPS 2.0 support is enabled unconditionally, WEP and Shared auth
type are not allowed. This made some of the older code unused and that
can now be removed to clean up the implementation. There is still one
place where WEP is allowed for testing purposes: wpa_supplicant as
Registrar trying to configure an AP to use WEP. That is now only allowed
in CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y builds, though.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is somewhat of a corner case since there is no real point in using
so short a fragmentation threshold that it would result in this message
getting fragmented. Anyway, it is better be complete and support this
case as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If fragmentation is used, the temporary inbuf/outbuf could have been
leaked in error cases (e.g., reaching maximum number of roundtrips).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"SET tdls_testing 0x800" can be used to enable a special test mode that
forces the FTIE MIC in TDLS setup messages to be incorrect.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Following events are now sent to ctrl_iface monitors to indicate if
credential blocks have been added, modified, or removed:
CRED-ADDED <id>
CRED-MODIFIED <id> <field>
CRED-REMOVE <id>
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_supplicant and wpa_cli had already moved to allowing up to 4096 byte
buffer size to be used for control interface commands. This was limited
by the line edit buffer in interactive mode. Increase that limit to
match the other buffers to avoid artificially truncating long commands.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"user" MACACL "password" style lines in the eap_user file can now be
used to configured user entries for RADIUS-based MAC ACL.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
p2p_dev_addr was not NULL, so the all zeros case was printed as well.
Clean this up by printing p2p_dev_addr in debug prints only if it is a
real P2P Device Address.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add support of vendor command to hostapd ctrl_iface.
Vendor command's format:
VENDOR <vendor id> <sub command id> [<hex formatted data>]
The 3rd argument will be converted to binary data and then passed as
argument to the sub command.
Signed-off-by: Avraham Stern <avraham.stern@intel.com>
When primary and secondary channel were switched and config was
reloaded, secondary channel was incorrectly overwritten.
Proceed as for other settings that should not be changed and don't
allow to overwrite.
Signed-off-by: Pawel Kulakowski <pawel.kulakowski@tieto.com>
While framing the TDLS Setup Confirmation frame, the driver needs to
know if the TDLS peer is VHT/HT/WMM capable and thus shall construct the
VHT/HT operation / WMM parameter elements accordingly. Supplicant
determines if the TDLS peer is VHT/HT/WMM capable based on the presence
of the respective IEs in the received TDLS Setup Response frame.
The host driver should not need to parse the received TDLS Response
frame and thus, should be able to rely on the supplicant to indicate
the capability of the peer through additional flags while transmitting
the TDLS Setup Confirmation frame through tdls_mgmt operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When hostapd choose to reuse an existing interface, it does not add it
to the set of interfaces from which we accept EAPOL packets.
Make sure we always add it to that set.
Signed-off-by: Maxime Bizon <mbizon@freebox.fr>
This allows drivers that build the WPA/RSN IEs internally to use similar
design for building the OSEN IE.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is not much point in building devices with WPS 1.0 only supported
nowadays. As such, there is not sufficient justification for maintaining
extra complexity for the CONFIG_WPS2 build option either. Remove this by
enabling WSC 2.0 support unconditionally.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Scan for GO on the negotiated operating channel for few iterations
before searching on all the supported channels during persistent group
reinvocation. In addition, use the already known SSID of the group in
the scans. These optimizations reduce group formation time.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Especially when multiple BSSes are used with ACS, number of the error
paths were not cleaning up driver initialization properly. This could
result in using freed memory and crashing the process if ACS failed.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the PMK-R1 needs to be pulled for the R0KH, the previous
implementation ended up rejecting the over-the-air authentication and
over-the-DS action frame unnecessarily while waiting for the RRB
response. Improve this by postponing the Authentication/Action frame
response until the pull response is received.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This moves some of the p2p_prepare_channel_best() functionality into
separate helper functions to make the implementation easier to read.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The main WPS code rejects WEP parameters, so this code is not used and
can be commented out from WPS 2.0 builds. This is similar to the earlier
commit that commented out in-memory update.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 94b84bc725 missed one path where
p2p->op_reg_class should have been updated. Set this to 81 during
operating channel selection from 2.4 GHz.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the driver supports full offloading of DFS operations, do not disable
a channel marked for radar detection. The driver will handle the needed
operations for such channels.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This uses a QCA vendor extension to determine if the driver supports
fully offloaded DFS operations.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The main WPS code rejects WEP parameters, so this code is not used and
can be commented out from WPS 2.0 builds.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not select pre-configured channel as operating channel preference if
it is unavailable maybe due to interference or possible known
co-existence constraints, and try to select random available channel.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There was possibility that the current channel in Beacon information
element was incorrectly set. This problem was easily observed when
primary and secondary channel were switched and then some of hostapd
settings (for example password) were changed using WPS External
Registrar. This caused hostapd_reload_config() function overwrite the
current channel information from config file.
This patch prevents this situation and does not allow to overwrite
channel and some other settings when config is reloaded.
Signed-off-by: Pawel Kulakowski <pawel.kulakowski@tieto.com>
It was possible for hapd->wps_beacon_ie and hapd->wps_probe_resp_ie to
be set if WPS initialization in hostapd failed after having set these
parameters (e.g., during UPnP configuration). In addition, many of the
other WPS configuration parameters that were allocated during the first
part of the initialization were not properly freed on error paths.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While the device itself may support WPA/WPA2-Enterprise, enrollment of
credentials for EAP authentication is not supported through WPS. As
such, there is no need to claim support for these capabilities within
WPS information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The scan_for_auth workaround for cfg80211 missing a BSS entry for the
target BSS during authentication uses a single channel scan controlled
within driver_nl80211.c. This operation does not indicate
EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS to the upper layer code. However, it did report
EVENT_SCAN_STARTED and this resulted in the radio work protection code
assuming that an external program triggered a scan, but that scan never
completed. This resulted in all new radio work items getting stuck
waiting for this scan to complete.
Fix this by handling the scan_for_auth situation consistently within
driver_nl80211.c by filtering both the EVENT_SCAN_STARTED and
EVENT_SCAN_RESULTS.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Do not truncate CURLINFO entries on first linefeed to get full IN/OUT
headers and data into debug log. Use wpa_hexdump_ascii() if any
non-displayable characters are included. Remove the separate header/data
debug dumps since all that information is now available from the debug
callback.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These were previous set to 3.0 and 1.5 ms which ended up using values 93
and 46 in 36 usec inits. However, the default values for these are
actually defined as 3.008 ms and 1.504 ms (94/47) and those values are
also listed in the hostapd.conf example.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
test-tls-4: Short 511-bit RSA-DHE prime
test-tls-5: Short 767-bit RSA-DHE prime
test-tls-6: Bogus RSA-DHE "prime" 15
test-tls-7: Very short 58-bit RSA-DHE prime in a long container
test-tls-8: Non-prime as RSA-DHE prime
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The center segment0 calculation for VHT20 ACS was incorrect. This caused
ACS to fail with: "Could not set channel for kernel driver".
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Secondary channel was compared incorrectly (-4/4 vs. actual channel
number) which broke matching neighboring 40 MHz BSSes and only the
no-beacons-on-secondary-channel rule was applied in practice. Once
sec_chan was fixed, this triggered another issue in this function where
both rules to switch pri/sec channels could end up getting applied in a
way that effectively canceled the switch.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
previous_ap and last_assoc_req were not really used for anything
meaninful, so get rid of them to reduce the size of per-STA memory
allocation.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the control interface and some of the BSS setup to
be left partially initialized in failure cases while the BSS structures
were still freed. Fix this by properly cleaning up anything that may
have passed initialization successfully before freeing memory.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows hostapd to set a different management group cipher than the
previously hardcoded default BIP (AES-128-CMAC). The new configuration
file parameter group_mgmt_cipher can be set to BIP-GMAC-128,
BIP-GMAC-256, or BIP-CMAC-256 to select one of the ciphers defined in
IEEE Std 802.11ac-2013.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
For some client OBSS implementations that are performed in
firmware, all OBSS parameters need to be set to valid values.
Do this, as well as supplying the "20/40 Coex Mgmt Support"
flag in the extended capabilities IE.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
The 802.11ac amendment specifies that that the center segment 0 field
is reserved, so it should be zero. Hostapd previously required it to
be set, which is likely a good idea for interoperability, but allow it
to be unset. However, don't allow it to be set to a random value, only
allow zero and the correct channel.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Some of the remote ANQP server concepts were introduces into gas_serv.c,
but these were not completed. Remote the unused implementation for now.
It can be added back if support for remote ANQP server is added at some
point.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When wpa_psk_file is used instead of wpa_psk/wpa_passphrase, each WPS
Enrollee was given a unique PSK. This did not work for the
station-as-Registrar case where ER would learn the current AP settings
instead of enrolling itself (i.e., when using the AP PIN instead of
station PIN). That case can be covered with a similar design, so
generate a per-device PSK when building M7 as an AP in wpa_psk_file
configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd DEAUTHENTICATE and DISASSOCIATE control interface commands
accepted both a test=<0/1> and reason=<val> parameters, but these were
not supported in the same command as a combination. Move the code around
a bit to allow that as well since it can be helpful for automated test
scripts.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
TDLS Setup Request/Response frames from the peers include the WMM IE,
hence parse the same and consider the QoS Info from the WMM IE. The
qos_info obtained in the WMM IE overwrites the one obtained through
WLAN_EID_QOS attribute.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
p2p_find removes P2P_DEV_REPORTED flag from every existing P2P peer
entry. Thus, if a GO Negotiation Request frame is received before the
peer is re-discovered based on Probe Response frame, report
P2P-DEVICE-FOUND indication prior to the P2P-GO-NEG-REQUEST similarly to
how this is done the first time the peer is found.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, some of the last initialization steps could fail without
clearly marking the interface disabled. For example, configuring the
channel to the driver could fail, but hostapd would not clearly identify
as the interface not being in functional state apart from not moving it
to the ENABLED state. Send an AP-DISABLED event and mark interface state
DISABLED if such a setup operation fails.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This hs20-osu-client client command can be used to parse a DER encoded
X.509v3 certificate with the logotype extensions and
id-wfa-hotspot-friendlyName values shown in detail.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE fails due to exiting authentication, forced
deauthentication is used to clear cfg80211 start and a new
authentication command is retried. This resulted in an extra
disconnection event getting delivered to the core wpa_supplicant code
and that could end up confusing state there, e.g., by clearing
connection parameters like wpa_s->key_mgmt and preventing the following
association from reaching proper COMPLETED state with open networks.
Fix this by hiding the unnecessary disconnection event when using the
deauth-for-auth workaround.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
On RF-kill, we should not request the kernel to start a P2P device. In
addition, we should call i802_set_iface_flags() both for a P2P Device
interface and any other interface instead of calling a dedicated
function for each.
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <Moshe.Benji@intel.com>
At least in nl80211, broadcast management frames like Probe Request
frames, may be processed multiple times per BSS if multi-BSS is active
and NL80211_CMD_FRAME event is used to deliver them. In the case of
Probe Request frames, hostapd will create multiple redundant Probe
Response frames which are problematic when many BSS are on one channel.
This problem is caused by driver_nl80211 generating an event for
wpa_supplicant_event() for each BSS, and hostapd_mgmt_rx() calls
ieee802_11_mgmt() for each BSS, too.
Fix this by processing broadcast events only for the BSS the driver
intended to. The behavior is not changed for drivers not setting a BSS.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <simon@open-mesh.com>
If channels are "available", change to "usable" DFS channels as a
fallback, too. This requires CAC, but it is still better to do that
instead of stopping service completely.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de>
If DFS channels are marked as "available", an AP can switch to them
immediately without performing CAC. Therefore, the channel selection
function should consider these channels even though these are radar
channels.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de>
Different channels allow different transmission power, at least in ETSI
countries. Also, ETSI requires a "channel plan" for DFS operation, and
channels should be randomly choosen from these channels.
Add a channel list configuration option for users to add channels
hostapd may pick from.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <sw@simonwunderlich.de>
Previously, EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA' did not work with number of crypto
libraries (GnuTLS, CryptoAPI, NSS) since the required FIPS 186-2 PRF
function was not implemented. This resulted in somewhat confusing error
messages since the placeholder functions were silently returning an
error. Fix this by using the internal implementation of FIP 186-2 PRF
(including internal SHA-1 implementation) with crypto libraries that do
not implement this in case EAP-SIM/AKA/AKA' is included in the build.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Incorrect PTK length was used in PMK-to-PTK derivation and the Michael
MIC TX/RX key swapping code was incorrectly executed for these ciphers
on supplicant side.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While these were already available from elsewhere in the debug log, it
is convenient to have the values also available at the location where
the actual nl80211 command is issued.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The internal TLS server implementation and RADIUS server implementation
in hostapd can be configured to allow EAP clients to be tested to
perform TLS validation steps correctly. This functionality is not
included in the default build; CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y in
hostapd/.config can be used to enable this.
When enabled, the RADIUS server will configure special TLS test modes
based on the received User-Name attribute value in this format:
<user>@test-tls-<id>.<rest-of-realm>. For example,
anonymous@test-tls-1.example.com. When this special format is used, TLS
test modes are enabled. For other cases, the RADIUS server works
normally.
The following TLS test cases are enabled in this commit:
1 - break verify_data in the server Finished message
2 - break signed_params hash in ServerKeyExchange
3 - break Signature in ServerKeyExchange
Correctly behaving TLS client must abort connection if any of these
failures is detected and as such, shall not transmit continue the
session.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the internal TLS implementation to write log entries to the
same authlog with rest of the RADIUS server and EAP server
functionality.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If eap_user_file is configured to point to an SQLite database, RADIUS
server code can use that database for log information.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, this was silently dropped which left the connection waiting
for timeout. decrypt_error alert can be used here to avoid that.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This same design is used in both the server and the client roles in the
internal TLS implementation. Instead of duplicated implementation, use a
helper function.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of separate server and client side implementations, use a common
set of helper functions for calculating the ServerParams hash for
ServerKeyExchange.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The SHA256-based RSA-AES-128/256 cipher suites were already implemented
and enabled for the internal TLS client, but they had not been enabled
for the server.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, this was enabled only at msgdump verbosity level, but any
level that is more verbose than it should also be included.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit 4345fe963e. That
introduced number of memory leaks and since the rest of the VLAN changes
did not yet go in, it is easier to revert this for now and bring back
the changes after fixes if there is sufficient interest for them in the
future.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the design already available for Access-Request packets to
the RADIUS server and Access-Accept messages. Each user entry can be
configured to add arbitrary RADIUS attributes.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Request the driver to send a Deauthentication frame before doing
any other disconnection steps on the session timeout path. This is
needed when PMF is negotiated for the association since the driver
will need to find the STA entry and the PTK for it to be able to
protect the robust Deauthentication frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In case of Automatic Channel Selection (ACS) failure, we do not have a
real fallback path. Interface still remains in ACS state. To reflect we
did not succeed with ACS, simply disable the interface and indicate this
to user/upper layer entity so that a suitable recovery or error
notification can be performed.
Signed-off-by: Pawel Kulakowski <pawel.kulakowski@tieto.com>
wpa_supplicant already allowed beacon interval to be configured for AP
mode operations, but this was not passed to the driver for IBSS even
though the same parameter can used for that case. Add this for the
nl80211 driver interface to allow beacon interval to be controlled for
IBSS as well.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
handle_assoc_cb() got this addition, but the check in
hostapd_new_assoc_sta() was not modified to be aware of the OSEN special
case for EAPOL state machines to be used for marking a STA authorized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was done in handle_assoc_cb() in ieee802_11.c for drivers that use
hostapd SME/MLME. However, drivers that include SME/MLME implementation
do not use that function and the STA flag needs to be set when
processing the association notification. This is needed to get the STA
entry into showing the proper authorized state and to get the
AP-STA-CONNECTED/DISCONNECTED events on the control interface.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
As per IEEE Std 802.11ac-2013, 'Maximum A-MPDU Length Exponent' field
value is in the range of 0 to 7. Previous implementation assumed EXP0 to
be the maximum length (bits 23, 24 and 25 set) what is incorrect.
This patch adds options to set it up within the 0 to 7 range.
Signed-off-by: Bartosz Markowski <bartosz.markowski@tieto.com>
For example, the previous implementation considered [44, 48, 52, 56] to
be a valid VHT80 channel -- which it is not. This resulted in, e.g.,
failure to start CAC when channels on overlapped segments included DFS
channels.
Add a check similar to the HT40 one to prevent that. The check is
performed this way as the ACS implementation assumes the primary channel
to be the first channel in a given segment.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Previously, we printed this message as a debug one, which was confusing
in case verbose debug messages were disabled. User could think CAC
started but never ended. Add more parameterss to DFS_EVENT_CAC_START, so
external programs can more easily check what was wrong in case of
errors.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
This commit adds an option to optimize AP teardown by leaving the
deletion of keys (including group keys) and stations to the driver.
This optimization option should be used if the driver supports stations
and keys removal when stopping an AP.
For example, the optimization option will always be used for cfg80211
drivers since cfg80211 shall always remove stations and keys when
stopping an AP (in order to support cases where the AP is disabled
without the knowledge of wpa_supplicant/hostapd).
Signed-off-by: Moshe Benji <moshe.benji@intel.com>
Previously, both this and combination of OUI_WFA and P2P_OUI_TYPE were
used. Using the full 32-bit value as a single operation saves a bit in
code size, so start moving towards using it more consistently when
writing or finding the P2P vendor specific element.
Signed-off-by: Rahul Jain <rahul.jain@samsung.com>
CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y build of wpa_supplicant now allows arbitrary
cfg80211 commands to be performed through the new VENDOR ctrl_iface
command by using a special vendor_id ffffffff. The command identifier
(NL80211_CMD_*) is encoded as the subcmd and the attributes in the
hexformatted data area. Response attributes are returned as a hexdump.
For example, this shows a NL80211_CMD_FRAME and a response (cookie
attribute) on a little endian host:
wpa_cli -i wlan0 vendor ffffffff 59 080003004d0000000800260085090000....
0c00580000d7868c0388ffff
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When an interface is disabled through rtm event, wpa_supplicant's
EVENT_INTERFACE_DISABLED is generated, which in turn, may
completely destroy wpa_driver_nl80211_data struct (drv). This
scenario happens now when P2P GO interface is disabled. Since this
struct may be used later in this function it causes segmentation fault.
Fix it by trying to find drv again in the interface list after
wpa_supplicant's event handling.
Signed-off-by: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add a callback to the driver interface that allows vendor specific
commands to be sent. In addition, a control interface command is added
to expose this new interface outside wpa_supplicant:
Vendor command's format:
VENDOR <vendor id> <sub command id> [<hex formatted data>]
The 3rd argument will be converted to binary data and then passed as
argument to the sub command.
This interface is driver independent, but for now, this is only
implemented for the nl80211 driver interface using the cfg80211 vendor
commands.
Signed-off-by: Beni Lev <beni.lev@intel.com>
wpa_driver_nl80211_if_remove() checks bss->if_added before deleting an
interface, which is 0 for the first BSS. The only part of
wpa_driver_nl80211_if_remove() that should get called for WDS STA
interfaces is the call to nl80211_remove_iface(), which can be pulled in
here directly.
Signed-off-by: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
There is no need to use a for loop here since the h variable is
set identically at the beginning of the body anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The following if statements set the new_op_mode value in all cases,
so there is no need to initialize this to 0 first. This removes a
static analyzer warning.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The pos variable was not used between its first and second assignment.
Clean this up by using the pos variables instead of the buf (start of
the buffer).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to maintain a separate counter for this in addition to
the pointer to the current location. In addition, this gets rid of
warnings about unused variable write.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If hapd_iface->bss[i] == NULL, this could have resulted in NULL pointer
dereference in the debug print. Avoid this by skipping the message in
case of NULL pointer. In addition, clear iface->bss[i] to NULL for
additional robustness even though this array gets freed immediately.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was previously checked through the eap_peer_tls_ssl_init() call
which made it difficult for static analyzers. Add an explicit check for
config == NULL into the beginnign of eap_fast_init() since this will
always result in initialization failing anyway.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If wpa_driver_roboswitch_read() fails before such comparison, the values
that are being compared are not initialized properly and as such, there
is not much point in comparing them either.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This seemed to be fine on most code paths, but the code was complex
enough to make the analysis difficult (and a bit too much for static
analyzers). There is no harm in forcing these parameters to be
initialized, so do that to make sure they cannot be left uninitialized.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
bfd_demangle() call could be skipped if data.function == NULL. Make sure
the already freed aname pointer cannot be used again in such a case.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
record->type == NULL case was handled through the record->type_length
comparison. While this was correct, it is a bit difficult for static
analyzers to understand, so add an extra check for NULL to avoid false
reports on this.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
no_offchannel_tx=1 driver parameter can now be used to force the older
remain-on-channel -based offchannel TX design to be used with
mac80211_hwsim. This can be used to increase test coverage with the
hwsim test cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible for the error path to try to use P2P Group ID attribute
even if one was not included in the message. This could result in
dereferencing a NULL pointer, so re-check the pointer before copying the
data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The special case of non-zero status code used in a GAS Comeback Response
frame to indicate that additional delay is needed before the response is
available was not working properly. This case needs to allow the status
code check to be bypassed for the comeback case prior to having received
any response data.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like leaving behind the freed pointed at the end of the array
could end up in a crash triggered by double free in some cases.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
PD Response is sent out using a 200 ms offchannel wait, but that wait
was not cancelled on TX status report. This could result in offchannel
operation being left waiting unnecessarily long. Fix this by making the
P2P_NO_PENDING_ACTION case in Action TX callback cancel the wait if a
pending wait is marked (and mark this for PD Response).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like some deployed devices may send an invalid supported
operating class element (length = 0) in TDLS Setup messages. With
cfg80211, this results in the NL80211_CMD_SET_STATION command failing
due to an invalid argument (cfg80211 mandates supported operating
classes information to have a length of 2..253 octets).
Work around this interop issue by ignoring the Supported Operating Class
element if it has invalid length.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new hostapd.conf parameter subscr_remediation_url can be used to
define the URL of the Subscription Remediation Server that will be added
in a WFA VSA to Access-Accept message if the SQLite user database
indicates that the user need subscription remediation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd can now be configured to advertise OSU Providers with the
new osu_* confgiuration parameters.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd can now be configured to provide access for icon files
(hs20_icon config file parameter) for OSU. The hs20_icon data contains
additional meta data about the icon that is not yet used, but it will be
needed for the OSU Providers list ANQP element.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the authentication server includes the WFA HS 2.0 Session Info URL
AVP in Access-Accept, schedule ESS Disassociation Imminent frame to be
transmitted specified warning time prior to session timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the RADIUS server includes deauthentication request in Access-Accept,
send a WNM-Notification frame to the station after 4-way handshake and
disconnect the station after configurable timeout.
A new control interface command, WNM_DEAUTH_REQ, is added for testing
purposes to allow the notification frame to sent based on local request.
This case does not disconnect the station automatically, i.e., a
separate control interface command would be needed for that.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the RADIUS server includes the WFA RADIUS VSA in Access-Accept to
indicate need for subscription remediation, copy the server URL from
the message and send it to the station after successfully completed
4-way handshake (i.e., after PTK is set to allow PMF to work) in a
WNM-Notification.
AP must not allow PMKSA caching to be used after subscription
remediation association, so do not add the PMKSA cache entry whenever
the authentication server is indicating need for subscription
remediation. This allows station reassociation to use EAP authentication
to move to non-remediation connection.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the station indicated support for Hotspot 2.0, send its release
number and PPS MO ID in Access-Request messages using the WFA RADIUS
VSA.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The Access-Request frames are used to inform the RADIUS server about the
Hotspot 2.0 release number supported by the AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Subscription remediation notification can now be sent from hostapd with:
hostapd_cli hs20_wnm_notif 02:00:00:00:00:00 http://example.com/foo/
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The HS 2.0 Indication element from hostapd now includes the release
number field and the new ANQP Domain ID field. This ID can be configured
with anqp_domain_id parameter in hostapd.conf.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Move excluded SSID filtering step to the end of credential validation
process and return list of BSSes that would otherwise have matching
credentials, but have an excluded SSID. Automatic network selection will
not select such a network, but interworking_connect command can be used
to pick excluded networks.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_supplicant can request OSU icon data with "hs20_icon_request <BSSID>
<icon filename>". This transmits an Icon Request ANQP element and
processes the response in Icon Binary File ANQP elements.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Subscription remediation notification WNM-Notification Request is now
shown in the following way in wpa_supplicant control interface:
<3>HS20-SUBSCRIPTION-REMEDIATION http://example.com/foo/
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The HS 2.0 Indication element from wpa_supplicant now includes the
release number field and wpa_supplicant shows the release number of the
AP in STATUS command (hs20=1 replaced with hs20=<release>).
The new update_identifier field in the cred block can now be used to
configure the PPS MO ID so that wpa_supplicant adds it to the Indication
element in Association Request frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Many drivers support operation without GTK configured, but most (if any)
today do not advertise this. Handle this by skipping GTK cipher suite
configuration if the driver did not advertise support in order to work
around cfg80211 validation steps.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Allow mixed DFS and non-DFS channels, e.g., VHT160 on channels 36-64.
This is useful for testing VHT160 with mac80211_hwsim.
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Add IPv6 support when using udp/udp-remote control interface using the
following new build configuration options:
CONFIG_CTRL_IFACE=udp6
CONFIG_CTRL_IFACE=udp6-remote
This is useful for testing, while we don't need to assign IPv4 address
(static or using DHCP) and can just use auto configured IPv6 addresses
(link local, which is based on the MAC address). Also add scope id
support for link local case.
For example,
./wpa_cli
./wpa_cli -i ::1,9877
./wpa_cli -i fe80::203:7fff:fe05:69%wlan0,9877
Signed-off-by: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
The regulatory rules in Japan do not allow OFDM to be used on channel
14. While this was to some extend assumed to be enforced by drivers
(many of which apparently don't), it is safer to make hostapd enforce
this by disabling any OFDM-related functionality. This tries to avoid
backwards compatibility issues by downgrading the mode rather than
rejecting the invalid configuration.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add configuration of Spectrum Management subfield in the Capability
Information of Beacon, Probe Response, and Association Response frames.
Spectrum Management bit is set when directly requested by new
configuration option spectrum_mgmt_required=1 or when AP is running on
DFS channels. In the future, also TPC shall require this bit to be set.
Signed-hostap: Srinivasan <srinivasanb@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Chaitanya T K <chaitanyatk@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Marek Puzyniak <marek.puzyniak@tieto.com>
Add Power Constraint information element to Beacon and Probe Response
frames when hostapd is configured on 5 GHz band and Country information
element is also added. According to IEEE Std 802.11-2012 a STA shall
determine a local maximum transmit power for the current channel based
on information derived from Country and Power Constraint elements.
In order to add Power Constraint element ieee80211d option need to be
enabled and new local_pwr_constraint config option need to be set to
unsigned value in units of decibels. For now this value is statically
configured but the future goal is to implement dynamic TPC algorithm
to control local power constraint.
Signed-hostap: Srinivasan <srinivasanb@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Chaitanya T K <chaitanyatk@posedge.com>
Signed-hostap: Marek Puzyniak <marek.puzyniak@tieto.com>
UPnP-arch-DeviceArchitecture describe ErrorCode 412 to be used for the
case where no un-epxired subscription matches. This used to return 200
which is not strictly speaking correct even though it is unlikely to
cause any problems.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The caller of the GET parser is checking this already and the GET case
was the only one that ended up doing the duplicated validation step.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When a Probe Request frame from an invitation peer is received, a timer
is schedule to start invitation. However, this could have been scheduled
multiple times (once per Probe Request frame) which is undesirable since
only a single invitation should be initiated.
Signed-off-by: Rahul Jain <rahul.jain@samsung.com>
The previous parser would have skipped a WFA vendor extension attribute
that includes only a single zero-length subelement. No such subelement
has been defined so far, so this does not really affect any
functionality, but better make the parser address this correctly should
such an element ever be added.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like discovery_dev_id test case can still fail and based on the
previously added debug prints, this is happening since the P2P module
believes it is not in Listen state even when a P2P_LISTEN was issued.
p2p_listen_cb() did not get called on remain-on-channel event for some
reason, so lets add more debug to find out why this can happen.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Suppose we have multiple peers and we have peers advertising SD
capability, but no services registered for advertising. In this case,
even if there are multiple broadcast queries set, we might end up
sending only the lastly added broadcast query to the same device (since
SD_INFO won't get set for the first broadcast query). Add support for
multiple wildcard queries to be tracked to enable this type of use
case.
Some times it is seen that before advancing to next device in the list,
the scan results come and update SD_SCHEDULE flag. This will result in
sending the already sent query to the same device without giving chance
to other devices. This issue again is seen with peer devices advertising
SD capability without any services registered.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
These can be used to disable TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2 as a workaround for AAA
servers that have issues interoperating with newer TLS versions.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
This allows NAS-IP-Address, NAS-Identifier, and NAS-IPv6-Address to be
included in the Disconnect-Request packets.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When a station is disconnected based on Disconnect-Request, it is better
to force the station to go through full EAP authentication if it tries
to reconnect.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for an ER to send an unexpected PutWLANResponse action
when the destination STA is in disassociated, but not fully
deauthenticated state. sta->eapol_sm can be NULL in such state and as
such, it would be possible to hit a NULL pointer dereference in the
eapol_auth_eap_pending_cb() call at the end of the
hostapd_wps_probe_req_rx() when trying to proxy the WPS message to the
station. Fix this by validating that sta->eapol_sm is set before
processing the message.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This reverts commit 51e3eafb68. There are
too many deployed AAA servers that include both id-kp-clientAuth and
id-kp-serverAuth EKUs for this change to be acceptable as a generic rule
for AAA authentication server validation. OpenSSL enforces the policy of
not connecting if only id-kp-clientAuth is included. If a valid EKU is
listed with it, the connection needs to be accepted.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It can be helpful to see from the debug log why the P2P Device role did
not reply to a Probe Request frame.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the connection from hostapd authentication server to hlr_auc_gw fails
due to hlr_auc_gw not running yet, the local socket file was left
behind. Delete the socket file on connect() failure path.
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This fixes issues in using a password that includes a UTF-8 character
with three-byte encoding with EAP methods that use NtPasswordHash
(anything using MSCHAPv2 or LEAP).
Signed-off-by: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use nl80211_set_iface_id() in wpa_driver_nl80211_get_hw_feature_data(),
as otherwise the function fails for a P2P Device interface (which does
not have a netdev associated with it).
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
In function ieee802_1x_get_mib_sta(), eap_server_get_name() may return
NULL, and it could be dereferenced immidiately by os_snprintf() (if the
snprintf implementation does not handle NULL pointer).
Signed-hostap: Eytan Lifshitz <eytan.lifshitz@intel.com>
In function tls_verify_cb(), X509_STORE_CTX_get_current_cert() may
return NULL, and it will be dereferenced by X509_get_subject_name().
Signed-hostap: Eytan Lifshitz <eytan.lifshitz@intel.com>
Initialize variables explicitly to avoid [-Wmaybeuninitialized] compiler
warning in hostapd_handle_dfs() and
hostapd_dfs_start_channel_switch_cac() functions.
Signed-hostap: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
This uses the new nl80211 attributes to allow the connect command to
provide bssid and freq hints to the driver without limiting roaming to
the specific BSS/frequency. This can be used by drivers that perform
internal BSS selection (WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_BSS_SELECTION) as a candidate
for initial association.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Confirm-before-commit validation step allowed execution to continue on
error case. This could result in segfault in sae_check_confirm() if the
temporary SAE data was not available (as it would not be, e.g., in case
of an extra SAE confirm message being received after successful
exchange). Fix this by stopping SAE processing immediately after
detecting unexpected state for confirm message. In addition, make the
public sae.c functions verify sae->tmp before dereferencing it to make
this type of bugs less likely to result in critical issues.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It was possible to FAIL return for a P2P_FIND command that was issued
while an already started P2P_FIND operation was in the scan phase. This
can be confusing for upper layer software, so hide the failure report
from the ctrl_iface response. The previously started scan will continue
the find operation after this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, unconfigured state was forcing the best supported
authentication and encryption state to be shown in WPS messages,
including AP Settings in M7 in case the AP acts as an Enrollee. This is
not really correct for the AP Settings case, so change that one to
indicate the currently configured state.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The mechanism of using Status attribute in GO Negotiation Request was
used in some early specification drafts, but it is not compliant with
the current P2P specification where GO Negotiation Request is used only
for the purpose of initiating a new GO Negotiation. However, some
deployed devices use it to indicate rejection of GO Negotiation in a
case where they have sent out GO Negotiation Response with status 1. The
P2P specification explicitly disallows this.
To avoid unnecessary interoperability issues and extra frames, mark the
pending negotiation as failed and do not reply to this GO Negotiation
Request frame. Previously, GO Negotiation Response frame with status=4
was sent back as an indication of the GO Negotiation Request frame being
invalid. This response is not sent anymore and the status code for the
P2P-GO-NEG-FAILURE event is changed from 4 (invalid parameters) to 11
(rejected by user) for this specific workaround case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for the driver to report Beacon RX prior to hostapd
having completed AP mode setup, e.g., when changing country code. Beacon
frame processing for OLBC was not prepared for this and could trigger
segfault due to NULL pointer dereference. Fix this by ignoring the
Beacon frames received prior to completing interface setup when
determining OLBC updates.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit b1f625e0d8 extended
ap_scan_as_station to be able to distinguish between AP and P2P GO
iftypes. However, it did this in a way that completely lost the original
mode because drv->nlmode had already been replaced with the station
mode. Fix this by storing the correct old mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the peer device has already acknowledge receipt of the Invitation
Request frame, it is better not to re-start invitation by sending
another Invitation Request. This should not be needed since the peer
already has received the Invitation Request frame and sending the second
round in this type of sequence can cause issues with nl80211 offloaded
offchannel TX operations since driver_nl80211.c will lose the cookie
value for the first pending Action frame and may not be able to cancel
offchannel wait for it properly. this has been seen to trigger a failure
in the p2p_go_invite_auth test case with the scan failing due to GO
sending out Probe Response frame on incorrect channel (the channel used
in that not-cancelled Action TX).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit bd3a373767 added a mechanism to use
AP Channel attribute from within a Credential attribute to optimize
scans. However, this design is not actually used with the WPS NFC use
cases. With configuration token, the AP Channel attribute is in the same
container with the Credential attribute (and that was also handled in
the previous implementation). With connection handover, AP Channel
information is outside the Credential attribute as well.
Simplify implementation by removing the AP Channel within Credential
case. This allows wpas_wps_use_cred() to get the AP Channel from the
container instead of having to find this during credential iteration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is not really used in practice and there is no need to maintain
unsed code that would only print debug log entries.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 795baf773f ('hostapd: Filter
channel list updated events after country code change') uses the
EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED data pointer, but it updated only one of the
callers to provide that data. NL80211_CMD_REG_BEACON_HINT event was
still sending the event without the initiator data and resulted in NULL
pointer dereference, e.g., if a scan was run while hostapd was running
and the driver was in world roaming state and enabled a channel for
active scans.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The hostapd compilation displays a below warning On NetBSD 6.1.2.
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:72:1: warning: 'get80211opmode' defined but not used
This patch solves it and moves other functions to appropriate position to
reduce #ifdef.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Before this patch, 1 second timeout was used for regulatory updates. In
some cases, specially when we reload driver modules on some slower
platforms this could take more than 1 second (about 2 seconds). This is
important specially for DFS case, where we have to have correct DFS
region before we will start CAC. In other case (unknown DFS region), CAC
will fail. 5 seconds should be enough for all cases.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
The original RSSI filter semantics for scheduled scan were
really confusing - a separate matchset was created, but it
wasn't actually treated as a separate matchset in the kernel
but rather used as the global RSSI value. The RSSI matchset
thus behaved like an RSSI filter outside of the matchsets,
being ANDed rather than ORed (as normal between matchsets.)
To make this less confusing, I changed the kernel API a bit
to actually treat the RSSI inside each matchset properly,
but keeping it compatible with the old approach by using a
matchset with only an RSSI value as the default for all the
other matchsets, and adding it as a separate matchset only
if it's the only one.
The proper way for wpa_supplicant to do this then would be
to add the RSSI to each SSID matchset, and only add another
matchset without SSID if there's none with.
However, to keep compatibility with older kernels, always
keep the non-SSID matchset and only add the RSSI to all the
other matchsets. This gets close to the desired behaviour,
the only difference would be that we shouldn't add the RSSI
matchset if there are others, but stays compatible with old
and new kernels, as new ones ignore the RSSI-only matchset
if there are others and those others have an RSSI.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
1. In wpa_config_process_bgscan() fix memory leak after
calling wpa_config_parse_string()
2. In hostapd_config_defaults(), on failure to allocate bss->radius,
conf->bss was not freed.
3. In p2p_deauth_nofif(), memory allocated in p2p_parse_ies() was not
freed in case of NULL minor_reason_code.
4. In p2p_disassoc_nofif(), memory allocated in p2p_parse_ies() was
not freed in case of NULL minor_reason_code.
5. In p2p_process_go_neg_conf(), memory allocated was not freed in
case that the P2P Device interface was not waiting for a
GO Negotiation Confirm.
6. In wpa_set_pkcs11_engine_and_module_path(), the wrong pointer was
checked.
Signed-hostap: Eytan Lifshitz <eytan.lifshitz@intel.com>
It is possible for channel switch notification to be missing channel
type attribute. This is true at least for VHT80. This led to
iface->conf->secondary_channel being set to 0. This in turn made
subsequent DFS-triggered CSA to fail due to invalid frequency
parameters.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This checks if the NL80211_ATTR_IFINDEX attribute is present before
trying to get the value of interface index.
Signed-hostap: Shital Jaju <shitalj@broadcom.com>
If CONFIG_WPS_TESTING=y is enabled in build configuration, the new
wps_corrupt_pkhash parameter (similar to wps_testing_dummy_cred) can be
used to request public key hash to be corrupted in all generated OOB
Device Password attributes. This can be used for testing purposes to
validate public key hash validation steps.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds a new P2P Invitation mechanism to invite a P2P Device with an
NFC Tag to an already operating group when the GO with NFC Device reads
the NFC Tag. The P2P Device with the NFC Tag will then accept invitation
and connect to the group automatically using its OOB Device Password.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When "P2P_SET nfc_tag 1" is used to enable the own NFC Tag for P2P, also
enable it for any running GO interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
P2P Group ID can optionally be included in the connection handover
messages when acting as a P2P Client in a group. Add this information
and show it in the P2P-NFC-PEER-CLIENT event message.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When the NFC connection handover message received from a peer indicates
that the peer is operating as a GO on a specific channel, use that
information to avoid having to go through full scan. In addition, skip
the separate join-a-group scan since we already know the operating
channel, GO P2P Device Address, and SSID.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was already done for Registrar, but the Enrollee case did not
set config error properly if Registrar public key did not match the
hash received during NFC connection handover.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of automatically triggering a connection, provide an indication
of one of the devices being a P2P client to upper layers to allow user
to determine what to do next.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Send a P2P-NFC-BOTH-GO event to upper layers to determine what to
do in case both devices going through NFC connection handover are
already operating as a GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This new mechanism allows P2P Client to request an IPv4 address from the
GO as part of the 4-way handshake to avoid use of DHCP exchange after
4-way handshake. If the new mechanism is used, the assigned IP address
is shown in the P2P-GROUP-STARTED event on the client side with
following new parameters: ip_addr, ip_mask, go_ip_addr. The assigned IP
address is included in the AP-STA-CONNECTED event on the GO side as a
new ip_addr parameter. The IP address is valid for the duration of the
association.
The IP address pool for this new mechanism is configured as global
wpa_supplicant configuration file parameters ip_addr_go, ip_addr_mask,
ip_addr_star, ip_addr_end. For example:
ip_addr_go=192.168.42.1
ip_addr_mask=255.255.255.0
ip_addr_start=192.168.42.2
ip_addr_end=192.168.42.100
DHCP mechanism is expected to be enabled at the same time to support P2P
Devices that do not use the new mechanism. The easiest way of managing
the IP addresses is by splitting the IP address range into two parts and
assign a separate range for wpa_supplicant and DHCP server.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When NFC connection handover is used to trigger GO Negotiation, the
channel used for the GO Negotiation frames is already known. As such,
there is no need to use the Listen operations to find the peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The device with the NFC Tag can be configured to enable NFC to be used
with "P2P_SET nfc_tag 1" and "P2P_LISTEN" commands to allow static
handover to be used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"NFC_REPORT_HANDOVER {INIT,RESP} P2P <req> <sel>" can now be used to
report completed NFC negotiated connection handover in which the P2P
alternative carrier was selected.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"NFC_GET_HANDOVER_{REQ,SEL} NDEF P2P-CR" can now be used to build P2P
alternative carrier record for NFC connection handover request/select
messages.
Static connection handover case can be enabled by configuring the DH
parameters (either with wps_nfc_* configuration parameters or with
WPS_NFC_TOKEN command at run time. The NFC Tag contents can be generated
with "NFC_GET_HANDOVER_SEL NDEF P2P-CR-TAG" after having configured
Listen channel (p2p_listen_reg_class/p2p_listen_channel).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
GO Negotiation needs to know which OOB Device Password ID is assigned
for the peer when NFC is used as the trigger.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These functions can be used to build the WPS attributes for P2P NFC
connection handover messages.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new WPS connection handover select includes Registrar public key
hash instead of credential. Use the new information to start
abbreviated WPS handshake instead of configuring a new network directly
from the old Credential-from-NFC design.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The contents of the WPS connection handover select message was modified
to include the Registrar public key hash instead of the credential.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new NFC connection handover design requires the AP/Registrar to
process the connection handover request message received from the
Enrollee. Add control interface commands for handling this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is more useful to be able to build a single NFC carrier record
instead of the full connection handover request message to allow
external components to decide whether to negotiate which alternative
carrier is used. This updates the carrier record contents to the new
design to include Enrollee public key hash and provides this as a
carrier record instead of full message. An external program is expected
to be used to build the full NFC connection handover message with
potentially other alternative carrier records included.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows DH key generation to be shared for other purposes than just
the case of OOB Device Password building. In addition, force the DH
public key buffer to be full 192 octets with zero padding to avoid
issues with the buffer being used in messages sent to a peer device.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new Device Password ID 7 is used to indicate that NFC connection
handover is used with DH public key hash from both devices being
exchanged over the NFC connection handover messages. This allows an
abbreviated M1-M2 handshake to be used since Device Password does not
need to be used when DH is authenticated with the out-of-band
information (validation of the public key against the hash).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When both the Registrar and Enrollee public key hashes are delivered
out-of-band (in NFC connection handover), use abbreviated WPS handshake
(skip M3-M8).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Since the Enrollee can now get the public key hash from the Registrar,
there is need to validate this during the WPS protocol run.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of terminating the WPS protocol immediately, go through an M2D
exchange to notify Enrollee of the public key hash mismatch.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This old Version attribute is not really needed anymore for these use
cases with the assumption that there are no existing WPS+NFC
deployments. It was removed from the WSC specification, so make the
implementation match that change.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Provide local GO channel to the P2P module so that it can be used in
messages that indicate the current operating channel.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This functionality is needed for other messages, too, so split the group
info building code into a separate helper function.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds a QCA vendor specific nl80211 event to allow the driver to
indicate a list of frequency ranges that should be avoided due to
interference or possible known co-existance constraints. Such
frequencies are marked as not allowed for P2P use to force groups to be
formed on different channels.
If a P2P GO is operating on a channel that the driver recommended not to
use, a notification about this is sent on the control interface and
upper layer code may decide to tear down the group and optionally
restart it on another channel. As a TODO item, this could also be changed
to use CSA to avoid removing the group.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This file is used as a registry of identifier assignments from the
Qualcomm Atheros OUI 00:13:74 for purposes other than MAC address
assignment. One of the first uses will be for nl80211 vendor
commands/events which is reason for the preparation change in
driver_nl80211.c
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When GAS is used with PMF negotiated, Protected Dual of Public Action
frames are expected to be used instead of Public Action frames, i.e.,
the GAS/ANQP frames are expected to be encrypted. Conver Public Action
GAS queries to use Dual of Public Action frame if PMF has been
negotiated with the AP to which the frame is being sent.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When GAS is used with PMF negotiated, Protected Dual of Public Action
frames are expected to be used instead of Public Action frames, i.e.,
the GAS/ANQP frames are expected to be encrypted. Add support for this
different category of Action frames being used for GAS. The payload
after the Category field is identical, so the only change is in using
the Category field based on what was received in the request frames. For
backwards compatibility, do not enforce protected dual to be used on the
AP side, i.e., follow what the station does.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Due to misplaced parenthesis, unprotected not-Robust Action frames
(e.g., Public Action frames) were dropped in handle_assoc() when such
frames were received during an association that had negotiated use of
PMF. This is not correct since only unprotected Robust Action frames
were supposed to be handled in this way.
This would have broken any Public Action frame use during PMF
association, but such frames were not really supposed to be used
currently (ANQP as the only possible use case should really use
protected dual option in such case).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Fix sizeof in a validity comparison of nl80211_vendor_cmd_info size. The
incorrect version happened to work on 64-bit builds due the structure
being eight octets, but this was incorrect and would not used with
32-bit builds.
Signed-hostap: Max Stepanov <Max.Stepanov@intel.com>
While iterating over the stations hostapd_ctrl_iface_sta_mib()
might be called with sta == NULL. Fix this.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The new default value (from 300 to 60 seconds) makes the internal P2P
peer list somewhat faster to react to peers becoming unreachable while
still maintaining entries for some time to avoid them disappearing
during user interaction (e.g., selecting a peer for a connection or
entering a PIN).
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
A P2P Device while in the Listen state waiting to respond for the
obtained group negotiation request shall give a fair chance for other
concurrent sessions to use the shared radio by inducing an idle time
between the successive listen states. However, if there are no
concurrent operations, this idle time can be reduced.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, GO Negotiation Request frame was used to update a peer entry
if only a Probe Request from that peer had been received. However, it
would be possible, even if unlikely, for a peer to be discovered based
on receiving Provision Discovery Request frame from it and no Probe
Request frame. In such a case, the Listen frequency of the peer would
not be known and group formation could not be (re-)initialized with that
peer. Fix this by allowing the GO Negotiation Request frame to update
peer entry if the current peer entry does not include Listen or
Operating frequency.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds one more case of active P2P peer detection so that
p2p_expire_peers() cannot hit a case where a GO Negotiation peer would
be removed.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
The information of the peer's supported channel and operating class
is required for the driver to do TDLS off channel operations with a
compatible peer. Pass this information to the driver when the peer
station is getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some EAP methods can go through a step that is expected to fail and as
such, should not trigger temporary network disabling when processing
EAP-Failure or deauthentication. EAP-WSC for WPS was already handled as
a special case, but similar behavior is needed for EAP-FAST with
unauthenticated provisioning.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAP-FAST requires pac_file to be configured, so make it clearer from the
debug output if missing configuration parameter was the reason for
EAP-FAST initialization failing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The hash return buffer was previously left uninitialized in case
externally stored password ("password=ext:...") was used. This could
result in MSCHAPv2 failure if that uninitialized memory happened to be
something else than zero.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for the configuration to be temporarily invalid when
adding a new AP through SET commands followed by ENABLE. Avoid this
issue by using less strict validation on SET commands and perform full
configuration validation only on ENABLE. Use cases with configuration
file maintain their previous behavior, i.e., full validation after the
file has been read.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit 792c8877c3
('P2P: Send GO Negotiation Confirm without wait').
Some drivers rely on the wait period for sending packets on the
off-channel. If the wait value is small, there's a race condition where
the driver ROC might complete before the packet was sent out. This
doesn't impede other drivers, as the wait is cancelled when a
Tx-completion arrives from the remote peer.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
The missing call to scan_action_done() may keep us off-channel for 250
ms following sending GO Negotiation Response. In case the operating
channel is different from this channel and we're GO, a race could lead
to start beaconing while off-channel. This could potentially cause the
Beacon frames to go out on incorrect channel with some drivers.
Signed-hostap: Eyal Shapira <eyal@wizery.com>
The error path in bsd_init() on struct bsd_driver_data allocation was
jumping to location where drv is dereferenced. That will crash and it is
easier to just return from the function since no cleanup steps are
needed in this case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Currently these three steps runs for each event.
1. get buffer size via system
2. allocate a memory for event
3. free the memory
The wpa_supplicant receives 4 events from boot to be connected.
So this patch prepare the event buffer at the init process.
I have tested wpa_supplicant on NetBSD 6.1.2.
But I could not tested hostapd because I do not have AP enabled device.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Replace channel_switch_supported flag of the
wpa_driver_nl80211_data by WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_AP_CSA inside
wpa_driver_capa.flags. It makes more sense and also can
be accessed by wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This is just like the same command in wpa_supplicant, i.e., "hostapd_cli
status driver" can be used to fetch information about the driver status
and capabilities.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
PEAPv2 implementation was not fully completed and there does not seem to
be any deployments of PEAPv2 nor any clear sign of such showing up in
the future either. As such, there is not much point in maintaining this
implementation in hostapd/wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The standard fragment_size network parameter can now be used to
configure EAP-pwd fragmentation limit instead of always using the
hardcoded value of 1020.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The standard fragment_size network parameter can now be used to
configure EAP-IKEv2 fragmentation limit instead of always using the
hardcoded value of 1400.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Setting methodState = DONE for the case where GPSK-1 is found to be
invalid or incompatible allows EAP state machine to proceed to FAILURE
state instead of remaining stuck until AP times out the connection.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
phase1 parameter 'cipher' can now be used to specify which algorithm
proposal is selected, e.g., with phase1="cipher=1" selecting AES-based
design and cipher=2 SHA256-based. This is mainly for testing purposes,
but can also be used to enforce stronger algorithms to be used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
One of the RFC 4137 state transitions (METHOD -> FAILURE) had been
forgotten and this could result in EAP peer method processing not
reporting failure immediately and instead, remain stuck waiting for the
connection to time out. Fix this by adding the methodState == DONE &&
decision == FAIL case to allow immediate reporting of failures.
The condition from RFC 4137 as-is would cause problems for number of the
existing EAP method implementations since they use that in places where
the final message before EAP-Failure should really be sent to the EAP
server (e.g., WSC_Done in EAP-WSC). Address this by includng eapRespData
== NULL as an additional constraint for entering FAILURE state directly
from METHOD.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit e2f5a9889a was supposed to prevent
new scan request from pushing out the old one. However, it did not
really do that since eloop_deplete_timeout() returned 0 both for the
case where the old timeout existed (and was sooner) and if the old
timeout did not exist. It returned 1 only for the case where an old
timeout did exist and was larger than the new requested value. That case
used to result in wpa_supplicant_req_scan() rescheduling the timeout,
but hew code in eloop_deplete_timeout() did the exact same thing and as
such, did not really change anything apart from the debug log message.
Extend the eloop_deplete_timeout() (and eloop_replenish_timeout() for
that matter since it is very similar) to return three different values
based on whether the timeout existed or not and if yes, whether it was
modified. This allows wpa_supplicant_req_scan() to schedule a new
timeout only in the case there was no old timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new control interface command RADIO_WORK can be used by external
programs to request radio allocation slots from wpa_supplicant if
exclusive radio control is needed, e.g., for offchannel operations. If
such operations are done directly to the driver, wpa_supplicant may not
have enough information to avoid conflicting operations. This new
command can be used to provide enough information and radio scheduling
to avoid issues with such cases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Avoid concurrent P2P scan requests with any other exclusive use of the
radio by using the radio work queuing mechanism. This removes some of
the earlier workarounds that postponed scans depending on other
operations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the port status did not change or would not need to get an update
after portEnabled changes, there is no need to try to set the driver to
use the same value it is already using based on the previous state.
Remove such calls to reduce number of operations during reassociation.
In addition, this cleans up the debug log by removing unnecessary
duplicated entries.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the BSS table within wpa_supplicant is flushed, request the driver to
flush its own scan result table during the next scan. This can avoid
unexpected old BSS entries showing up after BSS_FLUSH or FLUSH command
in cases where the driver may maintain its internal cache of scan
results (e.g., cfg80211 BSS table persists at least for 15 seconds).
In addition to doing this automatically on BSS_FLUSH/FLUSH, a new SCAN
command argument, only_new=1, can be used to request a manual scan
request to do same. Though, it should be noted that this maintains the
BSS table within wpa_supplicant. BSS_FLUSH followed by SCAN command can
be used to clear all BSS entries from both the driver and
wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This debugging mechanism has now been deprecated by the control
interface commands that can be used to fetch same internal information
from hostapd in a more convenient way. Leave the empty USR1 signal
handler and configuration file parameter for backwards compatibility.
They can be removed in future versions of hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The per-STA/Supplicant state information from the EAPOL authenticator
is now available through "STA <MAC Address> eapol" command.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds TX/RX statistics and information about association into the
per-STA data that is available through the hostapd control interface. In
addition, information about the EAP method is now included with the IEEE
802.1X data.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These old driver wrappers have been removed quite some time ago, but
some of the build configuration notes were still describing how they
are configured.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Print into the debug log the list of vendor commands and events that the
driver supports. In addition, add a generic handler for vendor events.
This can be extended for each vendor/subcmd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The P2P_PRESENCE_REQ command did not give any easily available
indication of the response received from the GO. Make this more useful
by providing such response (if received) as a ctrl_iface monitor event
(P2P-PRESENCE-RESPONSE).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intval is marked le16 and should be used through proper byte order
conversion functions even if it ended up getting set correctly due to
the two operations cancelling each other.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These were somewhat more hidden to avoid direct use, but there are now
numerous places where these are needed and more justification to make
the extern int declarations available from wpa_debug.h. In addition,
this avoids some warnings from sparse.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
use_monitor=1 and force_connect_cmd=1 driver parameters can now be used
to force older monitor interface design and the connect API (SME in
driver) to increase hwsim testing coverage.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If Action frame registration in nl80211_mgmt_subscribe_non_ap() failed
for any frame type, the previous implementation skipped
nl80211_mgmt_handle_register_eloop() call. This is not desirable since
none of the Action frame types could be received and even worse, the
following nl80211_destroy_eloop_handle() call for nl_mgmt would likely
result in crashing the process due to the ELOOP_SOCKET_INVALID XOR
operation. This could be triggered at least in a P2P group interface
startup failure case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, it was possible for bss_info_handler() to end up dropping a
newer scan result entry if there were two entries with the same BSSID
and SSID (i.e., only frequency was different) and we were not associated
with either. This could happen, e.g., in some P2P use cases where device
discovery may happen on different channels. Fix this by checking the age
of the scan entries as well to prefer the most recent response.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Most of the attributes to these commands are identical and there is no
need to maintain two copies of the same functionality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
WPA_CIPHER_* and CIPHER_* are used for the exact same set of cipher
suites with the main difference being that the WPA_CIPHER_* version is
suitable to be used as a bitfield. Similarly, WPA_KEY_MGMT_* and
KEY_MGMT_* have similar design for AKMs. There is no need to maintain
two separate copies of the definitions since the bitfield compatible
version can be used for both needs. Get rid of the CIPHER_* and
KEY_MGMT_* versions to clean up the implementation by getting rid of
unnecessary mapping functions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT was previously set only for
NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE, but it should also be set when using
NL80211_CMD_COMMAND (driver-based SME) even though none of the current
non-mac80211 drivers use this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The option of handling upper layer P2P management operations within the
driver/firmware was originally planned to be used with wpa_supplicant,
but this has not really happened and there is no clear sign of this
being needed in the near term either. This functionality has not been
completed and it is certainly not being kept up-to-date or tested. As
such, it is best to remove it for now and if this or something similar
is needed in the future, it can be brought back once a clear need for it
has been demonstrated first.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
prime_len was added to the start pointer twice and because of this, the
actual y coordinate was not verified to be valid. This could also result
in reading beyond the buffer in some cases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
phase1 parameters dhgroup, encr, prf, and mac can now be used to specify
which algorithm proposal is selected, e.g., with phase1="dhgroup=3
encr=1 prf=1 mac=1" selecting the mandatory-to-implement case. This is
mainly for testing purposes, but can also be used to enforce stronger
algorithms to be used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These information elements are not really used anywhere in hostapd or
wpa_supplicant nor is there any plan to use them. As such, there is no
need to keep the code here either, so save couple of bytes here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This driver event was used separately for some Action frames, but all
the driver wrappers converted to this from information that would have
been enough to indicate an EVENT_RX_MGMT event. In addition, the
received event was then converted back to a full IEEE 802.11 management
frame for processing in most cases. This is unnecessary complexity, so
get rid of the extra path and use EVENT_RX_MGMT for Action frames as
well as other management frame subtypes.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to silence compiler warnings in cases where #ifdef
blocks can leave some variables or functions unused and there is no
cleaner way of avoiding the warnings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 88b32a99d3 added support for using
some Action frame processing in hostapd for drivers that handle most of
SME/MLME internally (it added FT, this has since be extended for SA
Query and WNM). However, this was added in a way that ended up getting
both the hostapd_rx_action() and hostapd_action_rx() called for Action
frames. This could result in an attempt to process FT, SA Query, and WNM
Action frames twice.
There is need for more significant cleanup in Action frame processing in
hostapd depending on the driver type, but as a simple step to avoid
issues, skip the hostapd_action_rx() call if hostapd_rx_action()
processed the frame.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even though this is a short timeout, it is at least theoretically
possible for the interface to be removed while waiting for
reconfiguration to start. Avoid issues with this by cancelling the
timeout on any WPS interface deinit. In theory, this should be postponed
until interface removal, but that does not fit very nicely to the
current wps_hostapd.c style.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, wps_version_number was used only to test extensibility to
newer version numbers, but it can also be used to enable testing of
older versions (1.0), e.g., to avoid hitting some 2.0 specific
validation steps.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is fine to try to cancel a registration that does not exist, so there
is no need to have the duplicated checks for eloop timeout and socket
registration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was already possible to configure hostapd and wpa_supplicant to use
FT-SAE for the key management, but number of places were missing proper
AKM checks to allow FT to be used with the new AKM.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Action frame RX report through EVENT_RX_ACTION did not indicate whether
the frame was protected or not even though that information is available
in mlme_event_mgmt(). hostapd_rx_action() has a workaround for setting
the protected flag for SA Query frames, but that did not apply for other
frames, like FT Action. This broke FT-over-DS when PMF is enabled with
newer kernel versions (i.e., the ones that do not use monitor interface
for receiving management frames).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The earlier changes to buffer EAPOL frames when not associated to avoid
race conditions (especially commit
3ab35a6603 but maybe something even before
that) broke PeerKey 4-way handshake. Fix this by using a separate check
before the race condition workaround to process PeerKey 4-way handshake
EAPOL-Key messages differently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
PeerKey entries need to be removed on disassociation and this needs to
be done in a way that cancels the possibly pending eloop timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is not really needed for anything and the standard does not require
such validation step to be made for Authentication frame transmission.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be useful for displaying the current STA state and also for
determining whether some operations are likely to fail or need
additional delay.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd_drv_wnm_oper() needs to indicate an error if the driver callback
function is not implemented. Without this, the buf_len argument could
have been left uninitialized which could result in crashing the process.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier to trigger the ESS Disassociation Imminent
operation from different sources.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds first steps at processing a BSS Transition Management Query on
the AP side. Mainly, the message is parsed and printed out in the debug
log and a minimal BSS Transition Management Request frame is sent as a
response. BSS Transition Management Response frame is also parsed and
details printed out in the debug log.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous version could end up calling WPA authenticator routines
even though the authenticator had not been initialized and this could
result in NULL pointer dereference.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This prepares wpa_supplicant for accepting cases where the AP does not
use group addressed frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the extended key usage of the AAA server certificate indicates
that the certificate is for client use, reject the TLS handshake.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
OCSP response may not include all the needed CA certificates, so use the
ones received during TLS handshake.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The five second timeout to call wps_er_deinit_finish() could potentially
be left behind when removing the ER data based on some other event. This
could result in double-freeing of wps_er context killing the process,
e.g., if the WPS ER functionality is stopped while in the process of
unsubscribing from an AP and then restarted.
In addition, AP entries could still be present in the
er->ap_unsubscribing list when the deinit timeout hits. These entries
would still maintain HTTP context pointing to the ER which would be
freed here and as such, the following HTTP client callback could refer
to freed memory and kill the process. Fix this by freeing AP entries
from ap_unsubscribing list when ER is deinitialized from timeout even if
such AP entries have not completed unsubscription from UPnP events.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Reduce race condition of the station trying to reconnect immediately
after AP reconfiguration through WPS by rescheduling the reload
timeout to happen after EAP completion rather than the originally
scheduled 100 ms after new configuration became known.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This enables more convenient protocol testing of station side
functionality in various error cases and unexpected sequences without
having to implement each test scenario within hostapd.
ext_mgmt_frame_handle parameter can be set to 1 to move all management
frame processing into an external program through control interface
events (MGMT-RX and MGMT-TX-STATUS) and command (MGMT_TX).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These files have been distributed only under the BSD license option
since February 2012. Clarify the license statements in the files to
match that to avoid confusion.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If configuration of the group key to the driver fails, move the WPA
group into failed state and indication group setup error to avoid cases
where AP could look like it is working even through the keys are not set
correctly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds initial parts for supporting the new GCMP-256, CCMP-256,
BIP-GMAC-128, BIP-GMAC-256, and BIP-CMAC-256 cipher suites.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If secondary channel is provided for CSA, advertise it in the Secondary
Channel Offset element in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
When CSA flow starts, store the entire struct hostapd_freq_params and
not only CS frequency as it was before. The additional freq_params are
required to advertise CS supplementary IEs such as secondary channel,
wide bandwidth CS, etc.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This allows use of structs (and not only pointers) defined in drivers.h.
Remove also some not needed forward declarations and redundant includes.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The event debouncing isn't very accurate (since it doesn't
take sub-second resolution into account), but it should use
monotonic time anyway since it doesn't care about the wall
clock.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The PBC ignore-start workaround just needs to check whether
the time is within 5 seconds, so should use monotonic time.
While at it, add a few more ifdefs to clearly separate the
code and variables needed.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
PBC sessions are just time-stamped when activated, and
eventually time out, so should use monotonic time.
While at it, make the code use os_reltime_expired().
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The eloop already tracks the expiration/lifetime, and the expiration
isn't really used, so remove it. It should otherwise have used monotonic
time, but since it's not actually used, we can remove it instead.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The RADIUS server needs to calculate uptime, which is relative
and thus should use monotonic time.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Since the RADIUS client cares about relative time (retry timeout)
only, it should use monotonic time.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The BSS table, scan timeout, and related functionality should use
monotonic time since they care about relative values (age) only.
Unfortunately, these are all connected, so the patch can't be split
further. Another problem with this is that it changes the driver wrapper
API. Though, it seems only the test driver is using this.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This should probably have used monotonic time for entry timestamps, but
as those aren't used at all right now, so just remove them entirely.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The request retry loop only retries for 5 seconds, so any time
jumps would probably not affect it much, but it should be using
monotonic time nonetheless since it only cares about duration.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Wall time jumps shouldn't affect MMIC failure/TKIP countermeasures,
so use monotonic time. Change the michael_mic_failure variable to
struct os_reltime for type-safety.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Since the PMKSA cache only uses relative time, use the monotonic time
functions instead of wall time to be correct when the clock jumps.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
For type-safety, make sta->acct_session_start a struct os_reltime
and then use monotonic time for accounting. For RADIUS reporting,
continue to use wall clock time as specified by RFC 2869, but for
the session time use monotonic time.
Interestingly, RFC 2869 doesn't specify a timezone, so the value
is somewhat arbitrary.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Do not assume the driver supports QoS Mapping, but instead, advertise
support for this only if CONFIG_INTERWORKING is defined and driver
indicates support for configuring QoS Map.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The driver_nl80211.c changes are needed to avoid compiler warnings
with two frequency attributes pointing to the same value.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If more BSSes are added in config file than are supported by the driver,
segmentation fault can appear. For this case, the interface_added flag
needs to be cleared if adding a new BSS fails.
Signed-hostap: Marek Kwaczynski <marek.kwaczynski@tieto.com>
Until now DFS was simply restarting the AP when radar was detected. Now
CSA is used to perform smooth switch to the new channel. Stations not
supporting CSA will behave as before.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This is needed for AP CSA. Since CSA must happen immediately after radar
is detected there's no time to perform CAC. Thus, radar channels must be
disabled when looking for a new channel to escape to after a radar is
detected.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Adds support for VHT by parsing bandwidth and center_freq{1,2}.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Just the usual, with a new function os_reltime_initialized()
thrown in that checks whether time has ever been retrieved
(time can't be completely zero).
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This helper functions checks whether a given entry has expired,
given the last active timestamp, the current time, and a timeout.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Based on priority, remove the connection with least priority whenever
a frequency conflict is detected.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Allow another EAP method to be tried if one of the enabled methods
fails. If all the remaining methods fail, reject connection by adding a
new METHOD_REQUEST -> FAILURE transition. Previously, this case resulted
in the state machine trying to send a message when none was available
and then waiting for a following event until timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is possible for the authentication server to be configured with a
PKCS #12 file that includes a private key, a server certificate, and a
CA certificate. This combination could result in server_cert and ca_cert
parameters not being present and that should still result in TLS context
getting initialized.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It was possible to configure hostapd in a way that could try to
initialize a TLS-based EAP method even when TLS library context was not
initialized (e.g., due to not configuring server or CA certificate).
Such a case could potentially result in NULL pointer dereference in the
TLS library, so check for this condition and reject EAP method
initialization.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 390e489c0d extended hostapd BSS
interface removal capabilities. However, it ended up causing a
regression in wpa_supplicant P2P group interface handling. That P2P
group interface is removed through another driver_nl80211.c BSS context
and as such, the bss->added_if is not set. Fix this by verifying whether
the request is for another ifindex and if so, removing the interface
even if added_if is not marked.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some non-mac80211 drivers, such as ath6kl, support STA inactivity timer
in firmware and may not provide connected stations' idle time to the
userspace. If the driver indicates support for offloaded operation, do
not start the inactivity timer in the hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Mohammed Shafi Shajakhan <mohammed@qca.qualcomm.com>
struct beacon_data contains a lot of pointers. Make sure it gets cleared
to zero if hostapd_build_beacon_data() gets called from a path that does
not clear the structure first.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
This is a mechanism used in Android to extend driver interface in vendor
specific ways. This is included only for the purpose of Android
compatibility. Proper interface commands should be used for any new
functionality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Android uses a vendor specific library for implementing couple of driver
interface functions. Add the wrapper code to allow that mechanism to be
used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Despite interface (and group) related sockets are not used
for control, they are created and may be left.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Check if the BSS interface has started before setting beacon.
Lack of this condition can cause segmantation fault.
Signed-hostap: Marek Kwaczynski <marek.kwaczynski@tieto.com>
A reenable of the TDLS link while the host driver is already processing
the same (due to the retransmitted M2/M3 frames) might result in a
failed TDLS setup handshake due to some host driver's implementation.
Thus, issue enable link only when the peer's TDLS status signifies no
prior link (tpk_success=0).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit de3cdf354a adding copying of the
STA's VHT capabilities into the STA entry on the AP. This was done in
allocated memory, but that new memory allocation was not freed anywhere.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Relative time shouldn't be calculated based on gettimeofday
because that clock can jump (e.g., when the time is adjusted
by the system administrator.)
On systems where that is available, use CLOCK_BOOTTIME (on
fairly recent Linux systems, this clock takes into account
the time spend suspended) or CLOCK_MONOTONIC (on Linux and
some POSIX systems, this clock is just freely running with
no adjustments.)
Reported-by: Holger Schurig <holgerschurig@gmail.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The 'started' state was tracked incorrectly. It also broke DFS
as it was using hostapd_enable/disable_iface() functions.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Some devices disable use of U-NII-1 (channels 36-48) for P2P due to it
being indoor use only in number of locations. If U-NII-3 (channels
149-161) is available, try to pick a channel from that range first
during random channel selection to reduce likelihood of interoperability
issues.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no other preferences from local configuration or driver,
prefer a random VHT channel instead of falling back to the fixed
pre-configured channel or 5 GHz/HT40 channel preference.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no other preferences from local configuration or driver,
prefer a random HT40 channel instead of falling back to the fixed
pre-configured channel or 5 GHz channel preference.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no other preferences from local configuration or driver,
prefer a random 5 GHz channel instead of falling back to the fixed
pre-configured channel (which is selected by default to be 1, 6, or 11).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use the new p2p_channel_select() function to select a VHT channel
at random when no other preferences are in effect.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use the new p2p_channel_select() function to select an HT40 channel
at random when no other preferences are in effect.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new p2p_channel_select() function can be re-used to implement
random channel selection from a set of operating classes in all
places that need such functonality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows wlantest debug log output to be directed to a file so that
RELOG command can be used to rotate files more easily than stdout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add chan_switch to the control interface of wpa_supplicant and hostapd,
and also to wpa_cli and hostapd_cli.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Build CSA settings and call the driver to perform the switch. Construct
Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response frames both for CSA
period and for the new channel. These frames are built based on the
current configuration. Add CSA IE in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Add csa_settings struct which holds parameters for CSA. Change driver
interface for switch_channel(), so that it will receive this struct and
not only the new frequency as it was before. This allows wpa_supplicant
to provide all the required parameters (beacons, proberesp, assocresp,
CSA IE) which are required by cfg80211 implementation.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
This was supposed to be a minimal sample of eloop wrapper, but it is
unclear whether this is of that much use and the file has not been kept
up-to-date. Remove this file to reduce maintenance effort. The other
eloop*.c files can be used as a starting point if something new is
needed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit eb32460029 left an unneeded
sim_type argument to scard_init(). Remove that unnecessary argument to
clean up the implementation.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Add DBus methods for TDLS operations similar to those available
for the control interface. This includes Discover, Setup, and
Teardown commands. While here, add a method to query the TDLS
link status and add a DBus method for it.
Tested with CONFIG_TDLS enabled, on a TDLS-enabled host and
peer capable of TDLS:
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSStatus string:<peer-mac-address>
yields: string "peer does not exist"
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSDiscover string:<peer-mac-address>
yields no error
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSSetup string:<peer-mac-address>
yields no error
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSStatus string:<peer-mac-address>
yields: string "connected" after TDLS completes
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSTeardown string:<peer-mac-address>
yields no error
dbus-send --system --dest=fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1 --print-reply \
/fi/w1/wpa_supplicant1/Interfaces/0 \
fi.w1.wpa_supplicant1.Interface.TDLSStatus string:<peer-mac-address>
yields: string "peer not connected"
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
During persistent group re-invocation, GO may end up using a different
channel as the operation channel compared to what was indicated in the
invitation frames. This may break the connection if the peer device ends
up scanning the GO only on the channel from the invitation frame. Fix
this by using the negotiated channel (if available) on the GO as the
operating channel instead of the channel that was provided in the
p2p_invite command to start negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
We were not filtering the EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED events based on the
regulatory hint initiator. So wait for EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED event
after our own change was triggered even when regulatory hint initiator
was the driver. This could result in the wait for the channel list to be
updated to be terminated before the real change has occurred and as
such, old channel list remaining in use when configuring
hostapd/wpa_supplicant country parameter. Fix this by filtering the
hints according to the initiator and only regulatory hints initiated by
user will be used to stop the wait.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If hostapd was started with the interface already in AP mode, leave the
interface in AP mode on deinit instead of unconditionally forcing it to
station mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is common to build wpa_supplicant with AP mode support and it is
justifiable to clean up driver_nl80211.c by removing the conditional
build blocks based on hostapd vs. wpa_supplicant builds.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This gets rid of some ifdef HOSTAPD constructs and shares more
of the initialization code between hostapd and wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These variables were originally used in hostapd to clear HT channel
information when exiting. However, that functionality was lost with
commit f019981aee when moving to a common
code for setting the channel. Taken into account that no one seems to
have missed this functionality over the last four years, it seems safe
to drop this rather than try to fix the old hostapd behavior.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It's not possible to get a raw private key from keystore anymore, so
this would fail every time anyway. Remove it so it doesn't confuse
anyone that looks at this code.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
The new keystore ENGINE is usable to perform private key operations when
we can't get the actual private key data. This is the case when hardware
crypto is enabled: the private key never leaves the hardware.
Subsequently, we need to be able to talk to OpenSSL ENGINEs that aren't
PKCS#11 or OpenSC. This just changes a few #define variables to allow us
to talk to our keystore engine without having one of those enabled and
without using a PIN.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
If remaining AP session timeout is less than 5 seconds
for an existing station, replenish the timeout to 5 seconds.
This allows stations to be able to recycle a dialog token
value beyond 5 seconds for GAS exchange.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
eloop_replenish_timeout() finds a registered matching
<handler,eloop_data,user_data> timeout. If found, replenishes
the timeout if remaining time is less than the requested time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
system/core/libnl_2 does not include nl_socket_set_nonblocking(), so
need to implement that to fix the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a parameter to send the overlapping BSS scan parameter
information element. This will require clients to perform
background scans to check for neigbors overlapping this
HT40 BSS. Since the implementation is incomplete it should
only be used for testing.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
If we are already connected to the selected AP with a network block
that was created based on the selected credential, do not force a
reconnection or network block update.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for additional BSSs to be added while the primary
interface is still in the process of determining channel parameters (HT
co-ex scan, ACS, DFS). Do not enable secondary interfaces in such state
immediately, but instead, wait for the pending operation on the primary
interface to complete. Once that's done, the added extra BSSs will also
be enabled in hostapd_setup_interface_complete().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Reject multiple calls to hostapd_setup_bss() for any specific interface.
hostapd_cleanup() must have been called first before trying to restart a
BSS.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd_bss_deinit() takes care of freeing the associated stations and
calling hostapd_cleanup() to deinit per-BSS services.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This reverts parts of commit 390e489c0d
that tried to enable removal of the first BSS. Since that operation is
now forced to remove all BSSs, these changes are not needed. The
hostapd_if_remove() operation in hostapd_free_hapd_data() is problematic
for the first BSS since it ends up freeing driver wrapper information
that is needed later when deinitializing the driver wrapper.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Since the control interface is now initialized as part of
hostapd_setup_interface(), it needs to be deinitialized on the error
path.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If a secondary BSS is removed while it is waiting for the primary BSS to
complete channel setup (e.g., due to HT co-ex scan, ACS, or DFS), the
hostapd_data instance has not yet been initialized. Fix the BSS removal
code to take this special case into account and not try to deinitialize
the hostapd_data instance that has not yet been started.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The changes in commit 5592065850 to allow
any BSS to be removed were a bit too early since there are still number
of areas that use the first BSS as a special case. Especially the
driver_ops API is going to require quite a bit of cleanup before removal
of the first BSS without the other BSSes of the same radio can be done
safely.
For now, force all BSSs to be removed in case the first one is removed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This call requires a struct hostapd_data pointer and that is not really
something that the driver wrappers should be using.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It looks like abs() result is signed and gcc warns about this when
running a build with -O0 but not with -O2.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Limit the calls to eloop_terminate() to happen only for the
initialization failure from the interfaces that we specified on the
command line. This allows hostapd process to continue operating even if
a dynamically added interface fails to start up. This allows the upper
layer software to fix a configuration error and retry.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When WFD Subelements are set, the IE in the Beacon frames of already
existing groups are not updated. This patch fixes this issue by setting
beacon_update to be 1 on WFD IE update.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
The allocation was not verified to complete successfully and the
allocated memory was not freed on error paths.
Signed-hostap: Adriana Reus <adriana.reus@intel.com>
hostapd_set_freq_param() rejected the 20 MHz channel case with
vht_enabled due to the existing validation step including only 5 GHz (to
be more exact, only >= 5000 MHz). While the behavior may not be fully
defined for 2.4 GHz, we can enable this based on driver capability
advertisement to fix automatic VHT selection for P2P use cases.
mac80211_hwsim advertises VHT for 2.4 GHz band and that resulted in
failures when trying to start GO on that band with vht=1 parameter.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
NL80211_ATTR_CENTER_FREQ1 is defined to be used for anything but 20 MHz
bandwidth, so it could be unset for 20 MHz channels. Do not use it to
override center frequency from NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_FREQ (if available)
for 20 MHz channels to avoid clearing frequency.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Better share the same function for initializing control interface from
the two possible paths that can add a new interface to hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is a per-BSS configuration parameter and as such, needs to be
configured to the driver from hostapd_setup_bss() instead of
hostapd_driver_init().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
DFS operations are specific to the interface (radio/wiphy), not BSS
(netdev/vif), so hostapd_iface is the appropriate element to use in
them.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If per-BSS configuration enabling did not provide a phy name, iface->phy
was left empty. It can be helpful to set this up automatically, so fill
that when initializing the interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Only scan the affected channels instead of all enabled channels when
determining whether the primary and secondary channel for HT40 needs to
be swapped. This speed up HT40 setup considerably on 5 GHz band.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If hostapd is requested to set the country code and the previous country
code differs from the new one, the channel list information from the
driver may change. This change may not be instant, so wait for an
EVENT_CHANNEL_LIST_CHANGED event before continuing interface setup with
fetching of the channel list information. This fixes issues where the
selected channel is not available based on the previous regulatory data
and update through CRDA takes some time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Channel determination may take considerable time when ACS or DFS is
used, so it is useful to be able to observe this process through the
control interface. Move the initialization of the control interfaces to
happen before channel determination so that this can be achieved.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use hostapd_interface_init2() for all interfaces instead of the
previously used different paths for per-interface-config and
per-BSS-config cases. This moves the calls to hostapd_driver_init() and
hostapd_setup_interface() to happen after all configuration files have
been read.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
While these attributes may be expected to be present always, this needs
to be verified within driver_nl80211.c since we cannot depend on the
kernel/driver working correctly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, ENABLE command ended up freeing the hostapd_iface context on
initialization failures, but did not even remove the interface from the
list of available interfaces. This resulted in use of freed memory with
any following operation on the same interface. In addition, removing the
interface on initialization failure does not seem like the best
approach. Fix both of these issues by leaving the interface instance in
memory, but in disabled state so that the configuration can be fixed and
ENABLE used again to enable the interface or REMOVE used to remove the
interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Number of regressions had shown up in wpa_supplicant implementation of
SAE group selection due to different integer array termination (-1 in
hostapd, 0 in wpa_supplicant) being used for SAE groups. The
default_groups list did not seem to use any explicit termination value.
In addition, the sae_group_index was not cleared back to 0 properly
whenever a new SAE session was started.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When removing and re-adding the first wlan# netdev to hostapd
dynamically, the netdev is already present and should not be removed and
re-added to maintain its state as not-added-by-hostapd so that it does
not get removed automatically.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The global control interface command "REMOVE <ifname>" can now be used
to remove a single virtual interface (BSS) without affecting other
virtual interfaces on the same radio.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The global control interface command "ADD
bss_config=<phyname>:<config file>" can now be used to add a single
virtual interface (BSS) to an interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This moves the vif added check from core hostapd to the driver wrapper
(only driver_nl80211.c uses this) and reorders operations a bit to allow
the first BSS (vif) to be removed from a multi-BSS setup.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The first user of monitor interface was not counted and that could
result in the monitor interface getting removed if the initial interface
was removed from a multi-BSS setup.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Return control flow to hostapd by calling hostapd_acs_completed()
if requesting a scan from the underlying device fails.
Signed-hostapd: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
If radar was detected single BSS is notified about it. This caused only
that single BSS to be stopped and restarted. However, due to nl80211
interface combinations the BSS was not started on a new channel and
other BSSes remained operating on the old channel.
The downside is that hostapd_disable_iface() causes deauth frames to be
sent. This is undesired but on the other hand it doesn't make sense to
create workarounds that imitate CSA's 'block tx'. For proper Tx
quiescing CSA should be properly implemented.
Signed-off-by: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Decouple HT/VHT offset/center-freq calculations from channel lookup.
This will be necessary for further improvements on the DFS codebase.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
The GTK rekey offload information was sent to the driver immediately
after the 4-way handshake which ended up being before the initial group
key exchange in the case of WPA (v1). This could result in even that
initial GTK handshake being offloaded and wpa_supplicant being left in
WPA_GROUP_HANDSHAKE state. Fix this by postponing the operation to
happen only after the full set of initial EAPOL-Key exchanges have been
completed (i.e., in the existing location for WPA2 and a after the group
key handshake for WPA).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Reject RELOAD control interface command if the dynamic configuration
changes have resulted into a state where the configuration is invalid.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows the configuration validation routines to be called from
src/ap/*.c for runtime updates of configuration without reprocessing the
full configuration file.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This provides a new option for configuring multiple virtual interfaces
(BSS) that share a single radio. The new command line parameter
-b<phyname>:<config file name> is used to define one or more virtual
interfaces for each PHY. The first such entry for a new PHY is used to
initialize the interface structure and all consecutive parameters that
have the same PHY name will be added as virtual BSS entries to that
interface. The radio parameters in the configuration files have to be
identical.
This can be used as an alternative for the bss=<ifname> separator and
multiple BSSes in a single configuration file design while still
allowing hostapd to control the PHY (struct hostapd_iface) as a group of
virtual interfaces (struct hostapd_data) so that common radio operations
like OLBC detection and HT40 co-ex scans can be done only once per real
radio.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it more convenient to move BSS configuration entries between
struct hostapd_config instances to clean up per-BSS configuration file
design.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This may be needed if the wpa_psk information for previously derived
from passphrase and either the SSID or the passphrase has changed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Instead of duplicating the functionality and missing changes (like the
hostapd_broadcast_wep_clear() call), use the hostapd_clear_old()
function that was already used for the similar case with configuration
file reload.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Start GO with VHT support if VHT option was requested
and the appropriate channels are available.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Add the option to ask for VHT operation similarly to the way ht40 is
configured - either by adding 'vht' param to the relevant p2p_*
commands or by configuring p2p_go_vht=1 in the configuration file.
This patch only adds the configuration option (e.g., via control
interface). The actual handling of the VHT parameter (asking the driver
to use VHT, etc.) will be done by the following patch.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Later on, we'll consider the availability of these
channels when starting P2P GO with VHT support.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Mask the remote VHT capabilities with our own capabilities, similarly
to what is done for HT capabilities.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Make sure the driver supports 160/80+80 MHz VHT capabilities
before trying to configure these channels.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
VHT_CAP_BEAMFORMEE_STS_MAX, VHT_CAP_SOUNDING_DIMENSION_OFFSET, and
VHT_CAP_MAX_A_MPDU_LENGTH_EXPONENT were not defined properly (wrong
name/size). Fix that and update the hostapd.conf parsing accordingly.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliadx.peller@intel.com>
Previously the Country element contained the max TX power the local
hardware was capable of. Change this to just use the regulatory limit.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
The new p2p_add_cli_chan=1 configuration parameter can be used to
request passive-scan channels to be included in P2P channel lists for
cases where the local end may become the P2P client in a group. This
allows more options for the peer to use channels, e.g., if the local
device is not aware of its current location and has marked most channels
to require passive scanning.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new p2p_no_go_freq frequency range list (comma-separated list of
min-max frequency ranges in MHz) can now be used to configure channels
on which the local device is not allowed to operate as a GO, but on
which that device can be a P2P Client. These channels are left in the
P2P Channel List in GO Negotiation to allow the peer device to select
one of the channels for the cases where the peer becomes the GO. The
local end will remove these channels from consideration if it becomes
the GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When we have CAC active and receive a radar event, we should ignore
CAC_ABORT event and handle channel switch in the radar event handler.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
This fixes a problem when operating on non-DFS channel and receiving a
radar event for that channel. Previously, we would have decided to
switch channels.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Add a table of available VHT80 channels. This table contains the first
available channel. We will also choose this first channel as the control
one.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
To avoid a problem where the beacon socket occasionally
blocks, mark any sockets on the eloop as non-blocking.
The previous patch reordered the code to never send a
command after a socket was put on the eloop, but now also
invalidate the nl handle pointer while it's on there.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Abstract the handling of sockets on the eloop to avoid
destroying sockets still on the eloop and also to allow
the next patch to mark the socket non-blocking.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The IBSS code registers the bss nl_mgmt socket for auth
frames when the join event happens, but that is too late
as then the socket is already on the eloop, which could
cause problems when other events are received at the
same time as the registration is done.
Move the auth frame registration to the initial setup
before the socket is put onto the eloop.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Some driver wrappers may implement this by writing eight octets even
though IPN is only six octets. Use a separate WPA_KEY_RSC_LEN (8) octet
buffer in the call to make sure there is enough buffer room available
for the full returned value and then copy it to IPN field.
The previous implementation used the following igtk field as the extra
buffer and then initialized that field afterwards, so this change does
not fix any real issue in behavior, but it is cleaner to use an explicit
buffer of the maximum length for get_seqnum().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even though the length of this buffer is based only on locally
configured information, it is cleaner to include explicit buffer room
validation steps when adding the attributes into the buffer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
linux_br_get() was forcing null termination on the buffer, but did not
check whether the string could have been truncated. Make this more
strict by rejecting any truncation case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The allocation of new_bss and its use was separated by a lot of code in
this function. This can be cleaned up by moving the allocation next to
the use, so that this all can be within a single #ifdef HOSTAPD block.
The i802_check_bridge() call was outside type == WPA_IF_AP_BSS case, but
in practice, it is only used for WPA_IF_AP_BSS (and if used for
something else, this would have resulted in NULL pointer dereference
anyway).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If SSL_CTX_new() fails in tls_init(), the per-SSL app-data allocation
could have been leaked when multiple TLS instances are allocated.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The VHT_CHANWIDTH_160MHZ case fell through to the default case and
printed out a debug message that was not supposed to be shown here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
os_strlpcy() should be used instead of os_strncpy() to guarantee null
termination. Since there are no remaining strncpy uses, remove
os_strncpy() definition.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was already included in all the other calls to eap_proxy, but
somehow the get_imsi call had been forgotten.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Trying to access the SIM card details without checking if the eap_proxy
layer has been initialized can results in a crash. Address this by
sending the request for the IMSI through eapol_supp_sm.c which can
verify that eap_proxy has been initialized.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously ACS required valid survey data on all available channels.
This can however not be guaranteed. Instead of just failing, fall back
to the subset of channels that have valid ACS data.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
Otherwise hostapd might hang doing nothing anymore. Propagate ACS
errors so we can fail gracefully.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
If ACS fails we still need to call hostapd_setup_interface_complete.
Otherwise hostapd will just hang doing nothing anymore. However, pass
an error to hostapd_setup_interface_complete to allow a graceful fail.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
This makes it easier to go through the P2P channel list operations in
the debug log without having to parse through the hexdump manually.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Incorrect nla_get variants were used to get event type and frequency.
Kernel passes both as u32. This caused issues on tinynl/big-endian hosts
- CAC finished was treated as radar detection and frequency was 0.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
It is possible for a vif netdev to be removed by something else than
hostapd and if that happens for a virtual AP interface, if_remove()
handler should still free the local data structure to avoid memory leaks
if something external removes a netdev.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, the send_mlme->send_frame->send_frame_cmd path that could be
used when a GO sends an offchannel Action frame ended up not updating
drv->send_action_cookie. This can result in an issue with not being able
to cancel wait for the response, e.g., in invitation-to-running-group
case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes issues where a GO used offchannel-TX operation to send an
Invitation Request frame. Wait for the offchannel TX operation needs to
be stopped as soon as the Invitation Response frame has been received.
This addresses some issues where Probe Response frame from the GO
through the monitor interface may end up going out on a wrong channel
(the channel of this offchannel TX operation for invitation).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Join-a-group needs to force the current operating channel of the target
group as the frequency to use for the PD exchange. When the channel was
selected based on a BSS entry for the GO, this worked only for the first
PD Request frame while the retries reverted to a potentially different
channel based on a P2P peer entry. Fix this by maintaining the forced
channel through the PD retry sequence.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
P2P Invitation Response frame is required to include the Channel List
attribute only in Status=Success case. Skip the debug message claiming
that a mandatory attribute was not included in non-Success case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the new external_sim=1 case to be used to perform UMTS
authentication step in EAP-AKA/AKA' peer process. Following control
interface event is used to request the operation:
CTRL-REQ-SIM-<network id>:UMTS-AUTH:<RAND>:<AUTN> needed for SSID <SSID>
Response from external processing is returned with
CTRL-RSP-SIM-<network id> UMTS-AUTH:<IK>:<CK>:<RES>
or
CTRL-RSP-SIM-<network id> UMTS-AUTS:<AUTS>
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the new external_sim=1 case to be used to perform GSM
authentication step in EAP-SIM peer process. Following control interface
event is used to request the operation:
CTRL-REQ-SIM-<network id>:GSM-AUTH:<RAND1>:<RAND2>[:<RAND3>] needed
for SSID <SSID>
For example:
<3>CTRL-REQ-SIM-0:GSM-AUTH:5e3496ce7d5863b3b09f97f565513bc3:
73f0f0bc5c47bcbed6f572d07ab74056:447b784f08de80bdc2b1e100fccbb534
needed for SSID test
Response from external processing is returned with
CTRL-RSP-SIM-<network id> GSM-AUTH:<Kc1>:<SRES1>:<Kc2>:<SRES2>
[:<Kc3>:<SRES3>]
For example:
wpa_cli sim 0 GSM-AUTH:d41c76e0079247aa:2709ebfb:43baa77cfc8bcd6c:
0fa98dc1:a8ad1f6e30e
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new configuration parameter external_sim=<0/1> can now be used to
configure wpa_supplicant to use external SIM/USIM processing (e.g., GSM
authentication for EAP-SIM or UMTS authentication for EAP-AKA). The
requests and responses for such operations are sent over the ctrl_iface
CTRL-REQ-SIM and CTRL-RSP-SIM commands similarly to the existing
password query mechanism.
Changes to the EAP methods to use this new mechanism will be added in
separate commits.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it easier to handle cases where the application is restarted
and the previously used local TCP port may not have been fully cleared
in the network stack.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new bss_load_test parameter can be used to configure hostapd to
advertise a fixed BSS Load element in Beacon and Probe Response frames
for testing purposes. This functionality is disabled in the build by
default and can be enabled with CONFIG_TESTING_OPTIONS=y.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Indicate support for QoS Mapping and configure driver to update the QoS
Map if QoS Map Set elements is received from the AP either in
(Re)Association Response or QoS Map Configure frame.
This commit adds support for receiving the frames with nl80211 drivers,
but the actual QoS Map configuration command is still missing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows QoS Map Set element to be added to (Re)Association Response
frames and in QoS Map Configure frame. The QoS Mapping parameters are
also made available for the driver interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new domain_suffix_match (and domain_suffix_match2 for Phase 2
EAP-TLS) can now be used to specify an additional constraint for the
server certificate domain name. If set, one of the dNSName values (or if
no dNSName is present, one of the commonName values) in the certificate
must have a suffix match with the specified value. Suffix match is done
based on full domain name labels, i.e., "example.com" matches
"test.example.com" but not "test-example.com".
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add DFS structures/events handlers, CAC handling, and radar detection.
By default, after radar is detected or the channel became unavailable, a
random channel will be chosen.
This patches are based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Most of the DFS code is moved to a new dfs.c/dfs.h
files.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
When hostapd receives an auth frame during ACS the transmission of
the according auth response will always fail:
ACS: Automatic channel selection started, this may take a bit
[..]
send_auth_reply: send: Resource temporarily unavailable
[..]
However, a station info entry was created. Once ACS is finished
it will flush all stations even though hapd was not yet fully
initialized. This results in a segfault when trying to access
hapd->radius:
0 0x0042c1c0 in radius_client_flush_auth ()
1 0x00416a94 in ap_free_sta ()
2 0x00416cc0 in hostapd_free_stas ()
3 0x0040bce8 in hostapd_flush_old_stations ()
4 0x0040c790 in hostapd_setup_interface_complete ()
5 0x0046347c in acs_scan_complete ()
6 0x0040f834 in hostapd_wpa_event ()
7 0x0043af08 in send_scan_event.part.46 ()
8 0x00443a64 in send_scan_event ()
9 0x00443c24 in do_process_drv_event ()
10 0x004449e8 in process_global_event ()
11 0x7767d7d0 in ?? ()
Fix this by not presuming anything about the initialization state of
hapd and checking ->radius before accessing.
Signed-off-hostapd: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
In noisy environment peer may take more time to send Invitation
Response so increase Invitation Response timeout to 500 ms in success
case and also increase Invitation Request action wait time to 500 ms.
This makes the Invitation Request case use the same timeout with GO
Negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A new TDLS request shall transmit TPK M1 frame with a unique INonce.
Thus a new explicit request would fail an ongoing TDLS negotiation with
the error "TDLS: FTIE SNonce in TPK M3 does not match with FTIE SNonce
used in TPK M1" if the peer happens to receive two M1 frames before an
M3 frame. Check for the ongoing negotiation with the peer and do not
start a new one if we are already in a setup negotiation with the peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to go through the peer list when we already have a
pointer to the specific peer entry.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is called from number of locations and it is more efficient to use
a new helper function instead of wpa_tdls_disable_link() that would do
peer address search from the list of peers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Making this function be used only for external setup case simplifies the
implementation and makes core wpa_supplicant calls in ctrl_iface.c and
events.c consistent.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 8a9f58f2cc ("EAP-AKA server: Store
permanent username in session data") broke AUTS processing by skipping
new authentication triplet fetch after having reported AUTS. Fix this by
started new full authentication sequence immediately after reporting
AUTS so that the updated parameters are available for the Challenge
message.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
STATUS-DRIVER command can now be used to fetch driver interface status
information. This is mainly for exporting low-level driver interface
information for debug purposes.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
TX frequency gets lost when going through the monitor send MLME option
and this resulted in P2P operations like invitation from a GO failing
when the driver needs monitor socket, but would support offchannel TX.
Fix this by using frame_cmd path instead in case the monitor socket
would have been hit for action frame TX.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, IBSS mode (NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC) was left in drv->nlmode
when leaving IBSS. This causes issues for send_mlme() handler for P2P
Probe Response transmission in Listen state. Fix this by clearing nlmode
back to NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION on leaving IBSS so that following P2P
operations can be executed correctly. Previously, this was fixed only
when the next authentication/association attempt in station mode
occured.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to use the bss variable which is used only within a
wpa_printf() call that can be conditionally removed from the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This extends hostapd global control interface command "ADD" to use a
configuration file instead of requiring configuration to be built using
SET command.
The command format is now following:
ADD <ifname> <control path|config=<path to config>>
For example:
ADD wlan0 /var/run/hostapd
ADD wlan0 config=/tmp/hostapd.conf
When using the configuration file option, ctrl_interface parameter in
the file needs to be set to allow ENABLE command to be issued on the new
interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There was a comment about the the cleanup steps being from
hostapd_cleanup_iface(). However, the operations that cleared some
security parameters do not seem to exist elsewhere and do not make sense
here. Remove them to avoid changing configuration with DISABLE followed
by ENABLE.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This fixes some issues where dynamic interface enable/disable cycles
could end up trying to free resources twice and crash the process while
doing so.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This can be useful in figuring out how drv->last_mgmt_freq gets set
to debug issues with P2P frames being sent on incorrect channel.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
printf_decode() fills in a binary buffer and returns the length of
the written data. This did not use null termination since initial
use cases used the output as a binary value. However, Hotspot 2.0
cred block values are also using this for parsing strings. Those
cases could end up without proper null termination depending on what
os_malloc() ends up getting as the memory buffer. Fix these and make
printf_decode() more convenient by forcing the output buffer to be
null terminated.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When no other user preference is specified, opt to use an operating
channel that allows 5 GHz band to be used rather than 2.4 GHz.
Previously, this was already done in practice for HT40 channels since no
such channel is enabled for P2P on 2.4 GHz. This commit extends this to
apply 5 GHz preference for 20 MHz channels as well.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
H3C WA2620i-AGN AP may send an EAP packet with an undefined EAP code
10 after successful EAP authentication which restarts the EAPOL
state machine. Drop such frames with this unrecognized code without
advancing the EAPOL supplicant or EAP peer state machines to avoid
interoperability issues with the AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no point in updating the RNonce for every obtained TPK M1 frame
(e.g., retransmission due to timeout) with the same INonce (SNonce in
FTIE). Update RNonce only if a TPK M1 is received with a different
INonce (new TDLS session) to avoid issues with two setup exchanges
getting mixed and exchange failing due to mismatching nonces ("TDLS:
FTIE ANonce in TPK M3 does not match with FTIE ANonce used in TPK M2").
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Clear the peer information and disable the created link on a
failed TDLS setup negotiation. This is needed to avoid leaving
TDLS setup pending and to return to the AP path in case anything
goes wrong during the setup attempt.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some APs may incorrectly change Device Password ID from PBC in M1 to
Default PIN in M2 even when they are ready to continue with PBC. This
behavior used to work with earlier implementation in wpa_supplicant, but
commit b4a17a6ea7 started validating this
as part of a change that is needed to support NFC configuration method.
While this kind of AP behavior is against the WSC specification and
there could be potential use cases for moving from PBC to PIN, e.g., in
case of PBC session overlap, it is justifiable to work around this issue
to avoid interoperability issues with deployed APs. There are no known
implementations of PBC-to-PIN change from M1 to M2, so this should not
reduce available functionality in practice.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It is possible for the GO of a persistent group to change the PSK or
remove a client when per-client PSKs are used and this can happen
without the SSID changing (i.e., the group is still valid, but just not
for a specific client). If the client side of such persistent group ends
up trying to use an invalidated persistent group information, the
connection will fail in 4-way handshake. A new WPS provisioning step is
needed to recover from this.
Detect this type of case based on two 4-way handshake failures when
acting as a P2P client in a persistent group. A new
"P2P-PERSISTENT-PSK-FAIL id=<persistent group id>" event is used to
indicate when this happens. This makes it easier for upper layers to
remove the persistent group information with "REMOVE_NETWORK <persistent
group id>" if desired (e.g., based on user confirmation).
In addition to indicating the error cases for persistent groups, all
this type of PSK failures end up in the client removing the group with
the new reason=PSK_FAILURE information in the P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new control interface command P2P_REMOVE_CLIENT <P2P Device
Address|iface=Address> can now be used to remove the specified client
from all groups (ongoing and persistent) in which the local device is a
GO. This will remove any per-client PSK entries and deauthenticate the
device.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Record all generated per-client PSKs in the persistent group network
block and configure these for the GO Authenticator whenever re-starting
the persistent group. This completes per-client PSK support for
persistent groups.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When using per-device PSKs, select the PSK based on the P2P Device
Address of the connecting client if that client is a P2P Device. This
allows the P2P Interface Address to be changed between P2P group
connections which may happen especially when using persistent groups.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to implement per-device PSK selection based on the
peer's P2P Device Address instead of P2P Interface Address.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the P2P Device Address of the Enrollee available with the PSK
records to allow P2P Device Address instead of P2P Interface Address to
be used for finding the correct PSK.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"wpa_cli p2p_set per_sta_psk <0/1>" can now be used to disable/enable
use of per-device PSKs in P2P groups. This is disabled by default.
When enabled, a default passphrase is still generated by the GO for
legacy stations, but all P2P and non-P2P devices using WPS will get
a unique PSK.
This gives more protection for the P2P group by preventing clients from
being able to derive the unicast keys used by other clients. This is
also a step towards allowing specific clients to be removed from a group
reliably without having to tear down the full group to do so.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even after listen duration is over, P2P module remained in
P2P_LISTEN_ONLY state, which is blocking station mode scans. Fix this by
stopping P2P listen explicitly to update p2p_state to IDLE when listen
duration expires.
Signed-hostap: Syed Asifful Dayyan <syedd@broadcom.com>
This adds ACS support to hostapd. Currently only survey-based
algorithm is available.
To use ACS you need to enable CONFIG_ACS=y in .config and use
channel=0 (or channel=acs_survey) in hostapd.conf.
For more details see wiki page [1] or comments in src/ap/acs.c.
[1]: http://wireless.kernel.org/en/users/Documentation/acs
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Swisscom SIM cards do not include MNC length within EF_AD, and end up
using incorrect MNC length based on the 3-digit default. Hardcode MNC
length of 2 for Switzerland, in the same manner as it was done for
Finland.
Signed-hostap: Andrejs Cainikovs <andrejs.cainikovs@sonymobile.com>
If the device that sends the GO Negotiation Confirm becomes the GO, it
may change its operating channel preference between GO Negotiation
Request and Confirm messages based on the channel list received from us.
Previously, the peer operating channel preference was not updated in
such a case and this could result in the initial scans after GO
Negotiation using incorrect operating channel and as such, extra delay
in the connection process. Fix this by updating the operating channel
information from GO Negotiation Confirm in cases where the peer becomes
the GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If there are no higher priority preference for the operating channel,
use the first pref_chan entry as the operating channel preference over
the pre-configured channel which is not really a good indication of
preference. This changes the behavior for GO Negotiation Request frame
operating channel preference value in cases where p2p_pref_chan list is
set.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This new control interface event message is used to indicate when
both 4-way handshakes have been completed with a new IBSS peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds survey dump support for all frequencies
and for specific desired frequencies. This will later
be used by ACS code for spectrum heuristics.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
This splits up the channel checking upon initialization into a few
helpers. This should make this a bit easier to follow. This also paves
the way for some initial ACS entry code.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Interfaces that take one or two seconds to reconfigure the link after we
set IFF_ALLMULTI or after we bring the interface up were dropping the
initial TX EAPOL packet which caused excessive delays in authentication.
This change applies to FreeBSD/DragonFly only.
Signed-hostap: Rui Paulo <rpaulo@FreeBSD.org>
Add additional input verification for the frequency parameter in
p2p_group_add (and other P2P operations for that matter). Without this
verification invalid freq could be set and not handled properly.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
According to WSC specification (Ver 2.0.2, section 8.3), RF Bands
attribute should be set to the specific RF band used for the current
message. Add an option to set wanted band in wps_build_rf_bands() and
add a callback to get the current band from wpa_supplicant and hostapd.
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
It is possible that when trying to remove a dynamically added interface,
changing its type to station mode is not possible (since the kernel does
not support so in its interface combinations).
Since P2P interfaces are always dynamically added, avoid changing their
type to station in the deinit_ap() and deinit_p2p_client() nl80211
callbacks, assuming that the interface is about to be removed.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The pad field in the RRB messages is unused, but it should be
initialized to avoid sending out arbitrary data from stack. This was
also generating number of valgrind complaints about uninitialized memory
accesses in local FT tests.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 8e12685c43 replaced call to
nl80211_mgmt_unsubscribe() on the deinit path with a
wpa_driver_nl80211_set_mode() call. This is not enough to unregister the
bss->nl_mgmt read socket in all cases. Fix this by unconditionally
unsubscribing from the nl80211 events after having change mode to
station.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
drv->assoc_freq was not updated during the connect command (neither
during the command's invocation nor after getting the event) unlike with
auth/assoc case where assoc_freq is updated. This resulted in
nl80211_get_link_noise() (and any other function for that matter) using
the improper drv->assoc_freq value with drivers that use the connect
API. Fix this by updating drv->assoc_freq on connect command and when
fetching the frequency from the driver.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Stop AP command can be used by the driver as an event to indicate that
AP mode has stopped operation. WLAN driver may have encountered errors
that has forced the driver to report this event or concurrent operations
on virtual interfaces may have forced AP operation to be stopped. When
in P2P GO mode, wpa_supplicant uses this event to remove P2P group to
keep in sync with the driver state.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A transmission failure of the TDLS Setup Request frame (TPK Handshake
M1) results in no further retries and the peer entry being left in state
where all TDLS Setup Request frames from the peer with higher address
would be rejected, thus always resulting in a failure to establish a
TDLS link. Handle the failures in transmission by disabling the link
immediately to ensure the traffic to the peer goes through the AP. This
commit also handles similar transmision failures for TPK Handshake M2
and M3 frames (TDLS Setup Response and Confirm).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The nl80211 command for setting the TX index does not distinguish TDLS
vs. AP key and as such, the driver would not know what this set TX key
index operation is doing in the TDLS case. This could result in the TX
key index for AP being changed instead if static WEP is used in the AP
connection. Fix the issue by not setting TX key index when configuring a
TDLS key.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is not used anymore after the previous commits that changed the
driver interface to use number of supported concurrent channels instead
of this flag.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Previously, drivers only reported if they support multiple concurrent
channels, but did not report the maximum number of supported channels.
Add this reporting to the driver capabilities and add the implementation
to driver_nl80211.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
In order to correctly handle IBSS/RSN, wpa_supplicant has to register
for any incoming Authentication frmae to properly react when those are
received.
Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr>
Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
If the frequency is not specified the frame is now sent over
the channel used by the current BSS.
This will also log the payload of each sent CMD_FRAME.
Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr>
[antonio@open-mesh.com: commit message reworded]
Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <antonio@open-mesh.com>
The static WEP keys have to be configured for the new VLAN
interface that is created for a 4addr WDS peer, not doing so
breaks WEP functionality in nl80211/4addr based WDS links.
Signed-hostap: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows wpa_supplicant to associate to an AP that has VHT BSS
membership selector set to indicate VHT support is required for the BSS.
Without the patch it was impossible to connect to, e.g., hostapd-based
AP that has require_vht=1. wpa_supplicant was complaining with:
hardware does not support required rate 63.0 Mbps
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
In a AP/STA concurrent setup, if the STA interface is continually
scanning, trying to connect to a network, the AP interface
is basically broken since beaconing would be erratic.
This option can be used in a WDS setup where one AP acts as a
Client/AP-Repeater. The Repeater AP interface has to start beaconing
only after the Client interface has established a WDS link with the
"Root AP".
Signed-hostap: Sujith Manoharan <c_manoha@qca.qualcomm.com>
Compiling hostapd with VHT enabled on a big endian machine resulted in
an undefined symbol error. Fix this by defining the missing macro.
Signed-hostap: Michal Kazior <michal.kazior@tieto.com>
Previously, there could be two disconnection events in core
wpa_supplicant when going through a case of wpa_supplicant-requested
disconnection with a driver that implements SME internally. This could
result in undesired behavior when a disconnection is followed by a new
connection attempt before the extra event has been received (e.g.,
during fast reassoc or WPS provisioning). Avoid such issues by ignoring
locally generated disconnect events after requesting cfg80211 to
disconnect.
This makes the previously used ignore_next_local_disconnect more
consistent by setting the variable within
wpa_driver_nl80211_disconnect() so that both callers get the same
behavior.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Commit 3962b65858 removed the Xcode
project files, but missed the defines in build_config.h. Remove these
since there are no users for them in the current snapshot.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new server_id parameter in hostapd.conf can now be used to specify
which identity is delivered to the EAP peer with EAP methods that
support authenticated server identity.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Check that SSL_clear_options and SSL_CTX_clear_options are defined
before using them to avoid compilation failures with older OpenSSL
versions that did not include these macros.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since the P2P_DEVICE support indication was added to kernel before
everything was working properly, there may be kernel versions in use
with the new mechanism breaking P2P functionality (especially with
mac80211_hwsim). For now, disable P2P_DEVICE support by default and
allow it to be enabled with driver_param=p2p_device=1 in the
configuration file. This default behavior may be changed in the future
once the kernel issues has been resolved in stable releases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Another function that needs the wdev id when P2P management is done
using the P2P_DEVICE interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
With P2P Device support there will be two interfaces with their
own MAC address. The P2P Interface Address must be unique so verify
it is.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The phy name was determined using /sys/class/net/<ifname> but the P2P
Device is not listed there since it does not have an associated net
device. This patch changes name determination to obtain the name from
the wiphy information provide by nl80211.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
For P2P Device the netlink message should have wdev identifier
instead of the interface index. This fixes a failure which occurred
executing the P2P_GROUP_ADD command.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
When using OpenSSL with TLS-based EAP methods, wpa_supplicant can now be
configured to use OCSP stapling (TLS certificate status request) with
ocsp=1 network block parameter. ocsp=2 can be used to require valid OCSP
response before connection is allowed to continue.
hostapd as EAP server can be configured to return cached OCSP response
using the new ocsp_stapling_response parameter and an external mechanism
for updating the response data (e.g., "openssl ocsp ..." command).
This allows wpa_supplicant to verify that the server certificate has not
been revoked as part of the EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS/FAST handshake before
actual data connection has been established (i.e., when a CRL could not
be fetched even if a distribution point were specified).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When P2P Device is used as P2P management interface the creation of the
P2P group interface fails because MAC address retrieval fails for the
P2P Device interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
For P2P an interface may be created for the P2P client/group. The
create request is done on the P2P management interface, which may
be a P2P Device interface. In that case it needs to use the wdev_id.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
In order to get a P2P-DEVICE-FOUND event the supplicant needs to
see a peer device during SEARCH and LISTEN phase. The SEARCH
phase does a scan so obtaining the scan results for the P2P Device
interface needs to be supported, i.e., use the wdev_id.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
For P2P Device the MAC address is determined upon .init2(). The
wpa_s for this interface retrieves this address in
wpa_supplicant_update_mac_addr() using the .get_mac_addr() callback.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The function setting the interface mode also handles management
frame subscription. Rework it so subscription is done for the
P2P Device interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The driver uses linux_set_iface_flags() in several places. Introduce and
use i802_set_iface_flags() which also works for P2P Device interface.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
The .deinit() closes netlink for P2P Device. Before doing that remove
the P2P Device interface that was created by wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
Add specific handler for creating the P2P Device to store the wdev_id as
this type of interface does not have an interface index.
Signed-hostap: Arend van Spriel <arend@broadcom.com>
To support Android the kernel may have a "p2p0" netdev for a P2P Device
even though this isn't very useful, but Android requires a netdev. To
support this in the supplicant, if the interface mode is P2P_DEVICE,
re-set it to the same instead of STATION mode.
Note that this is only possible with a kernel that creates a
netdev for the P2P Device wdev.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Add an option to pass a handler to nl80211_create_iface() and
nl80211_create_interface_once() that will be called after receiving the
message from the kernel. This handler will add the option to process the
message in different ways for different interfaces.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Add wdev_id to i802_bss. wdev_id_set indicates whether this id is
available. Use wdev_id if assigned, instead of ifindex. Use wdev_id for
events that come from the kernel to identify the relevant interface.
This commit does not assign wdev_id value for the BSS yet, i.e., this is
only preparation for the value to be used in a future commit.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Check the supported interfaces attribute to identify support for
a dedicated P2P Device interface type. If set, update the driver
capabilities flag to notify the supplicant.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Rename is_p2p_interface() to is_p2p_net_interface() since it used to
identify network P2P interfaces to disable 802.11b rates on them.
Signed-off-by: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Sometimes an interface name that cannot be resolved is given to the
set_key function, so print the ifname in addition to the ifidx.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently, hostapd_get_vlan_id_ifname() is used to determine if a given
vlan is valid *and* to actually determine the interface. This leads to
wpa_set_keys() sometimes setting the key on the wildcard interface name,
which does not make sense.
This patch therefore adds hostapd_vlan_id_valid() and makes
hostapd_get_vlan_id_ifname() not return a wildcard interface.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently, struct hostapd_vlan is a per-BSS data structure which
also contains informations about whether to remove the bridge
or clear wlan / tagged-vlan interface from the bridge.
In a multi-interface multi-BSS setup, this can lead to the following
race condition:
1. wlan0 creates VLAN A, sets DVLAN_CLEAN_BR and DVLAN_CLEAN_VLAN_PORT
2. wlan1 creates VLAN A, does not set DVLAN_CLEAN_BR and
DVLAN_CLEAN_VLAN_PORT as already there
3. wlan0 removes VLAN A, removes tagged-interface from the bridge
but not the bridge.
Now wlan1 VLAN A is unusable due to the missing uplink.
4. wlan1 removes VLAN A, does not cleanup
Solution:
This requires an inter-BSS inter-interface data structure to track the
bridge / bridge port usage within hostapd. This data structure could
also be used to track any other device-has-been-created-by-hostapd
information or when regarding interface freeing.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently by default, all BSS share the bridge brvlan%d.
While this is sane when no tagged-interface is given, this
is insane when different tagged interfaces are given, as
it would result in bridging those tagged interfaces.
This patch therefore uses br%s%d with %s=tagged_interface
and %d=VLAN ID as bridge name when a tagged-interface is given.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Currently, when different BSS using different tagged vlan
interfaces, they are forced to share the bridge brvlan#,
which is not desirable.
This patch fixes this by making the bridge name configurable.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Add AVG_RSSI report to the signal_poll command if it is reported by
the kernel.
Signed-hostap: Andrei Otcheretianski <andrei.otcheretianski@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
Add prints for kernel event, including the event ID and event string.
Signed-hostap: David Spinadel <david.spinadel@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
The ext_supp_rates passed to merge_byte_arrays would be invalid if not
advertized by the TDLS peer. Thus, validate the argument to avoid
crashes in such cases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If AP mode SME/MLME within wpa_supplicant is used for processing Probe
Request frames in GO mode, drop Probe Request frames that include only
802.11b rates per P2P spec section 2.4.1.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Upon association, disable the timer that removes the dummy STA. This
timer caused the STA that associates within 5 seconds of doing an ANQP
query to disassociate, thinking it's a dummy STA. Similar call was
already there for the SME/MLME-in-hostapd case in handle_auth(), but the
SME-in-driver case was not previously addressed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is not much use for enabling WPA without WPA2 nowadays since most
networks have been upgraded to WPA2. Furthermore, the code size savings
from disabling just WPA2 are pretty small, so there is not much
justification for maintaining this build option. Remove it to get rid of
undesired complexity.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit ae8535b6e1 added a new function
wpa_sm_pmf_enabled() which is called from WNM code without ifdefs.
Define a dummy wrapper for this function to fix build if WPA2 is
disabled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 4033935dd9 updated
pmksa_cache_flush() function arguments, but forgot to update the wrapper
function for cases where WPA2 or EAP has been disabled in the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In a noisy enviromment, some peers can be slow to respond to the
invitation request frames which may lead to unnecessary state timeout.
Increase this timeout to 350 ms to improve the probabilty of
successfully receiving the invitation response frames.
Signed-hostap: Vivek Natarajan <nataraja@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is needed for TDLS with VHT to allow partial AID to be set
correctly for the direct link frames. cfg80211 validation rules
prevented NL80211_ATTR_STA_AID from being used for this in set_station
case, so the new attribute is used instead.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit b4a17a6ea7 added support for the
WPS Registrar to change the Device Password based on WSC specification
design. However, this added validation for Registrar behavior which
resulted in preventing a common P2P use case from working. Relax the
validation rules for builds with P2P enabled to allow the Enrollee (P2P
client) accepting M1/M2 changes in Device Password Id between Default
and Registrar-specified PIN.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like cfg80211 can deliver a deauth/disassoc event during some
roaming cases while we are already in progress with a new
authentication/association. This happens at least with FT protocol.
Avoid issues with such disconnection event resulting in core
wpa_supplicant stopping the new connection attempt by tracking
auth/assoc BSSID more carefully within driver_nl80211.c and filtering
out events that do not apply for the current AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The Michael MIC TX and RX keys needs to be swapped in the FT case just
like in all other TKIP key configuration cases. This fixes issues where
TKIP as group cipher resulted in Michael MIC failures being detected for
each received group-addressed frame after FT protocol use.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up debug log by not including comments about failed
operations in case the operation is known to fail due to not being
supported by the driver.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Enable MAC address based ACL for the drivers which advertise
this capabilty with NL80211_ATTR_MAC_ACL_MAX. Either of blacklist
or whitelist is supported, though, not simultaneously.
Signed-hostap: Vivek Natarajan <nataraja@qca.qualcomm.com>
Define a proper event prefix and include additional information to allow
ESS Dissassociation Imminent event to be used in a wpa_cli action
script.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is needed to avoid allowing the STA to reconnect using a cached
PMKSA. ESS disassoc imminent notification is normally used to indicate
that the STA session will be terminated and as such, requiring full
authentication through the authentication server after this is needed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When STA interface is connected and P2P interface gets invited in a
different channel from previous P2P group, the invitiation would fail
because of no common channel found. Fix this by using different logic
when device support multi channel concurrency.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit c3fea27274 added a call to clear
all other PMKSA cache entries for the same network if the PMKSA cache
entry of the current AP changed. This was needed to fix OKC cases since
the other APs would likely use the new PMK in the future. However, this
ended up clearing entries in cases where that is not desired and this
resulted in needing additional full EAP authentication with networks
that did not support OKC if wpa_supplicant was configured to try to use
it.
Make PMKSA cache entry flushing more limited so that the other entries
are removed only if they used the old PMK that was replaced for the
current AP and only if that PMK had previously been used successfully
(i.e., opportunistic flag was already cleared back to 0 in
wpa_supplicant_key_neg_complete()). This is still enough to fix the
issue described in that older commit while not causing problems for
standard PMKSA caching operations even if OKC is enabled in
wpa_supplicant configuration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
TDLS responder STA used to retransmit the TDLS Setup Response after 5
seconds if the TDLS Setup Confirm is not received. The initiator would
have enabled the TDLS link and started transmitting the data to the peer
on the TDLS link after transmitting the TDLS Setup Confirm frame. If the
TDLS Setup Confirm frame is not received by the receiver, the
transmissions from the initiator on the direct link would get failed for
the TDLS link not getting enabled on the receiver. This commit reduces
the data delivery failure duration by shortening the retry time of the
TDLS Setup Response frames. The retry limit of the TDLS Response frame
also is increased to ensure that the peer does not miss the frames in
the reduced time period.
Signed-hostap: Sunil Dutt <duttus@codeaurora.org>
The hostapd_cli ess_disassoc command now takes three arguments (STA MAC
address, timeout in ms, URL) and the STA is disconnected after the
specified timeout.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These events are sent as a special case to both the group interface and
"parent interface" (i.e., the interface that was used for managing P2P
negotiation). The latter is not really correct event, so get rid of it
with the new global control interface design where there is no need to
support legacy upper layer implementations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace direct wpa_msg() calls with p2p_dbg(), p2p_info(), and p2p_err()
calls that use a new debug_print() callback to handle actual debug
printing outside the P2P module.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This removes wpa_ctrl.h dependency from src/p2p/* and makes the P2P
events more consistent, i.e., everything that is aimed for upper layer
processing from the wpa_supplicant control interfaces is generated in
p2p_supplicant.c.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function can be used instead of wpa_msg() and wpa_msg_ctrl() to
indicate that an event is not specific to a network interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The wpa_supplicant global control interface parameter can now be used to
explicitly specify an abstract UNIX domain socket (Linux specific
extension) with "@abstract:" prefix and an Android control socket with
"@android:" prefix.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Allow invitation exchange to update operating channel selection after
peer channel list has been received similarly to how GO negotiation was
handled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new control interface command can be used to send a
BSS Transition Management Query frame to the current AP.
Signed-hostap: Vinayak Kamath <vkamat@codeaurora.org>
The HIST_ENTRY and its variables are allocated within libreadline, so
they won't have the WPA_TRACE special header and cannot be freed with
os_free(). Use free() to avoid issues during wpa_cli termination if any
of the new commands added to the history are to be removed (e.g.,
set_network could include a password).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 97279d8d1a started filtering MLME
frame events based on Address 1 (destination) field. This works fine for
frames sent to us, but it did filter out some corner cases where we
actually want to process an event based on a frame sent by us. The main
such case is deauthentication or disassociation triggered by something
external to wpa_supplicant in the system. Fix this by accepting events
for frames where either Address 1 or 2 (transmitter) matches the
interface address.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Store context for each tls_init() caller, so events are generated for
the correct wpa_s instance. The tls_global variable is retained for
older OpenSSL implementations that may not have app-data for SSL_CTX.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This can be used to stop AP mode beaconing temporarily, e.g., in
response to a radar detected event.
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
This patch is based on the original work by Boris Presman and
Victor Goldenshtein. Channel Switch Announcement support has been
removed and event handling as well as channel set handling was
changed, among various other changes.
Cc: Boris Presman <boris.presman@ti.com>
Cc: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
DFS implementation requires to run an eventloop while monitoring
the Channel Availability Check (CAC). After that, the "real" event
loop is started, and should not fail doing so.
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <siwu@hrz.tu-chemnitz.de>
The reason code for the teardown request is overwritten for open
mode. This commit removes the code that does so by reverting parts
of commit 0cb12963b6.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The use of AID=1 for the nl80211 dummy STA case is specific to the
driver (cfg80211), so better move this into the driver wrapper instead
of generic TDLS implementation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The information of the peer's AID is required for the driver to
construct partial AID in VHT PPDU's. Pass this information to the driver
during add/set station operations (well, as soon as the information is
available, i.e., with set station operation currently).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
currbuf_valid needs to be cleared when an old command from history is
processed to avoid leaving a bogus entry that makes history_prev() skip
the last entry in history.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is a C compiler extension and not needed, so replace with standard
compliant way of calculating the pointer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit df2f9ec6b2.
The current AOSP snapshot for JB includes nla_put_u32(), so this is not
needed anymore and is also causing linking issues due to duplicated
definition.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since "pairwise" is defined as an integer, the current assignment leads
to it having the value 0 or 8, which is a bit strange in debug output:
WPA: Send EAPOL(version=2 secure=1 mic=1 ack=1 install=1 pairwise=8
kde_len=46 keyidx=2 encr=1)
Use !!(...) to normalize it to 0 or 1.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
For some testing it can be useful to force the Key MIC in group
EAPOL-Key frames to be corrupt. Add an option to allow setting a
probability for corrupting the Key MIC and use it in the WPA code,
increasing the first byte of the MIC by one to corrupt it if desired.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
In case that NL80211_PROTOCOL_FEATURE_SPLIT_WIPHY_DUMP is supported,
wiphy_info_handler() is called several times, where
NL80211_ATTR_MAX_REMAIN_ON_CHANNEL_DURATION is present only in one
of these calls. Thus capa->max_remain_on_chan is overridden in
all other calls.
Fix it so the default value is set only after all the wiphy info was
received.
Signed-hostap: Ilan Peer <ilan.peer@intel.com>
nl80211 has obsoleted WEXT as the preferred kernel interface for
controlling wireless drivers. Update wpa_supplicant driver interface
list order so that nl80211 gets used first if both nl80211 and wext
interfaces are included in the build. In addition, update README to
reflect the fact that WEXT is obsolete.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"WPS_ER_START ifname=<interace>" can now be used to force a specific
interface to be used for UPnP operations. This is especially useful for
automated test cases where the lo interface can now be used easily to
perform ER operations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There are quite a few places in the current implementation where a nul
terminated string is generated from binary data. Add a helper function
to simplify the code a bit.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
My APs generate their configuration on their own using a different
number of (vlan-enabled) bss. Currently, all my vlan_file files consist
of a single line: the wildcard line. Configuration file generation would
be easier, if the hostapd configuration file would not depend on those
simple vlan_file files.
This patch removes the need for those one-line files by using the
<device>.<vlan> naming scheme if no vlan_file is given (or that file is
empty). This should not break any existing setup, as using dynamic_vlan
with no vlan configured does not make sense anyway.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
When a specific out-of-band Device Password is enabled, it can be useful
to be able to advertise that in the selected registrar information.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
All P2P use cases are required to use the global operating table and
there is no need to need to try to maintain some backwards compatibility
with country code -specific values. Clean up the implementation by
removing the unnecessary country parameter.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reset ft_completed if STA receives deauthentication
between FT reassoc success and the subsequent initial
mobility authentication and association.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit fb8984fd6f added a mechanism to
skip the Listen state when the peer is expected to be waiting for us to
initiate a new GO Negotiation. However, this flag was set when building
the GO Negotiation Response frame with status 1 regardless of whether we
managed to send that frame or peer receive it. This could result in GO
Negotiation failures in cases where the peer did not receive the
response and Listen channels of the devices were different. Fix this by
setting the flag only after TX status indicating success has been
received.
This fixes frequent failures shown for the test_grpform_pbc hwsim test
case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
We should not call getSessionID method if it's not provided. This fixes
a regression from commit 950c563076 where
EAP methods that did not implement getSessionId resulted in NULL pointer
dereference when deriving the key.
Signed-off-by: Shijie Zhang <shijiez@qca.qualcomm.com>
When Action frame TX is postponed until a pending p2p_scan completes,
there may be additional operations that need to be continued after the
postponed Action frame TX operation completes. Fix this by starting
pending operation (if any) from TX status event for after_scan_tx
frames.
This fixes common errors seen with the test_discovery hwsim test case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add "EAPLogoff" and "EAPLogon" interface DBus commands which
parallel the "logoff" and "logon" wpa_ctrl commands which terminate
and restart EAP authentication. Slightly enhance the "logon" case
by expiring any running "startWhile" timer.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
In order to test clients in scenarios where APs may (randomly)
drop certain management frames, introduce some testing options
into the hostapd configuration that can make it ignore certain
frames. For now, these are probe requests, authentication and
(re)association frames.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This option can be used only for global parameters that are not going
to be changed from settings.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Signed-off-by: Iliyan Malchev <malchev@google.com>
Dmitry reported that the kernel could no longer parse the
scheduled scan attributes correctly after my patch to use
nla_nest_start/nla_nest_end. The reason is that the wrong
attribute is closed I accidentally made it close the full
scan config instead of just the SSID match set.
Reported-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Harmonize EAP status events over control interface to provide same
functionality as existing D-Bus callback.
Signed-hostap: Chris Hessing <chris.hessing@cloudpath.net>
A kernel commit ("mac80211: fix FT roaming") started validating that the
STA entry is marked associated when adding a key. While this is needed
to fix some FT use cases with hardware crypto, it has a side effect of
breaking TDLS key configuration. Work around this by trying to
re-configure the key for the direct link after the STA entry has been
set with all information. In addition, try to tear down the link if
anything goes wrong in key configuration (if both attempts fail) or
enabling the link in the driver.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
"WPS_NFC_CONFIG_TOKEN <WPS/NDEF> <network id>" can now be used to build
an NFC configuration token from a locally configured network.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This extends the WPS ER commands that previously accepted only UUID as
an identifier for an AP to use either UUID or BSSID for this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wps_build_public_key() takes the dh_ctx into use and another attempt to
use the same DH keys fails with wps->dh_ctx being set to NULL. Avoid
this by using the DH parameters only if dh_ctx is valid. This fixes
cases where a use of local pre-configured DH keys followed by an
operating using peer DH keys would faild due to unexpected attempt to
use local keys again.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some extended capabilities (I'm currently interested in "Operating Mode
Notification" for VHT) are implemented by the kernel driver and exported
in nl80211. Use these in hostapd/wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The new wps_independent=1 configuration parameter can be used to remove
interfaces from the shared hostapd process WPS control (i.e., to apply
WPS operations only to a subset of interfaces instead of all).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows WPS to update AP configuration in the case no hostapd
configuration file is used (i.e., dynamic configuration through the
control interface).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of allocating a new message and then moving that into
the message being built, use nla_nest_start() and put the data
into the message directly.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
As per P2P specification v1.2: "The P2P Group Info attribute shall be
omitted if there are zero connected P2P Clients."
Do not add the attribute if there are not connected peers.
Signed-hostap: Chaitanya T K <chaitanya.mgit@gmail.com>
When the OS is out of random bytes in SM_STATE(WPA_PTK, AUTHENTICATION2)
in ap/wpa_auth.c, hostapd sends the sm to state DISCONNECT without
clearing ReAuthenticationRequest, resulting in an infinite loop.
Clearing sm->ReAuthenticationRequest using gdb fixes the running hostapd
instance for me. Also sm->Disconnect = TRUE should be used instead of
wpa_sta_disconnect() to make sure that the incomplete ANonce does not
get used.
Fix this issue by resetting sm->ReAuthenticationRequest even if the STA
gets disconnected and use sm->Disconnect instead of
wpa_sta_disconnect().
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
A non-HT capable AP on any channel could have triggered us to enable
protection regardless of own operating channel if the driver delivered
Beacon frames from other channels. The channel detection in ap_list is
not exactly ideal, but most cases can be handled by checking ap->channel
against the currently configured channel (or secondary channel in case
of HT40).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This iter_next/iter_prev pointers were not really used for anything, so
get rid of the unnecessary complexity in the AP list maintenance.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 6b56cc2d97 added a possible call to
p2p_reset_pending_pd() prior to checking config_methods match between
our request and peer response. That reset call could clear
dev->req_config_methods and as such, result in unexpected
P2P-PROV-DISC-FAILURE report here even in cases where the peer accepts
the provision discovery. Fix this by using a local copy of the
req_config_methods variable.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new -G<group> command line argument can now be used to set the group
for the control interfaces to enable cases where hostapd is used without
a configuration file and the controlling program is not running with
root user privileges.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Enhance TDLS Setup Request processing to support both external and
internal TDLS setup for the case where concurrent TDLS initialization
results in the TDLS Setup Request from the peer getting accepted.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_tdls_peer_free() ended up getting called after some of the
parameters from the TDLS Setup Request frame were copied into the struct
wpa_tdls_peer information. This could result in continuing with cleared
information in case the new exchange was the one that is used in
concurrent initialization case or if this is to re-negotiated an
existing TDLS link. The driver would not be provided with all the peer
capabilities correctly in such case.
Fix this by moving the existing_peer check to happen before the
information from the TDLS Setup Request frame is copied.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If we accept the peer TPK M1 after having sent our TPK M1, we need to
reject TPK M2 from the peer to avoid going through two TDLS setup
exchanges.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In some cases where the ack for Invitation response is lost,
the device is stuck in invited state but the peer device starts
GO. In line with the implementation of Negotiation Confirm,
assume invitation response was actually received by the peer
even though ack was not reported.
Signed-hostap: Vivek Natarajan <nataraja@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit b52f084cfa introduced a mechanism
for adding arbitrary vendor-specific elements into the Beacon and Probe
Response frames. However, this information was not added to the separate
buffers used for specifying Beacon and Probe Response IEs for drivers
that build the frames internally. Add vendor_elements to these values,
too, to support such drivers in addition to drivers that use the full
Beacon tail/head buffers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When the wiphy information is split, there's no guarantee that the
channels are processed before the bitrates; in fact, with the current
kernel it happens the other way around. Therefore, the mode information
isn't set up correctly and there's no 11g mode.
Fix this by doing the 11b/11g determination as part of the
postprocessing.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Previously, P2P_PD_DURING_FIND state was scheduled for 200 ms and the
P2P state was not change until that timeout regardless of whether the PD
Response for recieved or not. There is no need to wait for that timeout
if the response is received, so allow the next operation to be performed
immediately after the response has been processed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to understand how scan operations and events occur
when multiple interfaces is being controlled by a single wpa_supplicant
process.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a driver capability flag for drivers which support IBSS mode and set
it for nl80211 drivers which have set the NL80211_IFTYPE_ADHOC.
Add a new option "modes" to "get_capability" which will return "AP" and
"IBSS" if the corresponding capability flags are set.
The idea is that this can be used for UIs to find out if the driver
supports IBSS mode.
Signed-hostap: Bruno Randolf <br1@einfach.org>
Clear WLAN_STA_ASSOC_REQ_OK, otherwise no Class 3 frame will be sent to
the disconnected STA in response to data frames.
Signed-hostap: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
If a peer replies to persistent group invitation with status code 8
(unknown group), remove the peer from the p2p_client_list if we are the
GO or remove the persistent group if we are the P2P client since it
looks like that the peer has dropped persistent group credentials and
the provisioning step needs to be executed again.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 50285f5ca8 changed number of rules
in channel selection and among other things, it broke the design where
the currently used operating channel on a virtual interface that is
shared by the same radio is preferred to avoid costs related to
multi-channel concurrency. Fix this regression by making the P2P module
aware of the shared channel and using that preference as the highest
priority when re-selecting the channel during negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 50285f5ca8 ended up forcing channel
re-selection in number of cases where the peer would actually have
accepted our initial preference. Fix the parts related to best channel
information by using best_freq_overall as the highest priority and by
skipping the band changes if the peer supports the channel that we
picked since these were based on the assumption that
p2p_reselect_channel() is called only if the peer could not accept our
initial choice which is not the case anymore.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the previously started setup is terminated in case both peers
initiate TDLS link at more or less the same time, disable the old link
to allow the dummy station entry to be deleted from cfg80211 so that a
new entry can be added for the setup direction that will be allowed to
proceed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add NL80211_CMD_UPDATE_FT_IES to support update of FT IEs to the
WLAN driver. Add NL80211_CMD_FT_EVENT to send FT event from the
WLAN driver. This will carry the target AP's MAC address along
with the relevant Information Elements. This event is used to
report received FT IEs (MDIE, FTIE, RSN IE, TIE, RICIE).
Signed-off-by: Deepthi Gowri <deepthi@codeaurora.org>
It is possible for a P2P client to connect to an operating group without
exchanging any Probe Request/Response frames that would allow the GO to
discover the peer. To make sure there is a P2P peer entry at the GO, try
to add the peer information based on P2P IE in (Re)Association Request
frame.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add support for VHT capability overrides to allow testing connections
with a subset of the VHT capabilities that are actually supported by
the device. The only thing that isn't currently supported (by mac80211
and this code) is the RX/TX highest rate field.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This implements support for the new NL80211_ATTR_SPLIT_WIPHY_DUMP in
nl80211 to handle wiphy information that cannot fit in one message.
Reviewed-by: Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
Signed-hostap: Dennis H Jensen <dennis.h.jensen@siemens.com>
The peer commit element needs to be validated to pass one of the steps
listed in IEEE 802.11, 11.3.5.4:
scalar-op(r, ELEMENT) = 1 modulo p
Similar step was present for ECC groups, but was missing for FFC groups.
This is needed to avoid dictionary attacks.
Thanks to Michael Roßberg and Sascha Grau for reporting this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is clearer to keep all the validation steps described in IEEE 802.11
11.3.5.4 in a single location instead of splitting this between the
parsing and processing functions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Peer device includes its list of allowed operating channels in the
Invitation Response frame. When we are becoming the GO, use that list
from the peer to filter out acceptable channels to avoid selecting a
channel that the peer is unable to use.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When re-invoking a persistent group in P2P client role, the new
pref=<MHz> parameter can now be used with the p2p_invite command to
indicate a preferred operating frequency. Unlike the older freq=<MHz>
parameter, this leaves GO an option to select another channel (from our
supported channels) if the GO cannot accept the channel.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If multi channel concurrency is supported, we have to populate the
p2p_channels with list of channels that we support. Use the same design
that was previously added for GO Negotiation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The VHT IE struct just has an opaque 8-byte array for the MCS
set, make it more expressive by explicitly naming the pieces.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Commit fb8984fd6f cleared wps_method to
WPS_NOT_READY in p2p_stop_find_for_freq() as an attempt to clear
authorization when a group formation is cancelled. However, this code
path is hit also in cases where the user did not actually cancel
anything (e.g., from p2p_process_go_neg_req()). As such, it is not fine
to clear wps_method here even if it could be proper for some cases. For
now, revert that part to avoid regressions and consider clearing
wps_method on cancel separately.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In case we have replied to a peer's GO Negotiation Request frame with a
GO Negotiation Response frame using status code
info-currently-unavailable (1), the peer is likely going to wait for us
to initiate GO Negotiation on its Listen channel. We were previously
using alternativing send-GO-Neg-Req and Listen phase when providing that
response after the user had authorized the connection. However, the
Listen phase here is unnecessary in this case and will make the
connection take longer time to go through. Skip the Listen phase and
make the wait-for-GO-Neg-Resp timeout random between 100 and 200 ms to
avoid getting in sync with the peer. In practice, this will make us
retry GO Negotiation Request frames more frequently and remain on the
peer's Listen channel for most of the time when initiating GO
Negotiation after status=1 response.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There may be environments in which large number of devices are operating
on the social channels. In such cases, it is possible for the Action
frame TX operation wait for quite long time before being able to get the
frame out. To avoid triggering GO Negotiation failures, increase the
timeouts for GO Neg Req (with TX ACK) and GO Neg Resp (with or without
TX ACK as long as status=0) to 500 ms.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This flag will add ==== delimiter between to separate bss results.
Unlike the other BSS command MASK values, this delimiter is not
included by default to avoid issues with existing users of the BSS
command.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
It is possible for the driver to indicate multiple Probe Request frames
that would be processed in a single loop. If those frames happen to be
from a peer which with we are trying to start GO Negotiation, multiple
timeouts to start GO Negotiation (p2p_go_neg_start) could end up being
scheduled. This would result in confusing burst of multiple GO
Negotiation Request frames being sent once the RX loop finally
concludes. Avoid this by scheduling only a single eloop timeout to
trigger GO Negotiation regardless of how many Probe Request frames from
the peer is received. In addition, make sure this timeout gets canceled
in p2p_deinit().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If we have already sent out GO Negotiation Response and are waiting for
the peer to reply with GO Negotiation Confirm, there is no point in
re-starting GO Negotiation based on Probe Request frame from the peer.
Doing that would just result in confusing GO Negotiation exchange with
multiple sessions running at the same time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The device that is selected as the GO shall incode P2P Group ID
attribute in GO Negotiation Response/Confirm message. Previously we did
not reject a message without that attribute since it was possible to
continue operations even without knowing the SSID. However, this can
potentially result in confusing results since missing P2P Group ID
attribute can be a sign of conflicting GO role determination (both
devices assuming the peer is the GO). To get clearer end result for the
GO Negotiation, reject this as a fatal error. In addition, stop GO
Negotiation if GO Negotiation Confirm indicates non-zero status since
that is also a fatal error.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 624b4d5a64 changed GO Negotiation
to use the same Dialog Token value for all retransmissions of the GO
Negotiation Request within the same session. However, it did leave the
tie breaker bit changing for each frame. While this should not have
caused issues for most cases, it looks like there are possible sequences
where the peer may end up replying to two GO Negotiation Request frames
with different tie breaker values. If in such a case the different GO
Negotiation Response frames are used at each device, GO role
determination may result in conflicting results when same GO intent is
used.
Fix this by assigning the tie breaker value at the same time with the
dialog token (i.e., when processing the p2p_connect command instead of
for each transmitted GO Negotiation Request frame) to avoid issues with
GO selection.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The information of the peer's VHT capability is required for the
driver to establish a TDLS link in VHT mode with a compatible peer.
Pass this information to the driver when the peer station is
getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
WSC specification 2.0 section 7.4 describes OOB password to be expressed
in ASCII format (upper case hexdump) instead of raw binary.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 2d9ffe1e85 broke GAS server
callback for receiving Public Action frames. The incorrect context
pointer was used in the public_action_cb2 case. Fix this to use the
correct context pointer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Hostapd provides QoS info of the STA (Service Period & AC mask) to the
kernel during wpa_driver_nl80211_sta_add call. Bit 5 and Bit 6 of QoS
info represents the Max SP length. Fix an issue in the code to fetch the
Max SP by shifting right the QoS info by value WMM_QOSINFO_STA_SP_SHIFT.
(operator ">" is replaced with ">>" operator).
Signed-off-by: Srinivasan <srinivasanb@posedge.com>
"WPS_NFC_TOKEN <WPS/NDEF>" used to generate a new NFC password token
regardless of whether there was a pre-configured token in the
configuration. Change this to use the pre-configured value, if
available, instead. This allows the same command to be used to write the
password token to an NFC tag more conveniently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The contents of the peer's capability and extended capability
information is required for the driver to perform TDLS P-UAPSD and Off
Channel operations. Pass this information to the driver when the peer
station is getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The information of the peer's HT capability and the QOS information is
required for the driver to perform TDLS operations. Pass this
information to the driver when the peer station is getting added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Registrar is allowed to propose another Device Password ID in M2. Make
Enrollee validate Device Password ID in M2 to check if this happened.
This commit adds support for changing from NFC password token to default
PIN for the case where the AP is the Enrollee and has both the NFC
password token and AP PIN enabled at the same time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit ffdaa05a6b added support for using
NFC password token from an AP. However, it had a bug that prevented the
wpa_supplicant wps_reg command from being used with "nfc-pw" as the PIN
value. Fix string comparison to handle this correctly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A TDLS Teardown frame with Reason Code 3 (Deauthenticated because
sending STA is leaving (or has left) IBSS or ESS) shall be transmitted
to all TDLS peer STAs (via the AP or via the direct path) prior to
transmitting a Disassociation frame or a Deauthentication frame to the
AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The driver may have cached (e.g., in cfg80211 BSS table) the scan
results for relatively long time. To avoid reporting stale information,
update P2P peers only based on results that have based on frames
received after the last p2p_find operation was started.
This helps especially in detecting when a previously operating GO stops
the group since the BSS entry for that could live for 30 seconds in the
cfg80211 cache. Running p2p_flush followed by p2p_find will now allow
wpa_supplicant to not add a P2P peer entry for that GO if the group had
been terminated just before that p2p_flush command. Previously, that GO
could have been indicated as a newly found device for up to 30 seconds
after it had stopped the group.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
For various P2P use cases, it is useful to have more accurate timestamp
for the peer information update. This commit improves scan result
handling by using a single timestamp that is taken immediately after
fetching the results from the driver and then using that value to
calculate the time when the driver last updated the BSS entry. In
addition, more debug information is added for P2P peer updates to be
able to clearly see how old information is being used here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If we discover a P2P peer based on a Beacon frame from the GO role, we
do not get information about the supported configuration methods. This
can result in issues if the P2P managing entity above wpa_supplicant is
not prepared to handling config_methods=0x0. To avoid this, postpone
reporting of the P2P-DEVICE-FOUND event when this happens on one of the
social channels. It would be good to be able to this on all channels,
but that could result in issues of never indicating the event for a peer
that is operating a GO on a channel that requires passive scanning.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
It could be possible for the scan results to include two entries for a
peer, one from the Listen state and the second one from the GO role. The
latter could be based on a Beason frame. If that happens and the entry
from GO is processed last, the P2P peer config_methods value could
potentially get cleared since Beacon frames do not include this
information in either WPS or P2P element. Avoid this by allowing the
config_methods value for P2P peers to be updated only if the new value
is non-zero.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Since there could be multiple carrier records, it is cleaner to build
only the WPS carrier record instead of full NFC connection handover
request within wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Control interface command "NFC_GET_HANDOVER_SEL NDEF WPS-CR" can now be
used to fetch WPS carrier record from hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The capability itself isn't really affected by an OBSS
scan, only the HT operation must then be restricted to
20 MHz. Change this, and therefore use the secondary
channel configuration to determine the setting of the
OP_MODE_20MHZ_HT_STA_ASSOCED flag.
This shouldn't really change anything functionally,
it just makes the code a little less confusing and
is also needed to implement more dynamic bandwidth
changes if ever desired.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This adds a new getSessionId() callback for EAP peer methods to allow
EAP Session-Id to be derived. This commits implements this for EAP-FAST,
EAP-GPSK, EAP-IKEv2, EAP-PEAP, EAP-TLS, and EAP-TTLS.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
In addition to the offload mechanism, the Android configuration and
makefiles are extended to allow this to be configured for the build by
dropping in platform specific configuration files and makefile without
having to modify any existing files.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
ANDROID_SETGROUPS_OVERRIDE macro can now be used to override setgroups()
values based on build configuration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When pending p2p_find fails we need to send p2p_stop_find event to
indicate the previous p2p_find command has been processed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 1a9f6509b3 added support for
fragmenting the P2P IE in Probe Response frames from a GO. However, it
did not take into account the possibility of Wi-Fi Display IE being
included in the same buffer and caused a regression for the cases where
Wi-Fi Display is enabled. Fix this by building the possibly fragmented
P2P IE first and then concatenating the separate IEs together.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
On the DMG (60 GHz) band, capability bits defined differently from
non-DMG ones. Adjust capability matching to cover both cases.
Also, for non-DMG bands, check ESS bit is set.
Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
When AP mode operation reject the client, nl80211 layer advertises the
connect failed event with the reason for failures (for example, max
client reached, etc.) using NL80211_CMD_CONN_FAILED.
This patch adds some debug messages whenever such an event is received
from the nl80211 layer and also the same event is posted to the upper
layer via wpa_msg().
Signed-off-by: Raja Mani <rmani@qca.qualcomm.com>
The reason code used for calculating the MIC should correspond to the
reason code with which the teardown frame is sent, as the receiver shall
use the one obtained in the frame for validating the MIC.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If an implicit TDLS set up request is obtained on an existing link or an
to be established link, the previous link was not removed. This commit
disables the existing link on a new set up request. Also,
wpa_tdls_reneg() function was invoking wpa_tdls_start() on an already
existing peer for the case of internal setup, which is incorrect. Thus
the invocation of wpa_tdls_start() is removed in wpa_tdls_reneg() and
also this function is renamed to wps_tdls_remove() as it does not
renegotiation rather shall remove the link (if any) for the case of
external setup.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is no need to have this check copied to each caller since this
needs to be done for every case when a new peer is being added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Peer entries were getting added on every discover request from the peer,
thus resulting in multiple entries with the same MAC address. Ensures
that a check is done for the presence of the peer entry and reuse the
existing entry instead of adding a new one.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
GAS server used the same public_action_cb mechanism as P2P to process
Action frames. This ended up overriding P2P processing of Action frames
while running an AP/GO interface with a build that enables Interworking
(e.g., for Hotspot 2.0) and a driver that uses hostapd for AP mode
SME/MLME. Fix this by adding a separate callback registration for the
GAS server. This should really be cleaned up by supporting arbitrary
number of callback handlers, but for now, this addresses the regression
with a minimal change.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Very basic support for OpenBSD. No support for scanning yet, so this needs
ap_scan=0 and expects that the user has configured the interface manually
using ifconfig(8).
Signed-hostap: Mark Kettenis <kettenis@openbsd.org>
Commit 6aaac006af modified the
pmksa_cache_init() prototype, but forgot to update the empty wrapper
function which is used when PMKSA caching is not included in the build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When scan failed, the wpa_driver_nl80211_scan method tried
to recursively call itself, but it passed in the wrong argument
for the void*, and so then it crashed accessing bad memory.
With this fix, hostapd still will not retry the scan later, but
at least it will exit cleanly and won't polute the file system
with core files.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
The P2P-FIND-STOPPED event was sent only in the P2P_SEARCH state, but
this needs to be send also in the new continue-search-when-ready states
P2P_CONTINUE_SEARCH_WHEN_READY and P2P_SEARCH_WHEN_READY for consistent
behavior.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signal the start of EAP authentication as well as when additional
credentials are required to complete.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
This was previously included only with NL80211_CMD_ASSOCIATE, but the
information is as useful (if not even more useful) for
NL80211_CMD_CONNECT. It should be noted that cfg80211 does not yet use
this attribute with NL80211_CMD_CONNECT, but that can be added easily.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Each GO Negotiation Request is (re)tried with an unique dialog token and
a GO Negotiation Response / Confirmation from the peer with a mismatched
dialog token is ignored which could result in a failure in this group
formation attempt. Thus, the P2P device would continue retrying the GO
Negotiation Request frames till the GO Negotiation Response frame with a
matching dialog token is received. To avoid the failures due to the
dialog token mismatch in retry cases if the peer is too slow to reply
within the timeout, the same dialog token value is used for every retry
in the same group formation handshake.
It should be noted that this can result in different contents of the GO
Negotiation Request frame being sent with the same dialog token value
since the tie breaker bit in GO Intent is still toggled for each
attempt. The specification is not very clear on what would be the
correct behavior here. Tie breaker bit is not updated on
"retransmissions", but that is more likely referring to the layer 2
retransmission and not the retry at higher layer using a new MMPDU.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows even more memory to be freed when the SAE instance enters
Accepted state. This leaves only the minimal needed memory allocated
during the association which is especially helpful for the AP
implementation where multiple stations may be associated concurrently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Most of the variables are not needed anymore once the SAE instance
has entered Accepted state. Free these to save memory.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The rand/mask values and commit scalar are derived using the exact same
operations, so only use a separate function for deriving the commit
element.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to postpone this validation step to a separate
processing operation for the commit message, so move the minimal
validation tasks into the parsing functions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Move the bignum comparison part into the bignum library to allow a
single implementation of rand generation for both ECC and FCC based
groups.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The groups 22, 23, and 24 are not based on a safe prime and generate a
prime order subgroup. As such, struct dh_group is also extended to
include the order for previously defined groups (q=(p-1)/2 since these
were based on a safe prime).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows FFC groups to be used with SAE. Though, these groups are not
included in the default sae_groups value based on what is available
since the FFC groups have the additional requirement of using a safe
prime with the current implementation (or specification of the group
order).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The optional "reason=<reason code>" parameter to the ctrl_iface
deauthenticate and disassociate commands can now be used to change the
reason code used in the disconnection frame. This can be used, e.g., by
P2P GO to disconnect a single P2P client from the group by sending it an
indication of the group getting terminated (Deauthentication frame with
reason code 3). It needs to be noted that the peer device is still in
possession on the PSK, so it can still reconnect to the group after this
if it does not follow the group termination indication.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit increases the maximum buffer size for P2P Client Info
advertized by the Group Owner in the Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use of two variables to track bounds checking seems to be a bit too much
for some static analyzers, so add an extra condition for buffer padding
to avoid incorrect warnings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These verify that a proper pointer type is used and in addition, seems
to get rid of some false static analyzer warnings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The code initializing GMK Counter uses the group pointer value as extra
entropy and to distinguish different group instances. Some static
analyzers complain about the sizeof(pointer) with memcpy, so use a more
explicit type casting to make it more obvious what the code is doing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd.conf sae_groups parameter can now be used to limit the set of
groups that the AP allows for SAE. Similarly, sae_groups parameter is
wpa_supplicant.conf can be used to set the preferred order of groups. By
default, all implemented groups are enabled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In addition to the trivial change in adding the new group ientifier,
this required changes to KDF and random number generation to support
cases where the length of the prime in bits is not a multiple of eight.
The binary presentation of the value needs to be shifted so that the
unused most significant bits are the zero padding rather than the extra
bits in the end of the array.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In addition to the mandatory group 19 (256-bit random ECP group) add
support for groups 20 (384-bit), 25 (192-bit), and 26 (224-bit).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The counter>200 check needs to be done before the continue-on-not-found
case to be effective in stopping this loop.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The buffer is set based on maximum group prime length, but pwd-value
needs to be correct length for the negotiated group.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes the SAE implementation a bit simpler by not having to build
the bignum for group order during execution.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd can now be configured to use anti-clogging mechanism based on
the new sae_anti_clogging_threshold parameter (which is
dot11RSNASAEAntiCloggingThreshold in the standard). The token is
generated using a temporary key and the peer station's MAC address.
wpa_supplicant will re-try SAE authentication with the token included if
commit message is rejected with a token request.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 11.3.8.6.1: If there is a protocol instance for
the peer and it is in Authenticated state, the new Commit Message
shall be dropped if the peer-scalar is identical to the one used in
the existing protocol instance.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The enum values for struct sae_data::state now match the protocol
instance states as defined in IEEE Std 802.11-2012, 11.3.8.2.2
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Even if the PAC file does not start with the proper header line, allow
the file to be used if it is empty. [Bug 423]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The PMKSA cache expiration timer was not actually ever initialized since
the only place for registering the timeout was in the timeout handler.
Fix this by initializing the timer whenever a new PMKSA cache entry is
added to the beginning of the list (i.e., when it was the first entry or
expires before the entry that was previously going to expire first).
[Bug 393]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 4378fc14eb started using QoS Data
frames for QoS STAs. It used the correct flags value for WPA/RSN
EAPOL-Key frames, but wrong flags for IEEE 802.1X EAPOL frames. The
WPA_STA_WMM value used in driver_nl80211.c happens to be identical to
WLAN_STA_ASSOC in sta->flags and this makes driver_nl80211.c try to use
QoS header for all STAs. Fix this by properly converting the flags from
WLAN_STA_* to WPA_STA_*. [Bug 426]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 68a41bbb44 broke fallback from
reauth id to fullauth id by not allowing a second AKA/Identity round to
be used after having received unrecognized reauth_id in the first round.
Fix this by allowing fullauth id to be requested in such a case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 175171ac6c ensured that the PD
requests are retried in join-a-running group case and the Enrollee is
started on either receiving the PD response or after the retries. Each
PD request is retried with an unique dialog token and a PD response from
the GO with a mismatched dialog token is ignored. Thus, the P2P client
would continue retrying the PD requests till the response with a
matching dialog token is obtained. This would result in the GO getting
multiple PD requests and a corresponding user notification (POP UP) in
implementations where each PD request results in a POP UP, resulting in
a bad user experience. To avoid such behavior, the same dialog token
value is used for every retry in the same PD exchange.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
wpa_driver_nl80211_ap() returned error if set_freq failed, but left the
previously set nlmode to GO/AP. While this should not be issue for most
purposes, it leaves the interface in somewhat unexpected state and could
potentially affect operations prior to next connection attempt. Address
this by restoring the previous nlmode if AP mode cannot be started for
some reason.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to read the code for the two possible cases
(forced/preferred channel and automatic channel selection).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since the operating channel is randomly set to 1/6/11 on init, which is
commonly included in the channel intersection, we were effectively
ignoring the set of P2P preferred channels when trying to improve
channel selection after having received peer information. Fix this by
trying to get the best channel we can, unless the user hard coded the
operating channel in the configuration file or p2p_connect command. Fall
back to the initial randomly selected channel if a better one cannot be
chosen.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Even if the peer does not accept the forced channel, we should not allow
the forced_freq parameter to be be overridden, i.e., such a case needs
to result in GO Negotiation failure.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Both p2p_connect and p2p_authorize use the same functionality to select
the channel preferences for GO Negotiation. The part of setting this
device flag was copied to each function, but it can also be handled by
the shared function after some reordering of code.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The exact same mechanism was used for determining the operating channel
at the device that becomes the GO regardless of whether this was
triggered by reception of GO Negotiation Request of Response frame. Use
a shared function to avoid duplicated implementation and potential
differences in the future.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When no other user preference is specified, opt to use an operating
channel that allows HT40 operation. This way, if driver capabilities
and regulatory constraints allow, we might enjoy increased bandwidth.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
cfg80211 caches the scan results according the channel number. Due to
the 15 sec aging this might cause the user mode to see more than one
scan result with the same BSSID, e.g. - one scan result for the
P2P Device and one for the P2P GO (once it's enabled).
Fix this by updating the device entry only if the new peer entry is
newer than the one previously stored.
Signed-off-by: Yoni Divinsky <yoni.divinsky@ti.com>
Signed-off-by: Victor Goldenshtein <victorg@ti.com>
Signed-off-by: Igal Chernobelsky <igalc@ti.com>
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Add some more functionality for BSS Transition Management:
- advertise support for BSS Transition Management in extended
capabilities element
- add hostapd.conf parameter bss_transition=1 for enabling support
for BSS Transition Management
- add "hostapd_cli disassoc_imminent <STA> <num TBTTs>" for sending
disassociation imminent notifications for testing purposes
- wpa_supplicant: trigger a new scan to find another BSS if the
current AP indicates disassociation imminent (TODO: the old AP needs
to be marked to use lower priority to avoid re-selecting it)
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd can run with different VIF when using nl80211. Events about MIC
failures have to be processed in context of the VIF which received it
and not in context of the primary VIF. Otherwise the station belonging
to this VIF may not be found in the primary VIF station hash and
therefore no countermeasures are started or the countermeasures are
started for the wrong VIF.
Signed-hostap: Sven Eckelmann <sven@open-mesh.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <simon@open-mesh.com>
This optional attribute may make it easier to bind together the
Access-Request and Accounting-Request messages. The accounting session
identifier is now generated when the STA associates instead of waiting
for the actual session to start after successfull authentication.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Basic support for the 60 GHz band. Neither P2P nor WPS are yet taken
care off. Allows to start AP with very simple config:
network={
ssid="test"
mode=2
frequency=60480
key_mgmt=NONE
}
Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The config says that the default for ap_table_max_size is 255 and the
default for ap_table_expiration_time is 60. But the code doesn't reflect
the default values mentioned in the sample config file.
These variables completely disable the code for Overlapping Legacy BSS
Condition by default when they are not correctly initialized. WFA
certification requires this feature and therefore an AP would have
failed the certification process unless they were initialized manually
using the configuration file.
Signed-hostap: Sven Eckelmann <sven@open-mesh.com>
Signed-hostap: Simon Wunderlich <simon@open-mesh.com>
WSC IE in Beacon and Probe Response frames should behave consistently
as far as the RF Bands attribute is concerned. Use the same dualband
condition for adding this into Probe Response frames since the value
is not really needed if the AP is not a dualband AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If separate hostapd processes are used for different RF bands, the
dualband parameter for WPS was not set correctly. Allow dualband
indication (mainly, addition of RF bands attribute for PBC session
overlap detection) also based on wps_rf_bands value (if set to "ag").
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows Probe Request frame processing to compare the configured
SSID to the SSID List element in addition to the SSID element.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace CONFIG_IEEE80211V with CONFIG_WNM to get more consistent build
options for WNM-Sleep Mode operations. Previously it was possible to
define CONFIG_IEEE80211V without CONFIG_WNM which would break the build.
In addition, IEEE 802.11v has been merged into IEEE Std 802.11-2012 and
WNM is a better term to use for this new functionality anyway.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These fields do not use AES keywrap. Instead, they are protected with
management frame protection (and not included if PMF is disabled).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Expiry can always trigger a deauthentication, but otherwise,
deauthentication should only happen when the *current* cache entry is
removed and not being replaced. It should not happen when the current
PMK just happens to match the PMK of the entry being removed, since
multiple entries can have the same PMK when OKC is used and these
entries are often removed at different times.
This fixes an issue where eviction of the oldest inactive entry due to
adding a newer entry to a full cache caused a deauthentication when the
entry being removed had the same PMK as the current entry.
Signed-hostap: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
pmksa_cache_free_entry() takes care of updated the list head pointer
(pmksa->pmksa), so no need to do this change in the caller.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use the shared_secret pointer from RADIUS client implementation instead
of getting this from hostapd configuration data.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds support for multiple PSKs per station when using a RADIUS
authentication server to fetch the PSKs during MAC address
authentication step. This can be useful if multiple users share a
device but each user has his or her own private passphrase.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Add pmf=1/2 to wpa_supplicant STATUS command output to indicate that PMF
was negotiated for the connect (1 = optional in this BSS, 2 = required
in this BSS).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, PMF (protected management frames, IEEE 802.11w) could be
enabled only with a per-network parameter (ieee80211w). The new global
parameter (pmf) can now be used to change the default behavior to be PMF
enabled (pmf=1) or required (pmf=2) for network blocks that do not
override this with the ieee80211w parameter.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
We enable this feature for non-SME drivers as well if
they explicitly indicate need for it.
Signed-off-by: Amitkumar Karwar <akarwar@marvell.com>
Signed-off-by: Bing Zhao <bzhao@marvell.com>
Add the configuration option vht_oper_centr_freq_seg1_idx
for the second segment of an 80+80 MHz channel and use it
when building the VHT operation IE.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
If netlink_init() fails on socket create or bind the cfg struct
provided as parameter is freed by netlink_init(). Callers of
netlink_init() also free this struct on their error paths leading
to double free.
Signed-hostap: Pontus Fuchs <pontus.fuchs@gmail.com>
This allows the AP to figure out whether a station is a HS 2.0 STA
during the association and access any information that the STA may have
included in this element.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Change the maximum retry limit from 10 to 120 to match the behavior
used with GO Negotiation Request frames when trying to start GO
Negotiation with a peer that does not acknowledge frames (e.g., due
to being in sleep or on another channel most of the time).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The GO may be in sleep when we send a PD Request frame to indicate that
we are about to join a running group. Previously, this frame was not
retried more than normal low level retries. This can result in the GO
not getting the frame especially in cases where concurrent multi-channel
operations or aggressive sleep schedule is used since most drivers do
not yet synchronize with the GO's NoA before association.
Increase the likelihood of the GO receiving the PD Request frame by
retransmitting it similarly to the PD-for-GO-Negotiation case. Start
the actual join operation only after these retries have failed to get
an acknowledgment from the GO to give the connection attempt a chance
to succeed if the driver implements better NoA synchronization for it.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
p2p_prov_disc_req() used the join parameter to figure out whether the PD
request was a user initiated or not. This does not cover all use cases
of PD, so add a separate parameter to allow caller to indicate whether
the user requested the operation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
CONFIG_SQLITE=y option can now be used to allow the eap_user_file text
file to be replaced with a SQLite database
(eap_user_file=sqlite:/path/to/sqlite.db). hostapd.eap_user_sqlite
shows an example of how the database tables can be created for this
purpose. This commit does not yet include full functionality of the
text file format, but at least basic EAP-TTLS/MSCHAPv2 style
authentication mechanisms with plaintext passwords can be used for
tests.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The NL80211_CMD_TDLS_OPER command can be used as an event based on a
recent cfg80211 commit, so add code to map that to internal
wpa_supplicant event to request TDLS link setup/teardown.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 296a34f0c1 changed hostapd to
remove the internal STA entry at the beginning of TKIP countermeasures.
However, this did not take into account the case where this is triggered
by an EAPOL-Key error report from a station. In such a case, WPA
authenticator state machine may continue processing after having
processed the error report. This could result in use of freed memory.
Fix this by stopping WPA processing if the STA entry got removed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some deployed station implementations implement WPS incorrectly and
end up causing PBC session overlap issues by indicating active PBC
mode in a scan after the WPS provisioning step. Work around this by
ignoring active PBC indication in a Probe Request from a station that
completed PBC provisioning during the last five seconds.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commits 07783eaaa0 and
3da372fae8 removed the only users of the
disassociate() driver operation, so these driver wrapper functions can
also be removed now.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Change the nl80211 driver in wpa_supplicant to correctly handle
connecting to a new AP through cfg80211 without SME capability. As
before, the driver will disconnect from the previously associated AP,
but now we attempt to immediately connect to our intended AP. This
prevents us from blacklisting the AP we were trying to connect to
because of a semantic mismatch between cfg80211 and wpa_supplicant. The
disconnect/connect patch generates a local disconnect nl80211 event
which we discard because we're already correctly tracking the pending
association request.
In detail:
cfg80211 does not support connecting to a new BSS while already
connected to another BSS, if the underlying driver doesn't support
separate authenticate and associate commands. wpa_supplicant is written
to expect that this is a supported operation, except for a little error
handling that disconnects from the current BSS when roaming fails and
relies on autoconnect logic to reconnect later. However, this failure to
connect is incorrectly attributed to the new AP we attempted to
associate with, rather than a local condition in cfg80211.
The combined effect of these two conditions is that full-mac drivers
accessible through cfg80211 but without SME capability take a long time
to roam across BSS's because wpa_supplicant will:
1) Fail to associate for local reasons
2) Disconnect and return that the association request failed
3) Blacklist the association target (incorrectly)
4) Do a scan
5) Pick a less desirable AP to associate with
Signed-hostap: Christoper Wiley <wiley@chromium.org>
Commit deca6eff74 added a redundant call
to l2_packet_get_own_addr. Use the information we already have in
atheros_init.
Signed-hostap: Baruch Siach <baruch@tkos.co.il>
If identity round limit is reached, EAP-SIM/AKA session is terminated.
This needs to free the allocated message.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no point in the hapd_iface == NULL validate after this pointer
has been dereferences, so move the code dereferencing hapd_iface after
the check.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The UFD (USB flash drive) configuration method was deprecated in WSC
2.0. Since this is not known to be used, remove the UFD implementation
from hostapd and wpa_supplicant to allow the WPS implementation to be
cleaned up. This removes the now unused OOB operations and ctrl_iface
commands that had already been deprecated by the new NFC operations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The PSK generation done by pbkdf2_sha1() is one of the longest CPU time
users according to our profiling from boot to GO started.
So I have reduced some steps.
I could boot a GO by this command sequence.
-------------
add_net
set_network 0 ssid '"DIRECT-XX"'
set_network 0 psk
'"123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123"'
set_network 0 proto RSN
set_network 0 key_mgmt WPA-PSK
set_network 0 pairwise CCMP
set_network 0 auth_alg OPEN
set_network 0 mode 3
set_network 0 disabled 2
p2p_group_add persistent=0 freq=2412
-------------
By this sequence, pbkdf2_sha1() was called three times and the function
calculates the same value each time. Reduce number of calls to
pbkdf2_sha1() from 3 to 1 by caching the previous result.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma at gmail.com>
This function is now unused after the last couple of commits that
removed the last uses, so remove this to keep code simpler since all
places that disassociate, can use deauthentication instead.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Even though the standard currently describes disassociation to be used
for RSN element mismatch between Beacon/Probe Response frames and
EAPOL-Key msg 3/4, this is unnecessary difference from other cases that
deauthenticate. In addition, there is no point in leaving the 802.11
Authentication in place in this case. To keep things simpler, use
deauthentication here to get rid of the only use of
wpa_sm_disassociate().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If WPS Registrar tries to provision a WPA/WPA2-Personal network without
including a valid Network Key, the network block cannot be used to
connect to the network. Reject such credential without adding the
network block. This makes wpa_supplicant send WSC_NACK as a response to
the invalid Credential and stop the provisioning process immediately
rather than only after trying unsuccessfully to connect to the network.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new P2P_SET parameter disc_int can now be used to configure
discoverable interval for p2p_find operations. The format of the command
for setting the values is "P2P_SET disc_int <minDiscoverableInterval>
<maxDiscoverableInterval> <max TUs for discoverable interval>". The
first two parameters are given in units of 100 TUs (102.4 ms). The third
parameter can be used to further limit the interval into a specific TU
amount. If it is set to -1, no such additional limitation is enforced.
It should be noted that the P2P specification describes the random
Listen state interval to be in units of 100 TUs, so setting the max TU
value to anything else than -1 is not compliant with the specification
and should not be used in normal cases. The default parameters can be
set with "P2P_SET disc_int 1 3 -1".
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The old WPS interface for using NFC has no known deployments and even
the binary libraries referenced here are not easily available anymore.
Since the new interface for using NFC with WPS covers the same
functionality, remove the old implementation to clean up WPS
implementation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When WPS is used with NFC connection handover, the AP may indicate its
operating channel within the credential information. Use this
informatiom, if present, to speed up the scan process.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This commit adds new wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface commands to allow
external programs to go through NFC connection handover mechanism
with wpa_supplicant taking care of the WPS processing. This version
includes only the case where wpa_supplicant is operating as a
station/Enrollee.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous eapol_sm_notify_cached() implementation forced the port
to be authorized when receiving EAPOL-Key msg 1/4 that included a
matching PMKID in cases when PMKSA caching is used. This is too early
since the port should really be authorized only after the PTK has been
configured which is the case when PMKSA caching is not used.
Fix this by using the EAPOL supplicant PAE state machine to go through
the AUTHENTICATING and AUTHENTICATED states instead of forcing a jump
to AUTHENTICATED without performing full state machine steps. This can
be achieved simply by marking eapSuccess TRUE at least with the current
version of EAP and EAPOL state machines (the earlier commits in this
function seemed to indicate that this may have not been that easy in
the older versions due to the hacks needed here).
This addresses an issue with nl80211-based driver interface when the
driver depends on the STA Authorized flag being used to prevent
unprotected frames from being accepted (both TX and RX) prior to PTK
configuration.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
If the driver indicates support for multi-channel concurrency, change
the p2p_connect behavior to not force the current operating channel, but
instead, just mark it as preferred for GO Negotiation. This change
applies only for the case when the freq parameter is not used with the
p2p_connect command.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There was an issue with EAPOL frame exchanges in a multi-BSS
configuration when a station switches between the BSSes controlled by
the same hostapd process. When processing the EAPOL packet, the array of
virtual APs (iface->bss) is searched looking for the station that sent
the packet in order to identify which signal context should be used
during processing. The first match of the station in its list gets used
in the ieee802_1x_receive() function. However, even after a station has
disassociated, it remains in the list of stations pending an inactivity
timeout. This leads to the wrong hapd context (one where the station had
already disassociated) being used in some cases (if the current/active
bss entry appears in the list after one where the station has just
disassociated from) for EAPOL processing.
Fix this by checking the WLAN_STA_ASSOC flag before assuming the right
hapd context was found for the given station.
Signed-hostap: David Bird <dbird@powercloudsystems.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
This uses the recent cfg80211 changes to allow SAE authentication to be
implemented with the nl80211 driver interface.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
P2P includes two use cases where one of the devices is going to start a
group and likely change channels immediately after processing a frame.
This operation may be fast enough to make the device leave the current
channel before the peer has completed layer 2 retransmission of the
frame in case the ctrl::ack frame was lost. This can result in the peer
not getting TX status success notification.
For GO Negotiation Confirm frame, p2p_go_neg_conf_cb() has a workaround
that ignores the TX status failure and will continue with the group
formation with the assumption that the peer actually received the frame
even though we did not receive ctrl::ack. For Invitation Response frame
to re-invoke a persistent group, no such workaround is used in
p2p_invitation_resp_cb(). Consequently, TX status failure due to lost
ctrl::ack frame results in one of the peers not starting the group.
Increase the likelihood of layer 2 retransmission getting acknowledged
and ctrl::ack being received by waiting a short duration after having
processed the GO Negotiation Confirm and Invitation Response frames for
the re-invocation case. For the former, use 20 ms wait since this case
has been worked around in deployed devices. For the latter, use 50 ms
wait to get even higher likelihood of getting ctrl::ack through since
deployed devices (and the current wpa_supplicant implementation) do not
have a workaround to ignore TX status failure.
20 ms is long enough to include at least couple of retries and that
should increase likelihood of getting ctrl::ack through quite a bit. The
longer 50 ms wait is likely to include full set of layer 2 retries.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 458cb30191 broke LEAP since it
rejects EAP-Success packet that is used within LEAP and this frame does
not have a payload. Fix LEAP by relaxing the generic EAP packet
validation if LEAP has been negotiated.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, WPS Registrar allowed multiple wildcard PINs to be
configured. This can get confusing since these PINs get assigned to any
Enrollee that does not have a specific PIN and as such, cannot really be
used with different PIN values in reasonable ways. To avoid confusion
with multiple enabled PINs, invalidate any previously configured
wildcard PIN whenever adding a new one.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
While the existing code already addresses TLS Message Length validation
for both EAP-TLS peer and server side, this adds explicit checks and
rejection of invalid messages in the functions handling reassembly. This
does not change externally observable behavior in case of EAP server.
For EAP peer, this starts rejecting invalid messages instead of
addressing them by reallocating the buffer (i.e., ignoring TLS Message
Length in practice).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
EAP-TLS/PEAP/TTLS/FAST server implementation did not validate TLS
Message Length value properly and could end up trying to store more
information into the message buffer than the allocated size if the first
fragment is longer than the indicated size. This could result in hostapd
process terminating in wpabuf length validation. Fix this by rejecting
messages that have invalid TLS Message Length value.
This would affect cases that use the internal EAP authentication server
in hostapd either directly with IEEE 802.1X or when using hostapd as a
RADIUS authentication server and when receiving an incorrectly
constructed EAP-TLS message. Cases where hostapd uses an external
authentication are not affected.
Thanks to Timo Warns for finding and reporting this issue.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
This replaces the previously used bogus test data in SAE messages with
the first real field. The actual SAE authentication mechanism is still
missing and the Scaler, Element, and Confirm fields are not included.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Channel frequency for 60 GHz band do not fit into 'short int', as was
used. Expand it to 'int'
Signed-off-by: Vladimir Kondratiev <qca_vkondrat@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These values are used with WAPI and CCX and reserving the definitions
here reduces the number of merge conflicts with repositories that
include these functions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This introduces new AKM for SAE and FT-SAE and adds the initial parts
for going through the SAE Authentication frame exchange. The actual SAE
algorithm and new fields in Authentication frames are not yet included
in this commit and will be added separately. This version is able to
complete a dummy authentication with the correct authentication
algorithm and transaction values to allow cfg80211/mac80211 drivers to
be tested (all the missing parts can be handled with
hostapd/wpa_supplicant changes).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows hostapd_cli and wpa_cli all_sta command to be used to
display connected time (in seconds) of each station in AP mode.
Signed-hostap: Raja Mani <rmani@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 6b56cc2d97 added clearing of the
p2p->pending_action_state too early in this function. This should not
be done if we are going to silently ignore the frame due to dialog
token mismatch. Fix this by moving the code around to check the dialog
token first.
This issue resulted in PD Request retries getting stopped too early if
the peer is sending out an unexpected PD Response (e.g., because of it
being excessively slow with the response so that the response is
received only after the next TX attempt with a new dialog token).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Make Invitation process for re-invoking a persistent group behave
similarly to GO Negotiation as far as channel negotiation is concerned.
The Operating Channel value (if present) is used as a starting point if
the local device does not have a forced operating channel (e.g., due to
concurrent use). Channel lists from devices are then compared to check
that the selected channel is in the intersection. If not, channel is
selected based on GO Negotiation channel rules (best channel preferences
etc.). Invitation Request is rejected if no common channel can be
selected.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
As long as WLAN_STA_ASSOC_REQ_OK is set in sta->flags, Class 3 frames do
not trigger a disassoc/deauth. If it is still set even after the assoc
response tx has already failed, it may take somewhat longer for clients
to realize that the connection wasn't fully established.
Signed-hostap: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
This avoids extra latency caused by establishing an aggregation session
and makes the initial connection attempt more reliable
Signed-hostap: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
This patch fixes an issue where removing a WDS VLAN interface also
removed the main AP interface from the same bridge.
Signed-hostap: Felix Fietkau <nbd@openwrt.org>
This is a generic AES CCM implementation that can be used for other
purposes than just implementing CCMP, so it fits better in a separate
file in src/crypto.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Now that the internal AES implementation supports 256-bit keys, enable
use of the TLS cipher suites that use AES-256 regardless of which crypto
implementation is used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
AES uses the same 128-bit block size with 128, 192, 256 bit keys, so use
the fixed block size definition instead of trying to dynamically set the
block size based on key length. This fixes use of 192-bit and 256-bit
AES keys with crypto_cipher_*() API when using the internal AES
implementation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is otherwise identical to aes_gcm_ae() but does not use the
plain/crypt pointers since no data is encrypted.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds 192-bit and 256-bit key support to the internal AES
implementation and extends the AES-GCM functions to accept key length to
enable longer AES key use.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is a generic AES GCM and GMAC implementation that can be used for
other purposes than just implementing GCMP, so it fits better in a
separate file in src/crypto.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The conf doesn't contain any basic rates in some cases. Most notably,
when starting a P2P GO in 5 GHz. Use the iface rates which are
initialized in hostapd_prepare_rates() to the conf rates or set to
default values if no conf values exist. This fixes a bug introduced in
commit e5693c4775.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Commit e5693c4775 added a copy of the
determined basic rate set into struct hostapd_iface, but did not
actually copy the terminating -1 value. This could be problematic if
something were to actually try to use this list since would be no way to
know what is the last entry in the list. Fix this by copying the
terminating value.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This driver_op can now be used in station mode, too, to fetch
information about the connection with the AP, so allow this to be used
even if wpa_supplicant is built without AP mode support.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The group matching should be done by comparing the P2P Interface Address
(which the group_bssid here is) to the group's BSSID and not the group
ID (which uses P2P Device Address and would have also needed the SSID).
Though, it should be noted that this case cannot really happen since a
GO in an active group would never be invited to join another group in
its GO role (i.e., if it receives an Invitation Request, it will reply
in P2P Device role). As such, this fix does not really change any
observable behavior, but anyway, it is good to keep the implementation
here consistent with the Invitation Request case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When building the Invitation Request for WFD use cases, match the BSSID,
i.e., P2P Interface Address, of the group on the GO to avoid using
information from another group should the device be operating multiple
concurrent groups as GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use the anonymous_identity field to store EAP-SIM/AKA pseudonym identity
so that this can be maintained between EAP sessions (e.g., after
wpa_supplicant restart) even if fast re-authentication data was cleared.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The EAP-SIM/AKA code is already validating the prefix and the following
lookup would not find matches if the prefix is incorrect, so there is no
need for the extra checks here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If EAP-Response/Identity includes a known pseudonym or re-auth username,
skip the AKA/Identity exchange since we already know the permanent
username of the peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
RFC 4186, chapter 6.3.3 mandates that EAP-Failure is used only after
Client-Error and Notification messages. Convert the direct jumps to the
FAILURE state with a notification round before sending out EAP-Failure.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The AT_NONCE_S value needs to be used in AT_MAC calculation for
SIM/Re-authentication response even if re-authentication is rejected
with AT_COUNTER_TOO_SMALL.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
If the peer rejects re-authentication with AT_COUNTER_TOO_SMALL, fall
back to full authentication to allow the authentication session to be
completed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These fields are used only as the search key, so the value is already
known and does not need to be copied from the database.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Store permanent username (i.e., including prefix character) instead of
IMSI in the SQLite DB. Convert the string to a string since the EAP-AKA
prefix can start with zero. This cleans up the field names since the
value was already with the prefix included instead of just IMSI. In
addition, this explicitly removes some theoretical cases where the
different identity types could have been mixed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since the EAP-SIM/AKA identities are ASCII strings, there is no need to
use more complex way for storing and passing them. In addition, be more
strict about enforcing username (i.e., no realm part) to be used in the
EAP-SIM DB API. Similarly, require specific username type instead of any
of the types to be used as the key in the pseudonym and reauth
operations. This allows simpler lookup operations to be used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since we always request an identity in the request, the response
has to include AT_IDENTITY. This allows the AKA/Identity response
processing to be simplified a bit.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to use eap_sim_db_identity_known() here since a new
AKA/Identity message is built only if the identity in the previous
response was not recognized. The first round is always used to request
AT_ANY_ID_REQ to meet the RFC 4187 recommendation on EAP method specific
identity request.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since we always request an identity in the request, the response
has to include AT_IDENTITY. This allows the SIM/Start response
processing to be simplified a bit.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There is no need to use eap_sim_db_identity_known() here since a new
SIM/Start message is built only if the identity in the previous response
was not recognized. The first round will always request AT_ANY_ID_REQ to
meet the RFC 4186 recommendation on EAP method specific identity request
being used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The reauth_id prefix can be used to determine which AKA version is used,
so there is no need to store the aka_prime information in a separate
field.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If hostapd is built and configured to use SQLite database, store
EAP-SIM/AKA reauth data into the database to allow this to persist
over hostapd restarts.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows hostapd to use an SQLite database for storing EAP-SIM/AKA
pseudonyms over process restarts. CONFIG_SQLITE=y build option adds
support for this and the SQLite database file is specified in eap_sib_db
configuration parameter.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Try to share most of the cipher information like key and RSC lengths and
suite selector conversions, etc. in wpa_common.c to avoid having similar
code throughout the WPA implementation for handling cipher specific
behavior.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wpa_cli p2p_serv_disc_req command can now be used to request WSD
request to be sent to specified or all peers who support WSD.
format: wifi-display <list of roles> <list of subelements>
examples:
p2p_serv_disc_req 00:00:00:00:00:00 wifi-display [source] 2,3,4,5
p2p_serv_disc_req 02:01:02:03:04:05 wifi-display [pri-sink] 3
p2p_serv_disc_req 00:00:00:00:00:00 wifi-display [sec-source] 2
p2p_serv_disc_req 00:00:00:00:00:00 wifi-display [source+sink] 2,3,4,5
p2p_serv_disc_req 00:00:00:00:00:00 wifi-display [source][pri-sink] 2,3,4,5
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This commit adds control interface commands and internal storage of
Wi-Fi Display related configuration. In addition, WFD IE is now added
to various P2P frames, Probe Request/Response, and (Re)Association
Request/Response frames. WFD subelements from peers are stored in the
P2P peer table.
Following control interface commands are now available:
SET wifi_display <0/1>
GET wifi_display
WFD_SUBELEM_SET <subelem> [hexdump of length+body]
WFD_SUBELEM_GET <subelem>
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows both hostapd and wpa_supplicant to be used to derive and
configure keys for GCMP. This is quite similar to CCMP key
configuration, but a different cipher suite and somewhat different rules
are used in cipher selection. It should be noted that GCMP is not
included in default parameters at least for now, so explicit
pairwise/group configuration is needed to enable it. This may change in
the future to allow GCMP to be selected automatically in cases where
CCMP could have been used.
This commit does not included changes to WPS or P2P to allow GCMP to be
used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use the NL80211_IFACE_COMB_NUM_CHANNELS value > 1 as a trigger for
enabling support for P2P multichannel channel concurrency. This does not
handle all possible details of enforcing driver capabilities, but it is
a good first step for allowing nl80211 drivers to enable multichannel
concurrency.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new gas_request and gas_response_get commands can be used to request
arbitary GAS queries to be performed. These can be used with ANQP or
with other (including vendor specific) advertisement protocols.
gas_request <BSSID> <AdvProtoID> [Query]
gas_response_get <addr> <dialog token> [offset,length]
For example, ANQP query for Capability list in interactive wpa_cli
session:
> gas_request 02:00:00:00:01:00 00 000102000101
<3>GAS-RESPONSE-INFO addr=02:00:00:00:01:00 dialog_token=0
status_code=0 resp_len=32
> gas_response_get 02:00:00:00:01:00 00
01011c00010102010501070108010c01dddd0c00506f9a110200020304050607
> gas_response_get 02:00:00:00:01:00 00 0,10
01011c00010102010501
> gas_response_get 02:00:00:00:01:00 00 10,10
070108010c01dddd0c00
> gas_response_get 02:00:00:00:01:00 00 20,10
506f9a11020002030405
> gas_response_get 02:00:00:00:01:00 00 30,2
0607
It should be noted that the maximum length of the response buffer is
currently 4096 bytes which allows about 2000 bytes of the response data
to be fetched with a single gas_response_get command. If the response is
longer, it can be fetched in pieces as shown in the example above.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new vendor_elements parameter in hostapd.conf can be used to add new
vendor specific element(s) into Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Maintain state of WPS APs during iteration to find the correct AP for
WPS PIN operation when no specific BSSID is specified. This information
can be used for optimizing the order in which the APs are tried. This
commit is only adding the collection of the information and more
detailed debug information to make debug logs more helpful in figuring
out how the AP selection order could be improved.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If 4-way handshake fails due to likely PSK failure or if EAP
authentication fails, disable the network block temporarily. Use longer
duration if multiple consecutive failures are seen.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Replace the Venue Name specific data structure and parser with a
generic mechanism that can be used with other fields that use the
same format.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The anqp_3gpp_cell_net parameter can be used to configure hostapd
to advertise 3GPP Cellular Network ANQP information.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
These function pointers are going to be the same for each interface so
there is no need to keep them in struct hostapd_iface. Moving them to
struct hapd_interfaces makes it easier to add interfaces at run time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The driver_test.c data structures had been changed to use a separate
BSS structure, but the P2P commands were not using the new design.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 488f4a7108 configures a timer
before p2p_send_action(). This may result in the timer getting fired
earlier to the off channel transmission of the frame and thus another PD
request being retransmitted. This shall lead to the new PD request with
an incremented dialog token being transmitted. For the cases where the
later PD request might not be transmitted as the host driver is busy
transmitting the earlier frame, the received PD response could be
dropped for the dialog token mismatch. Remove the timer configuration to
avoid this behavior.
Signed-hostap: Sunil Dutt Undekari <duttus@codeaurora.org>
intended-for: hostap-1
Previously, all station mode scan operations were either skipped or
delayed while any P2P operation was in progress. To make concurrent
operations easier to use, reduce this limitation by allowing a scan
operation to be completed in the middle of a p2p_find. In addition,
allow station mode association to be completed. When the station mode
operation is run to its completion (scan results not acted on,
connection to an AP completed, connection failed), resume the p2p_find
operation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A new optional delay=<search delay in milliseconds> parameter can now be
used with p2p_find command to request an extra delay between search
iterations. This can be used, e.g., to make p2p_find friendlier to
concurrent operations by avoiding it from taking 100% of the radio
resources.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This EAP type uses a vendor specific expanded EAP header to encapsulate
EAP-TLS with a configuration where the EAP server does not authenticate
the EAP peer. In other words, this method includes only server
authentication. The peer is configured with only the ca_cert parameter
(similarly to other TLS-based EAP methods). This method can be used for
cases where the network provides free access to anyone, but use of RSN
with a securely derived unique PMK for each station is desired.
The expanded EAP header uses the hostapd/wpa_supplicant vendor
code 39068 and vendor type 1 to identify the UNAUTH-TLS method.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previous implementation was able to re-open the connection to an
external program (e.g., hlr_auc_gw) when needed, but required the
connection to be available during startup. Extend this to allow the
initial failure, so that hlr_auc_gw can be started after hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Explicitly validate seed_len to skip memset call with zero length of
copied data at the end of the buffer. This is not really needed, but it
makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers. This is identical to
the commit a9ea17491a but for the OpenSSL
version of the function.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit bfc62fe133 moved the code that
using crypto/random.h, but forgot to remove the inclusion of that header
file.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
All the TNC base64 operations are within tncs.c, so there is no point in
including base64.h into eap_server_tnc.c.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
All the other places processing EVENT_RX_MGMT events assume that the
event data is included, so not much point in verifying that here.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use an explicit pointer to the beginning of the buffer and a flag
to indicate whether that is to external data or not. This avoids
a branch whenever accessing the buffer and helps some static
analyzers to understand the wpabuf memory uses better.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the os_malloc() call for the User-Name value fails in EAP-TTLS
server, the inner MSCHAPv2 processing could have tried to dereference a
NULL pointer. Avoid this by handling this cleanly as an internal error
and reject the authentication attempt.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
Commit c9e08af24f removed the only user of
the special case MD5 use that would be allowed in FIPS mode in
tls_prf_sha1_md5(). Commit 271dbf1594
removed the file from the build, but left the implementation into the
repository. To clean things up even further, remove this functionality
completely since it is not expected to be needed for FIPS mode anymore.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows User-Name and Chargeable-User-Identity attributes to be
passed from Access-Accept into Accounting messages even when IEEE 802.1X
is not used.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
The mechanism to figure out key block size based on ssl->read_hash
does not seem to work with OpenSSL 1.0.1, so add an alternative
mechanism to figure out the NAC key size that seems to work at
least with the current OpenSSL 1.0.1 releases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
Some deployed authentication servers seem to be unable to handle the TLS
Session Ticket extension (they are supposed to ignore unrecognized TLS
extensions, but end up rejecting the ClientHello instead). As a
workaround, disable use of TLS Sesson Ticket extension for EAP-TLS,
EAP-PEAP, and EAP-TTLS (EAP-FAST uses session ticket, so any server that
supports EAP-FAST does not need this workaround).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
tls_disable_session_ticket=1 in phase1/phase2 can now be used to disable
use of TLS Session Ticket extension (which is enabled by default in
recent OpenSSL versions). This can be used to work around issues with
broken authentication servers that do not ignore unrecognized TLS
extensions properly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to implement workaround for authentication servers that
do not handle TLS extensions in ClientHello properly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The PKCS5_PBKDF2_HMAC_SHA1() function in OpenSSL 0.9.7 did not mark
the salt parameter const even though it was not modified. Hide the
compiler warning with a type cast when an old OpenSSL version is
used.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When CONFIG_FIPS=y is used, do not include MD5 in the build and disable
EAPOL-Key frames that use MD5 (WPA/TKIP and dynamic WEP with IEEE
802.1X).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Only allow the TLS library keying material exporter functionality to be
used for MSK derivation with TLS-based EAP methods to avoid exporting
internal TLS keys from the library.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Use SSL_export_keying_material() if possible, i.e., if OpenSSL is
version 1.0.1 or newer and if client random value is used first. This
allows MSK derivation with TLS-based EAP methods (apart from EAP-FAST)
without exporting the master key from OpenSSL.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, CONFIG_EAP_MSCHAPV2=y was assumed to be set for
CONFIG_EAP_TTLS=y. Avoid this dependency by making including the
MSCHAPv2 parts in EAP-TTLS conditionally.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In theory, the SHA1 operation may fail (e.g., if SHA1 becomes disallowed
in some security policies), so better check the return code from
challenge_hash().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Do not leave the tls_global context allocated if the global OpenSSL
initialization fails. This was possible in case of FIPS builds if
the FIPS mode cannot be initialized.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Increase GO config timeout if HT40 is used since it takes some time
to scan channels for coex purposes before the BSS can be started.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add optional "ht40" argument for p2p_group_add command to enable 40 MHz
in 5GHz band. This configures the secondary channel, when HT support is
enabled and if the HW supports 40 MHz channel width.
Signed-hostap: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com>
This function can be used as a wrapper for os_realloc(ptr, nmemb * size)
when a reallocation is used for an array. The main benefit over
os_realloc() is in having an extra check to catch integer overflows in
multiplication. This is similar to the os_zalloc() to os_calloc() move.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function can be used as a wrapper for os_zalloc(nmemb * size) when
an allocation is used for an array. The main benefit over os_zalloc() is
in having an extra check to catch integer overflows in multiplication.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Multiple memcmps of nonces were actually comparing only the first byte
instead of all 16 bytes. [Bug 462]
Signed-hostap: Eyal Shapira <eyal@wizery.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
There is no need to mandate admission control (ACM=1) by default, so
clear that flag in the case the configuration file does not specify
wmm_ac_{vo,vi}_acm value. This gets closer to the values mentioned
in the sample hostapd.conf file and reduces the need to specify WMM
parameters in the configuration file for most common use cases.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
p2p_set_timeout() calls in GO Neg Req/Resp TX callbacks used timeout of
100 ms which is the value given in the P2P specification for GO
Negotiation, but this was actually shorter than the
wait-for-offchannel-TX value (200 ms) used for the driver call. In
addition, it looks like some devices (e.g., Galaxy Nexus with JB image)
can take longer time to reply to GO Negotiation Response (somewhere
between 200 and 250 ms has been observed).
Increase the wait-for-GO-Neg-Resp timeout from 100 ms to 200 ms if GO
Negotiation Request frame was acknowledged (this matches with the
offchannel wait timeout that used previously). The no-ack case is left
at 100 ms since we use GO Negotiation Request frame also to discover
whether the peer is on its Listen channel.
Increase the wait-for-GO-Neg-Conf timeout from 100 ms to 250 ms (and
increase the offchannel wait timeout to matching 250 ms) as a workaround
for devices that take over 200 ms to reply to GO Negotiation Response.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The commit b5fd8b1833
"VHT: Do not allow use of TKIP with VHT" introduced
an off-by-one regression: a WPA/RSN 11n AP would no
longer accept stations to connect, instead it would
produce a bogus error message:
... Station tried to use TKIP with HT association.
Signed-hostapd: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
cur_pmksa was left to NULL during the initial association. This can
result in unexpected behavior, e.g., in expiring PMKSA cache entries
since the current entry is not locked in that case. Fix this by updated
cur_pmksa when adding the initial PMKSA entry during msg 1/4 processing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
If the PMKSA cache is full (i.e., 32 candidates have been seen in scan
results and have not yet expired) then any additional entries can
potentially evict the current/active entry (if it is the oldest entry),
which triggers a pointless local deauthentication. The supplicant
shouldn't replace the current/active entry if it is still valid, but
instead the oldest entry that is *not* the current/active one.
Signed-hostap: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
When using multiple VLANs, GKeyDoneStations counter is not updated
properly since wpa_auth_for_each_sta() call in wpa_group_setkeys() ends
up iterating through all STAs and not just the STAs of a specific
wpa_group (VLAN). Consequently, GTK rekeying gets initialized multiple
times if more than a single group state machine exists. Fix this by
iterating only through the STAs in the specific wpa_group.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
intended-for: hostap-1
CONFIG_VLAN_NETLINK=y build option can now be used to replace the
ioctl()-based interface for creating and removing VLAN interfaces
with netlink-based interface.
Signed-hostap: M. Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
Commit a11241fa11 removed the 802.11b rate
enabling/disabling code from wpa_driver_nl80211_set_mode() and while
doing that, removed the only place where drv->disabled_11b_rates was
set. Fix this by updating the flag in nl80211_disable_11b_rates(). In
addition, re-enable the 802.11b rates when changing to non-P2P mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Right now 11b rates are masked out while creating a P2P interface,
but this is always failing as the interface is down. Most drivers
allow to configure rates only when the interface is UP and running.
So let us disable 11b rates when interface type is changed into a
P2P type and it is UP and running.
Signed-hostap: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com>
These validation steps are already done in the EAP parsing code and in
the EAP methods, but the additional check is defensive programming and
can make the validation of received EAP messages more easier to
understand.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These checks would not really be needed since eapol_sm_rx_eapol()
validates the length fields. Anyway, these makes it more obvious to
anyone reviewing the code that there are no integer underflow issues in
processKey().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
These checks would not really be needed since radius_msg_parse()
validates the attribute header fields. Anyway, these makes it more
obvious to anyone reviewing the code that there are no integer underflow
issues in the functions processing RADIUS attributes.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This simplifies the implementation by using the buffer type to which the
returned data will be converted anyway. This avoids one memory
allocation for each processed RADIUS message.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Couple of functions did not verify that nla_put_nested() succeeded. Fix
these by checking the return value and handling error cases cleanly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new ssid2 parameter can be used as an alternative mechanism for
configuring SSID for hostapd. It uses the same formats that
wpa_supplicant uses in the configuration file for strings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of masking out non-ASCII characters with underscores, espace the
SSID data using rules compatible with printf.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This can be used to build ASCII strings from binary data that is
more likely to use ASCII (i.e., text format is more natural
option than hexdump, but there is possibility of some non-ASCII
characters).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When CONFIG_CTRL_IFACE=udp-remote is used, print user frendly PS in
wpa_cli. E.g.,
localhost/wlan0>
192.168.1.1/p2p-wlan-0-0>
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
wpa_cli can be used now as a client for remote access to ctrl_interface
of wpa_supplicant when UDP and remote options are used.
You can simply run:
wpa_cli -i <hostname>:[port]
wpa_cli -i <IP>:[port]
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
Add new option for ctrl iface: CONFIG_CTRL_IFACE=udp-remote. This
enables remote access to control interface via UDP port(s). This should
be used for testing purpose only since there is no authentication or
access control on the commands.
Signed-hostap: Janusz Dziedzic <janusz.dziedzic@tieto.com>
This bit is set in the code path that handles keys and certs from places
other than OpenSSL authentication engines. Setting this bit causes
authentication to fail when the server provides certificates that don't
match the client certificate authority.
Commit 05ab9712b9 added support for
fetching WPA PSK from an external RADIUS server and changed
hostapd_wpa_auth_get_psk() to always return the RADIUS supplied PSK (if
set) and ignore the prev_psk parameter for iteration. Fix this by
appending the RADIUS supplied PSK to the list iterated by
hostapd_get_psk and thus returning NULL when prev_psk == sta->psk
(RADIUS).
Signed-hostap: M. Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
This allows the password parameter for EAP methods to be fetched
from an external storage.
Following example can be used for developer testing:
ext_password_backend=test:pw1=password|pw2=testing
network={
key_mgmt=WPA-EAP
eap=TTLS
identity="user"
password=ext:pw1
ca_cert="ca.pem"
phase2="auth=PAP"
}
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This new mechanism can be used to make wpa_supplicant using external
storage (e.g., key store in the operating system) for passwords,
passphrases, and PSKs. This commit is only adding the framework part
needed to support this, i.e., no actual configuration parameter can
yet use this new mechanism. In addition, only a simple test backend
is added to allow developer testing of the functionality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the SA Query mechanism in hostapd to be used with drivers
that implement authentication and association MLME/SME.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
disable_dgaf=1 in hostapd.conf can now be used to disable downstream
group-addressed forwarding (DGAF). In this configuration, a unique
GTK (and IGTK) is provided to each STA in the BSS to make sure the
keys do not match and no STA can forge group-addressed frames.
An additional mechanism in the AP needs to be provided to handle some
group-addressed frames, e.g., by converting DHCP packets to unicast
IEEE 802.11 frames regardless of their destination IP address and by
providing Proxy ARP functionality.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Allow the user to configure an RSSI threshold in dBm below which the
nl80211 driver won't report scan results. Currently only supported
during scheduled (PNO) scans.
Signed-off-by: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com>
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 6b56cc2d97 added retries of
provision discovery request frames in IDLE state. However, it did not
make the p2p_find case behave consistently with the new limitied retry
behavior. This can result in way too many and frequent PD retries. Fix
this by extending the previous commit to address PD retries and maximum
retry limit consistently regardless of whether p2p_find is running.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
Commit 1b487b8b1e added CH_SWITCH
event for nl80211, but ended up using hostapd_hw_get_channel()
regardless of build configuration for driver interfaces. This
function is not always available, so make its use conditional
on NEED_AP_MLME.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit d9cc4646eb added
crypto_hash_{init,update,finish}() wrappers for OpenSSL, but it
assumed the current HMAC API in OpenSSL. This was changed in 0.9.9
to return error codes from the functions while older versions used
void functions. Add support for the older versions, too.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This patch adds a check of the return value of wpabuf_dup() in a large
Service Discovery Response.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
This updates the license notification to use only the BSD license. The
changes were acknowledged by email (Gunter Burchardt, tmisu@gmx.de,
Mon, 02 Jul 2012 17:54:28 +0200).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This updates the license notification to use only the BSD license. The
changes were acknowledged by email (Jouke Witteveen
<j.witteveen@gmail.com>, Mon, 2 Jul 2012 11:38:34 +0200).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This functionality could be shared for other commands, too, so move
it to a common function. In addition, implement the validation in a
bit more strict way to avoid accepting values like '-123' as a valid
PIN.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There are separate states for these, so we can't really get into this
situation unless somebody tries to do multiple things at the same
time. p2p_connect stops find and CONNECT state is used to probe the peer
on its Listen channel with GO Negotiation Request frames. Similarly,
p2p_invite() stops find and INVITE state is used to probe the peer on
its Listen channel with Invitation Request frames. The older mechanism
of using Search state functionality to find the peer can be removed.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This updates these files to use the license notification that uses only
the BSD license. The changes were acknowledged by email (Sam Leffler
<sam@errno.com>, Sat, 30 Jun 2012 07:57:53 -0700).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
At least some error paths (e.g., hitting the limit on hunt-and-peck
iterations) could have resulted in double-freeing of some memory
allocations. Avoid this by setting the pointers to NULL after they have
been freed instead of trying to free the data structure in a location
where some external references cannot be cleared. [Bug 453]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The previously used limit (10) is too small for practical purposes since
it can result in about 1 out of 1000 authentication attempts failing.
Increase the limit to 30 to avoid such issues. [Bug 453]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
os_random() may not be seeded properly, so use stronger mechanism for
generating the password id for NFC password tokens.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd ctrl_iface command WPS_NFC_TOKEN can now be used to
manage AP-as-Enrollee operations with NFC password token. WPS/NDEF
parameters to this command can be used to generate a new NFC password
token. enable/disable parameters can be used to enable/disable use of
NFC password token (instead of AP PIN) for external Registrars.
A preconfigured NFS password token can be used by providing its
parameters with new hostapd.conf fields wps_nfc_dev_pw_id,
wps_nfc_dh_pubkey, wps_nfc_dh_privkey, and wps_nfc_dev_pw. This use
will also depend on WPS_NFC_TOKEN enable/disable commands, i.e., the
configured NFS password token is disabled by default.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The AP PIN on wps_reg command can now be replaced with special value
"nfc-pw" to use device password from a NFC password token from the AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
WPS_ER_NFC_CONFIG_TOKEN command can now be used to build a NFC
configuration token based on AP Settings learnt with WPS_ER_LEARN
or set with WPS_ER_CONFIG.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface command WPS_NFC_TAG_READ can now be
used to process NFC tags read by external programs to initiate
wpa_supplicant to use NFC Configuration Token to create a new network.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The new hostapd ctrl_iface command WPS_NFC_CONFIG_TOKEN can now be used
to fetch payload for an NFC configuration token so that an external
program can be used to write this on an NFC tag.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This adds a cleaner mechanism for handling NFC Password Tokens in the
WPS Registrar. There could be more than one active NFC Password Token in
use and as such, a list of tokens needs to be maintained. The old
WPS_OOB interface is still using the old mechanism that supports only a
single active NFC Password Token.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hostapd ctrl_iface can now be used to deliver payload from read
operation of an NFC tag. This allows operations without having to have
low-level NFC code within hostapd. For now, the new wps_nfc_tag_read
command can be used with NFC password tokens for the case where the AP
has an NFC device that is used to read an NFC tag from the station
Enrollee.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of requiring low-level access to an NFC device and synchronous
operations, the new WPS_NFC_TOKEN and WPS_NFC ctrl_iface commands can be
used to build a NFC password token and initiate WPS protocol run using
that token (or pre-configured values) as separate commands. The
WPS_NFC_TOKEN output can be written to a NFC tag using an external
program, i.e., wpa_supplicant does not need to have low-level code for
NFC operations for this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The OOB Device Password is passed in as a hexdump of the real Device
Password (16..32 octets of arbitrary binary data). The hexdump needs to
be converted to binary form before passing it for WPS processing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, only the maximum length 32 octets for OOB device password
was accepted. Since the specification allows a shorter password to be
used with limited OOB mechanism (e.g., small NFC tag), we should accept
lengths 16..32.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The earlier WPS 2.0 changes did not increase the wpabuf size when
adding a new attribute to the NFC password token. This could result
in aborting the application on wpabuf overflow if NFC out-of-band
mechanism is used with WPS 2.0 enabled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
Some drivers may independently decide to switch channels. Handle this by
updating the hostapd and wpa_supplicant AP and GO configuration.
Signed-hostap: Thomas Pedersen <c_tpeder@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, the STA entry was removed only from the driver and the STA
entry within hostapd was just marked disassociated. However, this left
the WPA authenticator state machine with an entry and the session was
not terminated properly. In addition, the STA entry could have remaining
indefinitely if the STA did not reconnect after TKIP countermeasures.
Fix this by removing the STA entry from hostapd instead of just leaving
it disassociated.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In AP which supports WPSv2 with only virtual push button, when PBC is
called, the WSC IE should include Selected Registrar Configuration
Methods attribute with the bit of the physical push button not set.
Signed-hostap: Yoni Divinsky <yoni.divinsky@ti.com>
Without this, we can get into a tight loop because the
code in general doesn't add eloop exception handlers,
so socket reporting the POLLERR would never be read.
With this change, any socket with POLLERR or POLLHUP
asserted will be handled by the read logic.
Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
The control message received from the kernel needs some space, but
there's no need for the strange typing that breaks clang compilation.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Maintain a copy of Chargeable-User-Identity in the PMKSA cache to allow
it to be included in accounting messages even if full authentication was
not completed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Calling-Station-Id, Acct-Session-Id, and User-Name attributes in a
Disconnect-Request message can now be used to indicate which station is
to be disconnected.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
DAS will now validate Event-Timestamp value to be within an acceptable
time window (300 seconds by default; can be set using
radius_das_time_window parameter). In addition, Event-Timestamp can be
required in Disconnect-Request and CoA-Request messages with
radius_das_require_event_timestamp=1.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Currently, FullMAC Persistent GO can't use p2p_client_list because its
own hapd->p2p_group is NULL at ap_sta_set_authorized(). This patch
changes the processing to use sta->p2p_ie instead of
p2p_group_get_dev_addr() on FullMAC GO.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
The P2P Client Discoverability bit is reserved in most frames and its
value in the local P2P peer table should only be updated based on P2P
Group Info attribute from a GO. Fix this by avoiding changes to this
dev_capab bit based on other P2P frames. It would be more correct to
track this separately for each group in which the peer is a member, but
since we do not do that for the other group specific information either,
this can do for now.
It should be noted that prior to commit
18485b5469 wpa_supplicant set this bit in
all P2P frames. However, that commit changed this to match the
specification, i.e., the bit is not set in frames which are received
from P2P Device role. As such, this fix is needed to be able to figure
out that a peer supports client discoverability capability after that
commit.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
In the P2P specification v1.1, the P2P Client Discoverability bit is
described in Table 12 "Device Capability Bitmap definition". The table
says "Within a P2P Group Info attribute and a (Re)association request
frame the P2P Client Discoverability field shall be set to 1 when the
P2P Device supports P2P Client Discoverability, and is set to 0
otherwise. This field shall be reserved and set to 0 in all other frames
or uses.". To match with this, filter out P2P Client Discoverability bit
from frames where its use is reserved.
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
If the peer uses an unknown reauth id, it would still be possible to use
pseudonym instead of permanent id. Allow this by changing the
AT_PERMANENT_ID_REQ to AT_FULLAUTH_ID_REQ in case unknown reauth id is
used in EAP-Response/Identity.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
There is a race condition in GO Negotiation Request frame sending and
processing that may end up with both devices sending GO Negotiation
Response. This response frame was previously accepted even if a response
had already been sent. This could result in two GO Negotiation Confirm
frames being exchanged and consequently, with two separate GO
Negotiations completing concurrently. These negotiations could result in
getting mismatching parameters (e.g., both device could believe it was
the GO).
Fix this by ignoring GO Negotiation Response from the peer if twe have
already sent a GO Negotiation Response frame and we have the higher P2P
Device Address. This is similar to the rule used to determine whether to
reply to GO Negotiation Request frame when Request was already sent,
i.e., the same direction of GO Negotiation is maintained here to enforce
that only the negotiation initiated by the device with smaller P2P
Device Address is completed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
If both peers initiate GO Negotiation at about the same time, it is
possible for the GO Negotiation Request frame from the peer to be
received between the local attempt to send the GO Negotiation Request
and TX status event for that. This could result in both devices sending
GO Negotiation Response frames even though one of them should have
skipped this based which device uses a higher MAC address.
Resolve this race by incrementing go_neg_req_sent when p2p_send_action()
returns success instead of doing this from the TX status callback. If
the frame is not acknowledged, go_neg_req_sent is cleared in TX status
handler.
Signed-off-by: Neeraj Garg <neerajkg@broadcom.com>
Stop the connection attempt if GO Negotiation Confirm is not received
within 100 ms of the GO Negotiation Response getting acknowledged.
Previously, we would have continued trying to connect to the peer even
in this case which could result in confusing second GO Negotiation
Request frame and unnecessarily long wait before indicating failure.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The GO Negotiation Confirm frame doesn't need to be sent with a wait
since we don't expect a response to it.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Concurrent Operation bit was not set for GO even if the device
supports concurrent operations. Make sure the Device Capability
value is consistent with other P2P use cases by using the value
determined in p2p_init().
Signed-hostap: Masashi Honma <masashi.honma@gmail.com>
Send an "EAP" signal via the new DBus interface under various
conditions during EAP authentication:
- During method selection (ACK and NAK)
- During certificate verification
- While sending and receiving TLS alert messages
- EAP success and failure messages
This provides DBus callers a number of new tools:
- The ability to probe an AP for available EAP methods
(given an identity).
- The ability to identify why the remote certificate was
not verified.
- The ability to identify why the remote peer refused
a TLS connection.
Signed-hostap: Paul Stewart <pstew@chromium.org>
In certain cases like PBC session overlap it appears to be possible that
an interface is removed due to an event handled on it, this leads to
list corruption. Use safe iteration to prevent this issue.
Reported-by: Nirav Shah <nirav.j2.shah@intel.com>
Reported-by: Neeraj Kumar Garg <neerajkg@broadcom.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
When hostapd (or wpa_supplicant AP mode) limits the maximum number
of STA entries with a driver that implements SME, the driver needs
to be notified of the failed STA addition. Disassociate the STA if
the driver notifies of an association that would go beyond the
maximum number of STAs.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If WNM is enabled for the build (CONFIG_WNM=y), add BSS max idle period
information to the (Re)Association Response frame from the AP and parse
this information on the station. For SME-in-wpa_supplicant case, add a
timer to handle periodic transmission of the keep-alive frame. The
actual request for the driver to transmit a frame is not yet
implemented.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When sending an offchannel frame (mainly, P2P Invitation Request), the
wait_time parameter was hardcoded to 0 for drivers that implement AP
mode SME. This is not correct and can cause problems for drivers that
support offloading of off-channel operations with driver/firmware based
AP SME.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is a workaround for interoperability issues with some deployed P2P
implementations that require a Provision Discovery exchange to be used
before GO Negotiation. The new provdisc parameter for the p2p_connect
command can be used to request this behavior without having to run a
separate p2p_prov_disc command.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The nl80211 driver interface does not allow 128-bit WEP to be used
without a vendor specific cipher suite and no such suite is defined for
this purpose. Do not accept WEP key length 16 for nl80211 driver
interface forn ow. wext-interface can still try to use these for
backwards compatibility.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If the AP indicates support for Hotspot 2.0, show this in the
ctrl_iface commands for BSS table and status.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If PD Request includes P2P Group ID, verify that the specified
group matches with a group we are currently operating. If no match
is found, reject the PD Request for join-a-group case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This can be used with P2P management operations that need to verify
whether the local device is operating a specific group based on
P2P Group ID attribute from a peer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 349b213cc8 added a separate
callback prov_disc_fail() for indicating PD failures, but it left the
Provision Discovery Response handler to call both callbacks in case the
peer rejected the PD. Commit f65a239ba4
added ctrl_iface event for PD failures. This combination can result in
two ctrl_iface events in the peer rejecting a PD case. Clean this up by
only indicating the failure event.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Some drivers may accept the remain-on-channel command, but instead of
indicating start event for remain-on-channel, just indicate that the
operation has been canceled immediately. This could result in continuous
loop of search/listen states with very limited time to do anything else
in wpa_supplicant if the scan command is also completed quickly (e.g.,
if the driver is unable to scan other channels than the current
operating channel).
As a workaround, do not start the next step (search) in P2P device
discovery if this type of rejection of listen operation is detected.
This gives some more time for wpa_supplicant to handle whatever else
may be needed at to be done at the same time and reduces the amount
of CPU used in a loop that does not really work correctly from the
view point of being discoverable.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
This adds the basic DAS mechanism to enable hostapd to be configured
to request dynamic authorization requests (Disconnect-Request and
CoA-Request). This commit does not add actual processing of the
requests, i.e., this will only receive and authenticate the requests
and NAK them regardless of what operation is requested.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
New configuration parameters radius_auth_req_attr and
radius_acct_req_attr can now be used to add (or override) RADIUS
attributes in Access-Request and Accounting-Request packets.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
radius_request_cui=1 configuration parameter can now be used to
configure hostapd to request CUI from the RADIUS server by including
Chargeable-User-Identity attribute into Access-Request packets.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If Access-Accept packet includes the Chargeable-User-Identity attribute,
copy this attribute as-is into accounting messages.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
There was a technical change between the last IETF draft version
(draft-arkko-eap-aka-kdf-10) and RFC 5448 in the leading characters
used in the username (i.e., use unique characters for EAP-AKA' instead
of reusing the EAP-AKA ones). This commit updates EAP-AKA' server and
peer implementations to use the leading characters based on the final
RFC.
Note: This will make EAP-AKA' not interoperate between the earlier
draft version and the new version.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
Incorrect identity string could end up being used with EAP-AKA' when
the EAP client is using pseudonym. This code was supposed to use
sm->identity just like the EAP-AKA case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
The misplaced parenthesis caused Device ID matching to check only the
first octet of the P2P Device Address, i.e., we could have replied to
Probe Request frames that was searching for another device if any of
the last five octets of the address were different.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
An existing persistent group information can now be used to force GO
Negotiation to use the previously used SSID/passphrase from a persistent
group if we become a GO. This can be used as an alternative to inviting
a new P2P peer to join the group (i.e., use GO Negotiation with GO
intent 15 instead of starting an autonomous GO and using invitation),
e.g., in case a GO Negotiation Request is received from a peer while we
are not running as a GO. The persistent group to use for parameters is
indicated with persistent=<network id> parameter to p2p_connect.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commits 17bef1e97a and
ffe98dfb88 started using p2p_add_device()
with other frames than just Probe Response frames from scan results.
However, these changes did not take into account that the PD Request
and Invitation Request frames are normally received on the our own
Listen channel, not on the Listen channel of the peer. As such, these
frames must not be used to update Listen channel information for the
peer.
Fix this by letting p2p_add_device() know whether the results are from
scan results and if not, skip the peer table updates that are specific
to Probe Response frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
Add provisional discovery failure ctrl_iface event
(P2P-PROV-DISC-FAILURE) to indicate to the application layer in case of
PD failure.
Signed-off-by: Deepthi Gowri <deepthi@codeaurora.org>
Commit d9bdba9f86 was supposed to allow
p2p_listen to schedule new after scan operation only if a p2p_connect
operation was not pending. However, it used incorrect P2P_AFTER_SCAN_
value for this and did not actually prevent overriding of p2p_connect
and could have caused some p2p_listen operations to be skipped
unnecessarily.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
Unlike the unicast SD queries, the queries directed to all peers depend
on P2P_DEV_SD_INFO flag being cleared to allow the query to be sent to
a peer that has previously replied to any SD query.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, the timeout scheduled during the previous association was
used after reassociation if the STA entry had not yet been removed. The
next timeout does not need to happen that quickly, so reschedule it
during reassociation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This makes it easier to figure out what exactly was done with the
ap_handle_timer registration/cancellation based on a debug log.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The next ap_handle_timer action was already cleared when association
is handled with user space -based SME. However, this step was missing
from the driver callback for indicating new association. This could
result in the first ap_handle_timer timeout on the new association
removing the station unexpectedly. Fix this by resetting the timeout_next
in hostapd_notif_assoc().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
A station may move from EAP/WPS key_mgmt to PSK using re-association. In
practice, this can happen most likely with WPS when the station runs
through the provisioning step (EAP/WPS) followed by PSK authentication.
If a deauthentication event is missed from the station for whatever
reason, the EAPOL authenticator state machine could have been left
running.
This can result in various issues, including unexpected disconnection of
the station while both the 4-way handshake and EAPOL authenticator state
machines (EAP) are running at the same time when the supplicant is
trying to use PSK. Fix this by explicitly clearing EAPOL authenticator
state machine on (re)association if the new association does not use it.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
When starting an AP with HT40 on 2.4 GHz, limit the set of channels
to scan for based on the affected frequency range to speed up the
AP setup.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Mark the debug print excessive and print it only in case the entropy
collection is used since this function can get called pretty frequently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
OpenSSL wrapper was using the same certificate store for both Phase 1
and Phase 2 TLS exchange in case of EAP-PEAP/TLS, EAP-TTLS/TLS, and
EAP-FAST/TLS. This would be fine if the same CA certificates were used
in both phases, but does not work properly if different CA certificates
are used. Enforce full separation of TLS state between the phases by
using a separate TLS library context in EAP peer implementation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This was never really completed and is of not much use at this point,
so clean up the repository by removing the Symbian-specific changes.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This optional parameter to the BSS command can be used to select which
fields are included in the output to avoid having to parse through
unneeded information and to reduce the buffer size.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
There is no need to subscribe to event messages during deinit process,
so skip this to avoid unnecessary operations and to keep the debug logs
a bit cleaner.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This should keep us from getting into a state where we bounce large
numbers of stations all at once. Spreading out the bounce should cause
less stress on the network as the idle stations won't all be trying to
reconnect at once.
Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
wps_vendor_ext_m1 configuration parameter can now be used to add a
vendor specific attribute into the WPS M1 message, e.g., for
Windows Vertical Pairing.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was previously indicated as disassociation, but the P2P group
session ending case expect a deauthentication notification. Since the
cfg80211 disconnection event does not really indicate which frame was
used, the easiest approach for now seems to be to just indicate these
as deauthentication events.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use reason code 3 (Deauthenticated because sending STA is leaving)
instead of reason code 2 (Previous authentication ot valid) in the
Deauthentication frame sent at the time a BSS is terminated. This is
more accurate reason for the message and allows the stations to get
better understand on why they were disconnected. This can be useful
especially for P2P clients that can use this as a signal that the
P2P group session was ended per P2P specification section 3.2.9.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
On P2P group removal, the GO is deinitialized correctly (and the vif
mode is set back to sta in case of nl80211), but the P2P client mode
wasn't deinitialized, and the nl80211 vif stays in P2P client mode.
Add a new deinit_p2p_cli op (similar to deinit_ap), which currently only
sets the interface back to station mode.
Signed-hostap: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
Some applications require knowing about probe requests to identify
devices. This can be the case in AP mode to see the devices before they
connect, or even in P2P mode when operating as a P2P device to identify
non-P2P peers (P2P peers are identified via PeerFound signals).
As there are typically a lot of probe requests, require that an
interested application subscribes to this signal so the bus isn't always
flooded with these notifications. The notifications in DBus are then
unicast only to that application.
A small test script is also included.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The signal strength is currently never used as the only driver reporting
it is nl80211 which uses IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DB_ANTSIGNAL which is never
populated by the kernel. The kernel will (soon) populate
IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_DBM_ANTSIGNAL instead though, so use that.
Also, since it was never really populated, we can redefine the signal
field to be in dBm units only.
My next patch will also require knowing the signal strength of probe
requests throughout the code (where available), so add it to the
necessary APIs.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When hostapd is about to start an AP using HT40, it starts a scan to
check whether it is allowed or not. If OLBC is detected before the
scan has completed, it sets the beacons prematurely.
To fix this, instead of setting all beacons when OLBC is detected,
only update the ones that have already been started.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
ieee802_1x_encapsulate_radius() frees the RADIUS message if
radius_client_send() returns error. This could have resulted in use of
freed memory and double freeing of the RADIUS message if send() fails
since the message is also left in the retransmit list. Avoid this by not
returning error to the caller in such a case.
Signed-off-by: Alexander Couzens <lynxis@c-base.org>
Add the option (-T) to wpa_supplicant to log all debug messages into the
kernel tracing, allowing to aggregate kernel debugging with
wpa_supplicant debugging and recording all with trace-cmd.
Since tracing has relatively low overhead and can be filtered
afterwards, record all messages regardless of log level. However, it
will honor the -K option and not record key material by default.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The "BSS p2p_dev_addr=address" command uses p2p_parse_dev_addr() to
figure out the P2P Device Address of the GO from scan results. This used
to work only if the P2P IE was received from Probe Response frames since
only those include the P2P Device Info attribute. Make this work with
Beacon frames, too, by using P2P Device ID attribute if the P2P Device
Info attribute is not present.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A network block specific background scan period can now be configured
for drivers that implement internal background scan mechanism for
roaming and BSS selection.
Signed-hostap: Bala Shanmugam <bkamatch@qca.qualcomm.com>
Implement wps_cancel for hostapd similarly to how it was already
supported in wpa_supplicant AP mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
p2p_pref_chan configuration parameter can now be used to set the
list of preferred channel for P2P GO Negotiation. This will be used
in the priority order if the peer does not support the channel we
are trying to use as the GO (configured operating channel or the
best 2.4 GHz/5 GHz channel) for the case where a forced channel is
not used.
p2p_pref_chan=<op class:channel>,...
For example:
p2p_pref_chan=81:1,81:2,81:3,81:4,81:5,81:6
This would configure 2.4 GHz channels 1-6 as the preferred ones with
channel 1 the most preferred option.
These configuration parameters can be set in wpa_supplicant.conf and
dynamically updated with "wpa_cli set <param> <value>".
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When drivers advertise their capability to free up inactive
stations based on ap_max_inactivity, send the inactivity period
timeout to driver in NL80211_ATTR_INACTIVITY_TIMEOUT. This
introduces a WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS (WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_INACTIVITY_TIMER)
so that the inactivity period will be sent only when this capability
bit is set.
Signed-hostap: Vasanthakumar Thiagarajan <vthiagar@qca.qualcomm.com>
When the driver (or firmware) implements AP mode SME, the use of raw
management frame TX functions is not working properly at the moment. As
an initial step, convert these AP mode operations to use
NL80211_CMD_DEL_STATION and do not claim that driver provides TX status
for deauth/disassoc frames. While this does not address all use cases
(e.g., reason code is not specified in the command), this fixes number
of issues where the station does not get disconnected properly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 30680e9332 changed the length
of the implicit challenge result to match with the exact length used
in TTLS. However, it failed to update the peer_challenge generation
to use a separate random value. Previously, this was generated as
part of the implicit challenge, but more correct way would have been
to generate a random value for it separately. Do this now to fix the
read after the allocated buffer (16 bytes after the implicit
challenge).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
This DO has a maximum length of 127 bytes (TS 102 221), so better use
large enough buffer when reading the record.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Previously, this provisioning info was cleared using the P2P Interface
Address of the GO as the key. That did not always work in the case the
where we joined an already running group. This could result in the next
connection to that same GO skipping provision discovery. Fix this by
finding the peer entry based on its P2P Device Address instead of the
P2P Interface Address which may not always be set.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
intended-for: hostap-1
If a wildcard PIN is used on any of the radios that hostapd is
controlling, invalidate the matching PIN on all the other radios
to avoid multiple uses of the same PIN.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Use Device Password ID in WSC IE of Probe Request and Probe Response
frames to advertise immediate availability of WPS credentials per P2P
specification sections 3.1.2.1.1 (Listen State), 3.1.2.1.2 (Scan Phase),
and 3.1.2.1.3 (Find Phase).
For now, the Device Password ID is set only for the case where we are
active GO Negotiation with a specific peer. In practice, this means that
the Probe Response frames during pending GO Negotiation (whenever in
Listen state) indicate availability of the credential.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
p2p_flush did not explicit stop all P2P operations, i.e., the exact
behavior depended on the P2P module state at the time the p2p_flush
command was issued. Make this more consistent by explicitly calling
p2p_stop_find() from p2p_flush().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
If Listen state was in progress on another channel when a request to
send an Action frame (e.g., Provision Discovery Request or Invitation
Request to a peer on the peer's Listen channel that is different from
our Listenc hannel) is issued, wpa_supplicant tried to use concurrent
remain-on-channel operations. While some drivers can handle this
cleanly, there are drivers that don't and wpa_supplicant is not expected
to request concurrent remain-on-channel operations.
Fix this by cancelling the ongoing remain-on-channel with stop_listen
prior to sending the Action frame on another channel. If a P2P search
was in progress, it will be continued after the timeout on the new
operation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The new venue_name configuration parameter can now be used to configure
the ANQP Venue Name values that stations can request through GAS.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds GAS/ANQP implementation into hostapd. This commit brings in
the basic GAS/ANQP functionality, but only the ANQP Capability List
element is supported.
For testing purposes, hostapd control interface SET command can be used
to set the gas_frag_limit parameter dynamically.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
New global configuration parameters pcsc_reader and pcsc_pin can now be
used to initialize PC/SC reader context at start of wpa_supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Definition of ANonce selection in IEEE Std 802.11i-2004 is somewhat
ambiguous. The Authenticator state machine uses a counter that is
incremented by one for each 4-way handshake. However, the security
analysis of 4-way handshake points out that unpredictable nonces help in
preventing precomputation attacks. Instead of the state machine
definition, use an unpredictable nonce value here to provide stronger
protection against potential precomputation attacks.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Move disassociate and deauthenticate commands to ctrl_iface_ap.c, so
that they ares accessible for wpa_supplicant AP mode and wpa_cli (with
CONFIG_AP option enabled).
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Remove unnecessary second copy of the URL and too long memory
allocation. In addition, avoid use of strcpy() to keep static analyzers
happier.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It looks like a RTM_NEWLINK event claiming the interface to be UP is
delivered just before removing an interface after having first indicated
that the interface was going down/removed. Ignore this event if the
interface is not present anymore at the moment the event is processed.
This fixes issues where an interface that was re-added after being
removed did not get reconfigured properly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
It looks like a RTM_NEWLINK event claiming the interface to be UP is
delivered just before removing an interface after having first indicated
that the interface was going down/removed. Ignore this event if the
interface is not present anymore at the moment the event is processed.
This fixes issues where an interface that was re-added after being
removed did not get reconfigured properly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
AT_NEXT_PSEUDONYM is supposed to be included only in the Challenge
messages, not in the Re-authentication messages. This attribute was
incorrectly included in the Re-authentication messages and could have
been used to update the pseudonym state on the server without the peer
updating its state.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
Add support to send Action frames to the driver.
Add support for TSPEC req and adding STA node to the driver.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"wpa_cli set radio_disabled 1/0" can be used to disable/enable
radio to simulate out-of-radio-range condition in a testbed
device.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit d9a38716cc did this for
hostapd_eapol_tx_status() but missed the older hostapd_tx_status()
path. Address that case, too.
The TX status event may be received after a station has been
disassociated in cases where the disassociation is following a
transmission of a Data frame. Ignore such events if the STA is not
associated at the moment the event is being processed. This avoids
confusing debug entries and rescheduling of the EAPOL TX timeouts for
STAs that are still in the STA table, but are not really in active EAPOL
session.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
The SetSelectedRegistrar timeout was registered for each registrar
instance, but the only context pointer (struct subscription *) was
shared with each registrar which resulted in the timeout getting
cancelled for some of the registrar instances before the selected
registrar (ER) information was cleared.
In addition, when an ER unsubscribed from receiving events, the
selected registrar information got cleared only from a single
registrar.
Fix these issues by registering a pointer to the registrar
instance in the timeout and by iterating over all UPnP interfaces
when removing a subscription.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
eloop_sock_table_add_sock() needs to fail if pollfd array allocation
fails instead of returning success and leaving behind no buffer.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In IBSS RSN cfg80211/mac80211 now waits for userspace to authorize new
stations. This patch makes wpa_supplicant notify the driver when a
station can be considered authorized.
Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org>
When using more than around 200 virtual stations, we start hitting the
max number of file descriptors supported by select(). This patch adds
support for poll(), which has no hard upper limit.
Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Remove the GPL notification text from files that were initially
contributed by Atheros Communications or Qualcomm Atheros.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Remove the GPL notification text from EAP-pwd implementation per
approval from Dan Harkins who contributed these files.
(email from Dan Harkins <dharkins@lounge.org> dated
Wed, 4 Jan 2012 16:25:48 -0800)
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
In case of !defined(IEEE8021X_EAPOL) the definition of the stub
pmksa_cache_get() in rsn_supp/pmksa_cache.h is not correct. This patch
adds the missing argument to the function definition to fix a
regression from commit 96efeeb66b.
Signed-hostap: Antonio Quartulli <ordex@autistici.org>
Search (p2p_scan) could already have been started at the point
remain-on-channel end event is being processed, e.g., if an Action frame
TX is reported immediately aftet the end of an earlier remain-on-channel
operation and the response frame is sent using an offchannel operation
while p2p_find is still in progress. Avoid trying to re-run p2p_scan
while the previous one is still running.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 39185dfa54 changed the p2p_scan()
callback to return 1 in some cases, but forgot to change this p2p_scan()
call to handle that properly. Fix this by processing any non-zero value
as an error. This regression could leave the P2P module in state where
it believed a P2P scan was still running and refused to start some
operations until that scan gets completed (which would never happen
since it was not really started).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Previously, PINs that are added with a wildcard UUID were allowed to
be used only by a single Enrollee. However, there may be more than one
Enrollee trying to connect when an AP indicates that active Registrar
is present. As a minimal workaround, allow two Enrollees to try to use
the wildcard PIN. More complete extension could use timeout and allow
larger set of Enrollees to try to connect (while still keeping in mind
PIN disabling requirement after 10 failed attempts).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
"BSS p2p_dev_addr=<P2P Device Address>" can now be used to fetch a
specific BSS entry based on the P2P Device Address of the GO to avoid
having to iterate through the full BSS table when an external program
needs to figure out whether a specific peer is currently operating as
a GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When the GO negotiation peer is assigned, the state also cannot be IDLE,
SEARCH, or LISTEN_ONLY.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When looking for PMKSA cache entries to use with a new association, only
accept entries created with the same network block that was used to
create the cache entry.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This fixes a corner case where a STA that has PMKSA cache entry (or
valid FT keys) could try to use full EAPOL/EAP authentication and fail.
If the STA will then try to use the still valid PMKSA cache entry (or
FT) before the STA entry has been cleared, authFail could have been left
to TRUE. That will make EAPOL authenticator PAE state machine enter HELD
state even though authSuccess was already forced to TRUE. This results
in the STA getting disconnected even though it should be allowed to
continue with 4-way handshake. While this is unlikely to happen in
practice, it is better to get this fixed by clearing authFail when
setting authSuccess.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
The TX status event may be received after a stations has been
disassociated in cases where the disassociation is following a
transmission of a Data frame. Ignore such events if the STA is not
associated at the moment the event is being processed. This avoids
confusing debug entries and rescheduling of the EAPOL TX timeouts for
STAs that are still in the STA table, but are not really in active EAPOL
session.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
intended-for: hostap-1
While the exponential increase in the lockout period provides an
efficient mitigation mechanism against brute force attacks, this
additional trigger to enter indefinite lockout period (cleared by
restarting hostapd) will limit attacks even further by giving maximum of
10 attempts (without authorized user action) even in a very long term
attack.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This allows HT capabilities overrides on kernels that
support these features.
MCS Rates can be disabled to force to slower speeds when using HT.
Rates cannot be forced higher.
HT can be disabled, forcing an 802.11a/b/g/n station to act like
an 802.11a/b/g station.
HT40 can be disabled.
MAX A-MSDU can be disabled.
A-MPDU Factor and A-MPDU Density can be modified.
Please note that these are suggestions to the kernel. Only mac80211
drivers will work at all. The A-MPDU Factor can only be decreased and
the A-MPDU Density can only be increased currently.
Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
When there is not enough entropy and there are two station associating
at the same time, one of the stations will be rejected, but during
that rejection, the "reject_4way_hs_for_entropy" flag gets cleared. This
may allow the second station to avoid rejection and complete a 4-Way
Handshake with a GTK that will be cleared as soon as more entropy is
available and another station connects.
This reworks the logic to ban all 4-way handshakes until enough entropy
is available.
Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr>
In multiple BSSes scenario for the drivers that do not use
monitor interface and do not implement AP SME, RX MGMT
frame subscription happens only for the default bss (first_bss).
Subscribe for RX MGMT frames for such BSSes.
Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
Commit e4fb216769 moved frequency
storage from driver struct to bss struct and is assigned in
wpa_driver_nl80211_set_freq. As this wpa_driver_nl80211_set_freq is
triggered only on the first_bss, bss->freq for other BSSes is never
being set to the correct value. This sends MLME frames on frequency zero
(initialized value of freq) for BSSes other than the first.
To fix this derive frequency value from first_bss.
Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
This patch allows to log hexdumps into syslog.
This is useful when testing, as syslog's network logging
helps to collect debug outputs from several machines.
Signed-hostapd: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr>
The pseudonym identity should use a realm in environments where a realm is
used. Thus, the realm of the permanent identity is added to the pseudonym
username sent by the server.
Signed-hostap: Simon Baatz <gmbnomis@gmail.com>
The pseudonym identity should use a realm in environments where a realm is
used. Thus, the realm of the permanent identity is added to the pseudonym
username sent by the server.
Signed-hostap: Simon Baatz <gmbnomis@gmail.com>
When the "bssid=" option is set for an IBSS network and ap_scan = 2,
ask the driver to fix this BSSID, if possible.
Previously, any "bssid=" option were ignored in IBSS mode when ap_scan=2.
Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <cavallar@lri.fr>
It looks like Windows 7 WPS implementation does not like multiple
Authentication/Encryption Type bits to be set in M7 AP Settings
attributes, i.e., it refused to add a network profile if the AP
was configured for WPA/WPA2 mixed mode and AP PIN was used to
enroll the network.
Leave only a single bit set in the Authentication/Encryption Type
attributes in M7 when the AP is acting as an Enrollee to avoid this
issue.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
A P2P Action frame may need to be sent on another channel than the GO's
operating channel. This information was lost in
wpa_driver_nl80211_send_action() in the case the interface was in AP
mode. Pass the frequence and related parameters to send_mlme mechanism
to allow the correct frequence to be used with the send frame command in
AP (P2P GO) mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Number of places in hostapd use ap_sta_disconnect() instead of
ap_sta_disassociate() or ap_sta_deauthenticate(). There are some
differences between these functions, e.g., in the area how quickly
the EAPOL state machines get deinitialized. This can result in
somewhat unexpected events since the EAPOL/WPA authenticator
state machines could remain running after deauthentication.
Address this by forcing EAPOL/WPA authenticator state machines
to disabled state whenever ap_sta_disconnect() is called instead
of waiting for the deauthentication callback or other timeout
to clear the STA.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Even though we may not update P2P peer entry while connected to the
peer as a P2P client, we should not be expiring a P2P peer entry while
that peer is the GO in a group where we are connected as a P2P client.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Even though we may not receive a Probe Response from the peer during
the connection, we should not be expiring a P2P peer entry while that
peer is connected to a group where we are the GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The cookie value needs to be fetched in GO mode, too, to be able to
indicate TX status callbacks with drivers that handle AP mode SME
functionality internally. This fixes issues with client discoverability
where TX status callback for GO Discoverability Request is needed to
trigger the GO to send Device Discoverability Response.
Some SIM cards do not include MNC length with in EF_AD. Try to figure
out the MNC length based on the MCC/MNC values in the beginning of the
IMSI. This covers a prepaid Elisa/Kolumbus card that would have ended
up using incorrect MNC length based on the 3-digit default.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The temporary IMSI buffer can be used for this without needing the
extra memory allocation. In addition, the implementation is easier
to understand when the extra identity prefix value for EAP-SIM/AKA
is not included while fetching MCC/MNC from the IMSI.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The EF-AD (administrative data) file may contain information about the
length of the MNC (2 or 3 digits) in the IMSI. This can be used to
construct the realm according to 3GPP TS 23.003 during EAP-SIM or
EAP-AKA authentication.
Signed-hostap: Simon Baatz <gmbnomis@gmail.com>
This patch notifies the upper framework that an on-going discovery has
been stopped. This is useful in cases where a p2p_find with a timeout
value initiated by the upper framework has been finished or when the
framework initiated "p2p_find" is stopped by a "p2p_connect".
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Some deployed station implementations seem to send msg 4/4 with
incorrect type value in WPA2 mode. Add a workaround to ignore that issue
so that such stations can interoperate with hostapd authenticator. The
validation checks were added in commit
f8e96eb6fd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The Device ID attribute was already used in Listen state, but it was
ignored in GO role. Verify that there is a match with Device ID in
GO rule, too, before replying to the Probe Request frame.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
dev_id=<P2P Device Addr> can now be specified as an argument to
p2p_find to request P2P find for a specific P2P device.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some supplicant implementations (e.g., Windows XP WZC) update SNonce for
each EAPOL-Key 2/4. This breaks the workaround on accepting any of the
pending requests, so allow the SNonce to be updated even if we have
already sent out EAPOL-Key 3/4.
While the issue was made less likely to occur when the retransmit
timeout for the initial EAPOL-Key msg 1/4 was increased to 1000 ms,
this fixes the problem even if that timeout is not long enough.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Now that we can use driver_nl80211.c with non-mac80211 drivers that
implement SME/MLME internally, we may not get inactivity time from the
driver. If that is the case, we need to skip disconnection based on
maximum inactivity timeout. This fixes some unexpected disconnection
cases with ath6kl in AP mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
The deauthentication and disassociation events from nl80211 were being
processed identically regardless of whether the frame was generated by
the local STA or the AP. This resulted in fast reconnection mechanism
getting triggered even in the case where the disconnection was detected
locally (e.g., due to beacon loss) while this was supposed to happen
only in the case where the AP is sending an explicit Deauthentication
or Disassociation frame with a specific reason code.
Fix this by adding a new deauth/disassoc event variable to indicate
whether the event was generated locally.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IEEE Std 802.1X-2004 does not clear authWhile and heldWhile in this
case, but doing so allows the timer tick to be stopped more quickly when
the port is not enabled. Since these variables are used only within HELD
and RECEIVE states, clearing them on initialization does not change
actual state machine behavior. This reduces some unnecessary operations
in port disabled state and cleans up the wpa_supplicant debug log after
disconnection.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Since wps_registrar_pbc_timeout is called to stop PBC, previously
registered wps_registrar_pbc_timeout must be canceled when canceling
the WPS operation.
Signed-off-by: Spencer Chang <jungwalk@gmail.com>
The offchanok parameter is hardcoded to one in number of paths and that
added NL80211_ATTR_OFFCHANNEL_TX_OK attribute to NL80211_CMD_FRAME
unconditional. cfg80211 rejects this with EINVAL if the driver does not
indicate support for offchannel TX. Fix this by not requesting
offchannel TX depending on driver capabilities. Remain-on-channel
operation was used for those cases anyway, so the additional attribute
was not really needed for these in the first place.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When nl80211_setup_ap() has enabled Probe Request reporting, this must
not be disabled when P2P Listen state is stopped to avoid breaking AP
mode operations. This could happen, e.g., if a Probe Request frame was
received from a P2P device that the we are trying to invite to our group
(i.e., when operating in GO role). p2p_probe_req_rx() calls
p2p_invite_start() in this case and that ends up calling
p2p->cfg->stop_listen() which calls probe_req_report() driver op.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
hostapd uses the poll method to check if the station is alive
after the station has been inactive for ap_max_inactivity seconds.
Make the poll mechanism configurable so that user can choose to
disconnect idle clients.
This can be especially useful when some devices/firmwares have
restrictions on the number of clients that can connect to the AP
and that limit is smaller than the total number of stations trying
to use the AP.
Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
Signed-off-by: Nishant Sarmukadam <nishants@marvell.com>
The 100 ms timeout on retransmitting group key message can be too short
for stations that are in power save mode or if there is a large number
of association stations. While the retransmission of the EAPOL-Key frame
should allow this to be recovered from, it is useful to avoid
unnecessary frames to save soem CPU and power.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Drivers that use device SME in AP mode may still need to be
subscribed for Action frame RX when monitor interface is not used.
This fixes number of P2P GO operations with ath6kl.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Poll command may be enough for mac80211 to figure out whether monitor
interface is to be used, but this change did not take into account
non-mac80211 drivers that support AP mode without monitor interface.
For example, ath6kl needs to get use_monitor disabled.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Add a new persistent group network block field, p2p_client_list, to
maintain a list of P2P Clients that have connected to a persistent
group. This allows GO of a persistent group to figure out more easily
whether re-invocation of a persistent group can be used with a specific
peer device.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The P2P module provides access to public peer data in struct
p2p_peer_info. Use this to build the P2P_PEER information in
ctrl_iface.c instead of providing such text format data from the P2P
module.
The internal data that was previously built in p2p_get_peer_info() as
part of the text format peer data is now available through a separate
p2p_get_peer_info_txt() function. This is still included in P2P_PEER
output to maintain backwards compatibility with external programs that
could have started to use this. However, it should be noted that this
data is not really supposed to be used for anything else apart from
debugging purposes and its format is subject to change.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
p2p_get_peer_info() was used in multiple places just to check whether a
specific peer is known. This was not the designed use for the function,
so introduce a simpler function for that purpose to make it obvious that
the p2p_get_peer_info() function is actually used only in ctrl_iface.c.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If p2p_listen is issued during a p2p_scan, a pending after-scan operation
is scheduled. However, since there is support for only a single pending
operation, this was able to override a previously scheduled pending
connect command. This can break some command sequences, so give higher
priority to pending connect operation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Android ICS system/core/libnl_2 has very limited genl_ctrl_resolve()
implementation that cannot handle names other than nlctrl. Work
around that by implementing more complete genl_ctrl_resolve()
functionality within driver_nl80211.c for Android builds.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This event can be very frequent in AP mode when Beacon frames from
neighboring BSSes are delivered to user space. Drop the debug
message priority from DEBUG to EXCESSIVE for Beacon frames.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
I needed this patch to compile against the latest
libnl code. I added this to my config file:
CONFIG_LIBNL32=y
Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
When waiting for go_neg frame from the peer in WAIT_PEER_CONNECT state,
I have observed that sometimes it takes 20 to 30 secs for successful GO
negotiation. I also found out that it is because of 1 second idle time,
in WAIT_PEER_CONNECT state. While it is good to have 1 second idle time
[for doing power-save or doing some other legacy STA Scan or some other
useful stuff], this makes GO Negotiation process slow.
We wait for 1 second idle and then listen for a random time between
100(min)-300(max) ms. Assume P1 is in WAIT_PEER_CONNECT state and P2 is
the one which is now to send go_neg frame. If P2 sends GO Negotiation
frame just at the boundary of 300 ms of P1 and assume that P2 takes
close to 600-800 ms for one iteration of sending go_neg request (one
iteration is GO Negotiation Request frame time + dwell time +
listen_time), P2 needs to transmit at least 16-18 Action frames for
hitting the listen time of P1.
Following patch reduces the idle time to 500 ms. Alternatively we can
increase the listen time interval to 500 ms just for WAIT_PEER_CONNECT
state.
Provision discovery from a known peer should actually check for
dev->flags & P2P_DEV_PROBE_REQ_ONLY. This is creating an issue of
updating the listen frequency of peer with the PD request frame
frequency. PD request frame will be sent by the peer on our local listen
frequency. This patch fixes that error. Suggested check has already been
implemented in the invitation req receive path.
The Provision Discovery Request needs to be sent on the operating
channel of the GO and as such, the frequency from the BSS table
(scan results) need to override the frequency in the P2P peer
table that could be based on the Listen channel of the GO.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The GO negotiation response is very cryptic at the moment. For a success
message we only know on which interface the negotiation succeeded, not
which peer. For a failure we know the interface also and a status code
(number).
It will be very useful for clients to know upon receipt of such a message
which peer the negotiation occurred with.
Now that the peer information is available and the API is changed
already, the function composing the D-Bus message might as well include
all GO negotiation information. This is done with a dict to make things
easier on clients if this result information changes down the line.
Signed-hostap: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When the station is connected to P2P GO after calling p2p_find command
the device sees itself. It is related to lack of filtering itself from
clients connected to P2P GO.
Step by step:
1. dev1: p2p_group_add
2. dev2: p2p_connect <MAC1> pbc join
3. dev1: wps_pbc
4. dev2: p2p_find
Skip P2P client information for our own device from a GO with which
we are connected.
It looks like some USIM cards respond with 0x67 (Wrong length) instead
of 0x6c to 00 b2 01 04 ff. This was getting rejected in
scard_get_record_len(). ETSI TS 102 221 is not very clear on this
detail, but it looks fine to accept the 0x67 error value, too, to learn
the record length.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Return 1/0 instead 0/-1 to indicate valid/invalid element so that
the if statement makes more sense with !wmm_valid().
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This updates a previous patch did more or less the same thing by
providing the qosinfo as a single variable to the driver wrappers.
Signed-hostap: Jason Young <jason.young@dspg.com>
Add uapsd_queues and max_sp fields to sta_info struct,
and pass them to the sta_add callback.
These values are determined by the WMM IE in the (Re)Association Request.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Check whether the driver advertises support for U-APSD
in AP mode, and evaluate wmm_uapsd only in this case.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
The wpa_hexdump_ascii() call did not get converted properly and this
was missed becaused of it getting defined out from the build. Anyway,
this better use the correct variable names should that debug print
ever be enabled for Android.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
A Pending Provision Discovery Request was sent in SEARCH phase after a
previous provision discovery timeout. Fix this by resetting the config
method of P2P device in the pending PD reset function. This avoids the
sending of a pending Provision Discovery Request during the next P2P
search.
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel.Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@intel.com>
Some debug messages used incorrect name for Provision Discovery.
Replace "Provisioning Discovery" with "Provision Discovery".
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It is safer to assume that the driver could be using NoA and reject
any Presence Request unless we are sure that noa NoA is in use.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows per-device PSK to be configured for WPA-Personal using a
RADIUS authentication server. This uses RADIUS-based MAC address ACL
(macaddr_acl=2), i.e., Access-Request uses the MAC address of the
station as the User-Name and User-Password. The WPA passphrase is
returned in Tunnel-Password attribute in Access-Accept. This
functionality can be enabled with the new hostapd.conf parameter,
wpa_psk_radius.
Signed-hostap: Michael Braun <michael-dev@fami-braun.de>
WPS overlap detection can detect false overlap if a P2P peer
changes UUID while authentication is ongoing. Changing UUID
is of course wrong but this is what some popular devices do
so we need to work around it in order to keep compatibility
with these devices. There already is a mechanism in WPS
registrar to skip overlap detection if P2P addresses of two
sessions match but it wasn't really triggered because the
address wasn't filled in in the caller function.
Let's fill in this address and also clean up WPS PBC sessions
on WSC process completion if UUID was changed.
Signed-hostap: Vitaly Wool<vitalywool@gmail.com>
Pass the raw Probe Response template to kernel via netlink using the
set_ap() driver callback. The data is sent as one of the Beacon
attributes.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Configure a Probe Response template for drivers that support it. The
template is updated when the Beacon template is updated.
The Probe Response template is propagated to the driver via the set_ap()
callback.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
This is needed for Probe Response template, so move the code into a
separate function that can be shared.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Translate nl80211 flags to wpa_supplicant flags for Probe Response
offload support. The existence of the nl80211 PROBE_RESP_OFFLOAD_SUPPORT
attribute means Probe Response offload is supported. The value of the
attribute is a bitmap of supported protocols.
Signed-hostap: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
This previously helped when debugging some auth issues when hitting the
AP with 128 association attempts all at once.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Append "p2p_dev_addr" parameter to AP-STA-DISCONNECTED event for P2P
connections. In addition, for AP-STA-CONNECTED event during P2P
connection, the "dev_addr=" print is replaced with "p2p_dev_addr=" to
be more consistent with other events.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Storing the address in the BSS instead of the DRV struct makes it usable
for hostapd and thus gets rid of the linux_get_ifhwaddr() call when
receiving a spurious frame.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Testing code can now be enabled in the hostapd RADIUS server to dump
each derived MSK into a text file (e.g., to be used as an input to
wlantest). This functionality is not included in the default build
and can be enabled by adding the following line to hostapd/.config:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_RADIUS_TEST
The MSK dump file is specified with dump_msk_file parameter in
hostapd.conf (path to the dump file). If this variable is not set,
MSK dump mechanism is not enabled at run time.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If Provision Discovery Request is sent for GO role (i.e., P2P Group ID
attribute is included), add the group interface name to the control
interface event on the GO. This makes it easier to figure out which
ctrl_iface needs to be used for wps_pbc/wps_pin command to authorize
the joining P2P client.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If p2p_prov_disc join command is used prior to p2p_connect join,
skip the duplicated provision discovery exchange.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
This can be used to request Provision Discovery Request to be sent
for the purpose of joining a running group, e.g., to request the GO
to display a PIN that we can then use with p2p_connect join command.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Since the nl_cache is not used anymore, there is no need for maintaining
the struct nl80211_handles wrapper for struct nl_handle. Clean this up
by using nl_handle directly.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is a rewrite of Ben Greear's patch, making the
nl80211 code use just a single multicast event socket.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When running AP mode, we need to receive beacons over overlapping BSSes
to handle protection. Use the new nl80211 command for this. As the
command works per wiphy (and we don't want to receive the Beacon frames
multiple times) add an abstraction that keeps track of per-wiphy data.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
These events are necessary to send deauth frames to
stations sending spurious data frames. Subscribe to
them on the per-BSS event socket.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
To achieve this, multiple things are needed:
1) since hostapd needs to handle *all* action frames,
make the normal registration only when in a non-AP
mode, to be able to do this use the new socket
2) store the frequency in each BSS to be able to give
the right frequency to nl80211's mgmt-tx operation
3) make TX status processing reject non-matched cookie
only in non-AP mode
The whole thing depends on having station-poll support
in the kernel. That's currently a good indicator since
the kernel patches are added together.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Fix start of reauthentication after failed authentication with
passthrough (external AAA server) to use internal EAP Identity method.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This reverts commit 204dd3f420.
start_reauth was not supposed to be used in this way and setting it
to TRUE in INITIALIZE breaks internal EAP server.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
When using authentication retry within driver_nl80211.c, a failure on the
second attempt has to be indicated with a driver event since the return
code from wpa_driver_nl80211_authenticate() is not actually delivered to
the core code in that case.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
cfg80211 rejects NL80211_CMD_AUTHENTICATE with ENOENT if the BSS entry
for the target BSS is not available. This can happen if the cfg80211
entry has expired before wpa_supplicant entry (e.g., during a suspend).
To recover from this quickly, run a single channel scan to get the
cfg80211 entry back and then retry authentication command again. This
is handled within driver_nl80211.c to keep the core wpa_supplicant
implementation cleaner.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The pseudonym is a temporary identity, but is no one-time identifier (like
the fast re-authentication identity). Thus, do not forget it if the server
does not include it in every challenge. There are servers that include the
pseudonym identity only at full-auth. [Bug 424]
Make sure sign extension does not end up getting used here by
explicitly type casting the variables to correct size.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 34445d12ee forgot to convert
the hostapd_prepare_rates() inline wrapper for builds that do not
define NEED_AP_MLME.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
P2P invitation responses are transmitted with the BSSID set to the peer
address. Pass these action frames up to allow the GO to receive the
Invitation Response (and avoid sending the Invitation Request multiple
times).
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Set the NL80211_ATTR_CONTROL_PORT_NO_ENCRYPT flag for nl80211 to tell
drivers (mac80211) to not encrypt the EAPOL frames for WEP IEEE 802.1X.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
In preparation for things that receive on a BSS-specific handle,
allocate a CB for it and hook it up to receive functions.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The next patch will add process_bss_event, rename process_event to
process_drv_event to differentiate between them.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
By passing the nl_cb as the context to the eloop function we can
(in the next patch) use the same eloop function for BSS events.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Storing the frequency in the bss struct allows using it for frame
commands in AP mode and not relying on the driver struct as much, which
is good for hostapd mode.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This will allow getting TX status for EAPOL frames
sent as data frames if the driver supports it.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Previously, sm->start_reauth was set to TRUE in SUCCESS2 state to force
reauthentication to start with EAP identity request. This works fine for
the case of EAP success through the AAA passthrough authentication, but
is not enough to handle passthrough authentication failure. sm->identity
is set in that case and getDecision would return PASSTHROUGH instead of
CONTINUE (to Identity method).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The RTM_NEWLINK even can have IFF_UP flag even if the interface is
down. Do not generate EVENT_INTERFACE_ENABLED event based on such a
message.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
A new hostapd.conf parameter, wps_rf_bands, can now be used to fix the
RF Bands value in cases where hw_mode is not set or when operating a
dual band dual concurrent AP.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
When hostapd controls multiple radios, WPS operations are started on
all interfaces. However, when the provisioning run had been completed
successfully, actiove WPS mode was stopped only a single interface. Fix
this to iterate through all interfaces so that this is handled
consistently with the starting of WPS operation.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Commit 628d54639a introduced number
of new WPS related ctrl_iface messages to hostapd. Some of these
were for ER events which do not make any sense to hostapd that
cannot operate as an ER. The WPS_EV_ER_SET_SELECTED_REGISTRAR one
from wps_registrar_sel_registrar_changed_event() was especially
problematic since it can cause wpa_supplicant ER code segfault due
to missing event data.
Revert all the ER specific changes from commit
628d54639a to get rid of the segfault
and undesired extra code in hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This is based on the Android driver_cmd changes that are converted to
use the sched_scan/stop_sched_scan driver_ops for the case where the
driver does not support the new nl80211 commands.
Change-Id: Iaedc340f84650af422bd2ea57d2a8b0a9d4a5330
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
(jm: This is based on the Android change that used driver_cmd. The same
implementation is used for the actual driver interface, but the commands
are now accessed through sched_scan/stop_sched_scan driver_ops instead
of driver_cmd)
While the copy is not used as a null terminated string, this can prevent
some static analyzers from complaining about non-issue.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add support for generating and verifying RFC 3447 RSASSA-PKCS1-v1_5
style DigestInfo for TLS v1.2 CertificateVerify. For now, this is
hardcoded to only support SHA256-based digest.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This allows the internal TLS implementation to be built for TLS v1.2
support. In addition to the build option, this changes the TLS PRF
based on the negotiated version number. Though, this commit does not
yet complete support for TLS v1.2.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Prepare for multiple TLS PRF functions by renaming the SHA1+MD5 based
TLS PRF function to more specific name and add tls_prf() within the
internal TLS implementation as a wrapper for this for now.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
IW_ENCODE_ALG_PMK and IW_ENC_CAPA_4WAY_HANDSHAKE are not defined in the
Android tree, so add compatibility defines for these.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Send the connection events from P2P group to both the group interface
and parent interface ctrl_ifaces to make it easier for external monitor
programs to see these events without having to listen to all group
interfaces when virtual group interfaces are used.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
cfg80211 will reject the NL80211_CMD_START_SCHED_SCAN if too many
match sets are requested. To avoid being completely unable to start
any scheduled scans, skip setting these filters if the driver did
not advertise support for large enough number of match sets.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This adds initial implementation of set_p2p_powersave to allow legacy PS
mode to be configured. P2P PS parameters are not yet supported.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up the source code and makes it less likely that new AKM
addition misses some needed changes in the future.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
If the station is indicating use of WPS, WSC IE should be added into the
(Re)Association Response frame. This is clear for the case when WSC IE
was included in the (Re)Association Request frame. However, even the
WLAN_STA_MAYBE_WPS case may actually indicate use of WPS. Assume that to
be the case when WPA/WPA2 is enabled (i.e., when the STA does not
include WPA/RSN/WSC IE while AP has WPA/RSN enabled).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This makes it clearer that the PMKSA caching entry gets removed from
the driver regardless of how the internal entry from wpa_supplicant
gets cleared. In practice, this call was skipped only for the case
when the entry for the current AP was being updated, so the previous
version was likely to work with all drivers. Anyway, it is cleaner
to explicitly remove the old entry even in that case before the new
entry gets added.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit 940a0ce970 moved the STA associated
check from driver_*.c into ieee802_1x_receive(), but failed to take into
account that wired networks and driver_wired.c do not mark the STA entry
associated. Fix this by skipping the check if the driver wrapper is
using a wired network.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
It's not really valid to send off-channel in all cases,
so pass whether it should be allowed or not and don't
set it in the AP case.
Also, to get the right ifindex for hostapd, pass a bss
pointer instead of the drv pointer.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Some client implementations only wait a few ms after sending a probe
request while scanning. Since probe responses are always sent at a low
rate this can eat quite some airtime and it might be impossible to get
the frame out before the client leaves the channel again. If the client
leaves before all probe reponses where acked this can cause the probe
reponse to be retried quite often consuming even more airtime.
Hence, add a new noack flag to the driver's send_mlme callback that
allows hostapd to request whether the driver should expect an ACK for
this frame or not.
Use the new noack-policy only for broadcast probe requests that contain
a wildcard SSID.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
In some situations it might be benefical to send a unicast frame without
the need for getting it ACKed (probe responses for example). In order to
achieve this add a new noack parameter to the drivers send_mlme callback
that can be used to advise the driver to not wait for an ACK for this
frame.
Signed-hostap: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
This structure was not really used for anything apart from figuring out
length of the EAP-pwd header (and even that in a way that would not work
with fragmentation). Since the bitfields in the structure could have
been problematic depending on target endianness, remove this unnecessary
structure.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Another niceness of OpenSSL is that if the high-order bit of a 521-bit
big num is not set then BN_bn2bin() will just return 65 bytes instead of
66 bytes with the 1st (big endian, after all) being all zero. When this
happens the wrong number of octets are mixed into function H(). So
there's a whole bunch of "offset" computations and BN_bn2bin() dumps the
big number into a buffer + offset. That should be obvious in the patch
too.
The previous EAP-pwd KDF implemented has an issue with group 21, that is
an elliptic curve group based on a 521 bit prime. 521 is not an even
multiple of 8, and therein lies the problem.
OpenSSL's BN library interprets a string of bits as in big-endian format
so all the calls of BN_bin2bn() will take the binary blob of bits and
turn it into a big number in big-endian format. In the EAP-pwd KDF, I am
stretching the key to "primebitlen". When that is not an even multiple
of 8 I have to mask off the excess. But I was masking off the excess
bits in the 1st octet (big endian after all) but that isn't right. The
KDF produces a string of endian-less bits. The 521st bit is the first
bit in the last octet, not the 7th bit in the first octet. So that has
been fixed and you can see in the attached diff what I'm doing.
If the kernel supports this, don't use manual null
data frame transmissions. This is one thing to get
rid of cooked monitor interfaces.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The non-monitor TX currently uses a normal L2 abstraction
socket, but that will also receive frames we don't want,
so use a plain socket that isn't bound for RX. This might
be possible using the L2 abstraction, but we need a plain
socket later for getting TX status events here.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This changes the auto-detection of whether or not the device contains
the AP SME away from monitor interface addition failing to the explicit
attribute in nl80211. Keep the old auto-detection for a little while so
that ath6kl isn't broken right away.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The new event can be used when EAPOL TX status can't be reported as a
complete 802.11 frame but is instead reported as just the EAPOL data as
originally passed to hapd_send_eapol().
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Currently OpenSSL implementation of TLS in hostapd loads only top
certificate in server certificate file. Change this to try to the
whole chain first and only if that fails, revert to old behavior.
Signed-off-by: Maciej Szmigiero <mhej@o2.pl>
This patch implements shared_freq handler for driver_nl80211.c. If a
"p2p_group_add" happens after legacy STA association, then this patch
will help to start the GO on the same frequency. This is useful when
supplicant is started on multiple interface running over a singly "PHY"
and the station interface is not used for the P2P device operations.
For example, wpa_supplicant -iwlan0 .. -N -iwlan1 ... and wlan0 is used
for station connection and wlan1 as the P2P device interface.
Signed-hostap: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Without this, it is impossible to tell exactly which
MLME code returned the error.
Also, convert to wpa_dbg so that we get device names
in the messages.
Signed-hostap: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
When GO negotation fails the WPS method is currently not cleared, which
can result in GO negotiation being resumed when a GO negotiation request
frame is received from the peer. That is unexpected as locally we
already gave up.
This manifests itself in getting
1319574733.955685: wlan0: P2P-GO-NEG-FAILURE status=-1
1319574733.955723: P2P: Removing pending group interface p2p-wlan0-0
...
1319574736.648378: wlan0: P2P: Starting GO Negotiation with previously
authorized peer
...
1319574736.650115: wlan0: P2P: Sending GO Negotiation Response
...
1319574736.988038: wlan0: P2P-GO-NEG-SUCCESS
1319574736.988233: P2P: No pending group interface
1319574736.988268: P2P: Create a new interface p2p-wlan0-1 for the group
Clear the WPS method to avoid this situation. I wasn't
able to test this though, but given the log I can only
assume this is how the situation happened.
Reported-by: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
If P2P device expires while a GO Negotiation is in progress, currently
p2p->go_neg_peer is cleared without indicating GO Nego failure. This
will result in pending group interfaces to be left over. This patch will
indicate GO Negotiation failure and will remove any pending group
interfaces.
This patch addresses a corner case in GO-Negotiation case. Consider the
scenario where two devices A and B are in discovery stage and Device B
vanishes [moves out of range] when a connect is issued on the Device A.
Then Device A keeps on retrying the GO Negotiation Request till the
retry limit is reached. On reaching retry limit, the pending group
interface is removed. But suppose if the peer entry in the device list
expires before the retry limit is reached, then pending group interface
was not removed.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
Invalid use of memcpy instead of memcmp in comparison resulted in the
GO interface address getting set incorrectly if the GO did not show up
in scan results anymore.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
trace.h may end up including system header files that define offsetof,
so include the compatibility definition from list.h only after this.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
HT_INFO_OPERATION_MODE_OP_MODE_MASK is used with variables in host
byte order, so it should not be claimed as le16.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This is a workaround for Windows 7 supplicant rejecting WPA msg 3/4
in case it used Secure=1 in msg 2/4. This can happen, e.g., when
rekeying PTK after EAPOL-Key Error Request (Michael MIC failure)
from the supplicant.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
This cleans up the code a bit by not having to deal with theoretical
possibility of maximum number of EAP methods to be different between
various components in hostapd.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Some static analyzers complain about memset with '0' value. This was
used correctly here, but since use of strdup is about as good an option,
use that to silence the invalid warnings.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This avoid incorrect errors from some static analyzers that do not like
memmove with pointers just after the end of a buffer even if the number
of bytes to move is zero.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
All we really need is the family ID, and we can
get that with genl_ctrl_resolve() and then don't
need to worry about family/cache objects.
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
If a P2P client associates with the group while it is
already associated, two member entries may be added to
the group which also confuses num_members counting.
Deal with this by removing the existing entry first
before adding a new one.
I think the way Reinette ran into this was due to our
tx_sync implementation in iwlagn, mac80211 might have
queued two association frames thinking the first one
just failed, but both only went out after the sync was
really successful (which tx_sync doesn't wait for).
Reported-by: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-hostap: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The P2P_FIND command was failing if it was issued at the moment when
a scan operation was in progress. Avoid returning failure in this
case by scheduling the P2P find to start once the ongoing scan is
completed.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
WEXT is not really changing anymore and more or less all Linux
distros come with linux/wireless.h that is recent enough to
allow the driver wrappers to be build.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Commit c2ff13c533 broke this with a
copy-paste typo that ended up adding the Probe Request P2P IE into the
Beacon frame (i.e., Beacon frame had two P2P IEs while Probe Response
had none).
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <jouni@qca.qualcomm.com>
Avoid zero-length memset at the end of the buffer. This is not really
needed, but it makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Avoid zero-length memset at the end of the buffer. This is not really
needed, but it makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Explicitly validate data_len so that static analyzers do not get
confused about the padlen validation. This is not really needed, but it
makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Explicitly validate seed_len to skip memset call with zero length
of copied data at the end of the buffer. This is not really needed,
but it makes the code a bit easier for static analyzers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
data->phase2_method cannot really be NULL if
eap_fast_init_phase2_method() returns success, but this construction
seems to be too difficult for some static analyzers. While this change
is not really needed in practice, it makes it easier to go through
warnings from such analyzers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
hapd->time_adv cannot really be NULL if hostapd_update_time_adv()
returns success, but this construction seems to be too difficult
for some static analyzers. While this change is not really needed
in practice, it makes it easier to go through warnings from such
analyzers.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
md->curlen cannot indicate full buffer size here since the buffered
data is processed whenever the full block size of data is available.
Avoid invalid warnings from static analyzers on memcpy() outside the
buffer length by verifying that curlen is smaller than block size.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function can fail in theory since the SHA-1 functions are
allowed to return an error. While this does not really happen in
practice (we would not get this far if SHA-1 does not work), it is
cleaner to include the error handling here to keep static analyzers
happier. [Bug 421]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This has been obsoleted by the more generic Linux WEXT (driver_wext.c)
support. The hostap and madwifi driver wrappers can now be used only
with hostapd. The old station interface remains available in releases up
to 1.x.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The driver wrappers broadcom, iphone, osx, and ralink have not been
maintained for a while and it does not look like they will be in the
future either. As such, remove them from the development branch. The
previous versions will be included in older releases up to 1.x.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Reassemble partial TLS records to make the internal TLS client
implementation more convenient for stream sockets.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The padding validation was done on the last padding-length octets in the
buffer which misses the first padding octet (the last octet is the
padding length). Fix the starting offset for the comparison loop to get
the first octet verified. [Bug 420]
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Return number of user input bytes from tlsv1_record_receive() to
move this detail into the proper record layer processing. In addition,
ignore unknown content types at record layer and allow processing to
continue after warning level TLS alerts to provide minimal workaround
for closure alerts.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of trying to remember to add wpa_msg() calls for every possible
path where a STA becomes authorized or unauthorized, use
ap_sta_set_authorized() to send these events more consistently.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
wpa_msg() has to use hapd->msg_ctx instead of hapd as the context
pointer to work properly in wpa_supplicant AP mode.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Currently, there is no events over the control interface
when a AP disconnects a station due to inactivity. With
this patch, an "AP-STA-DISCONNECTED" event will be sent.
Signed-hostap: Nicolas Cavallari <nicolas.cavallari@lri.fr>
Use a driver_ndis.c specific initialization function to fill in the
wpa_driver_ops information to make it easier to modify struct
wpa_driver_ops in the future. Being able to build driver_ndis.c
with MSVC was the only reason for having to maintain the same order
of function pointers in struct wpa_driver_ops and for having to
update driver_ndis.c for all changes in that structure.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The GTK is renewed in the hostapd after a MIC attack dissassociation
without informing the driver, causing decryption failures. This patch
sends the new GTK/IGTK to the driver after it is updated by the hostapd.
Signed-off-by: Yoni Divinsky <yoni.divinsky@ti.com>
When the supplicant acts as a registrar to learn the access point
parameters send the credentials to the wpa_cli interface after
receiving the 7th message. This is needed for proper behavior with
wps_cred_processing set to 1 or 2.
Without this patch, after the 7th message you got the WPS-CRED-RECEIVED
notification without the credentials. This was because the cred_attr and
cred_attr_len were not filled in in the wps structure.
Signed-off-by: Olivier Sobrie <olivier@sobrie.be>
In scan.c, merge a channel's noise value into the scan results. When
comparing scan results, compute the signal-to-noise ratio and use it
when available. Prefer a 5 GHz network if its SNR is really big (> 30)
or if its SNR is relatively close to the other network's.
Some stations have been reported to send EAPOL-Key Error Reports
indicating Michael MIC failures even when the cipher is not TKIP
(e.g., when the network is using only CCMP). Ignore such reports
to avoid starting TKIP countermeasures unnecessarily. This can
prevent certaint types of denial of service attacks by insiders,
but mostly this is to work around invalid station implementations.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
The eloop timeout to stop TKIP countermeasures has to be canceled
on deinit path to avoid leaving bogus timeouts behind.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Converts from a string to a control request enum when input
from a control interface is received. Will be used by a
subsequent patch.
Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
Control requests will be extended for non-EAP uses later, so it makes
sense to have them be generic. Furthermore, having them defined as an
enum is easier for processing internally, and more generic for control
interfaces that may not use field names. The public ctrl_req_type /
field_name conversion function will be used later by the D-Bus control
interface too.
Signed-off-by: Dan Williams <dcbw@redhat.com>
Special processing is needed to handle EAP user request for
identity or password at the beginning of Phase 2 when the implicit
identity request is used. data->pending_phase2_req needs to be set
to an empty buffer in that case to avoid re-processing the previous
part of TLS negotiation when the user enters the needed information.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Instead of hardcoding IEEE 802.11b rates to be disabled whenever
P2P support is built in and supported by the driver, do this only
when an interface is set to P2P mode (both when adding a new
interface and when changing the interface mode). This re-enables
use of IEEE 802.11b APs with CONFIG_P2P=y builds.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
This function was used unconditionally if wpa_supplicant build
includes CONFIG_P2P=y. Adding a separate driver_ops for such use
is not really useful since the driver wrappers can do the same
internally. Remove this driver_ops and move matching functionality
into driver_nl80211.c which was the only driver wrapper using
this driver_ops callback.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
nl80211_disable_11b_rates() function was supposed to use the 'disabled'
parameter to figure out whether to disable or re-enable 802.11b rates.
In addition, the driver deinit path was now ending up re-disabling the
enabled rates at the end of the deinit operations when the interface
type was forced back to station. Both of these issues are now fixed
and the 2.4 GHz band TX rate index is cleared properly when
wpa_supplicant is stopped.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
disable_11b_rates() is called on interface addition,
but not on interface type change, resulting in 11b rates
enabled on p2p interfaces.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
This can be used to apply the no-CCK rule conditionally depending on
which frame is being sent. The no-CCK rule applies only for P2P
management frames while SA Query and FT use cases do not have similar
restrictions.
Signed-hostap: Jouni Malinen <j@w1.fi>
Add a new attribute to specify whether to use CCK rate or not during
scan and sending management frames. This helps to send P2P probes
at non-CCK rate. This ensures that P2P probe request/response/action
frames are always sent at non-CCK rates.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com>
This was included in the AP configuration parameters, but there has
been no way to set it to anything else than the default automatic
mode. Remove this parameter and just hardcode ERP determination to
follow the automatic mode.
The MS-CHAPv1 and MS-CHAPv2 RFCs specify that the password is a string
of "Unicode characters", which for Windows means UCS-2; thus the
password could be any even-length string of up to 512 bytes.
Instead of making the incompatible change of requiring the incoming
password to be UCS-2 encoded, assume the password is UTF-8 encoded and
convert it before using it in NtPasswordHash and
EncryptPwBlockWithPasswordHash.
Signed-off-by: Evan Broder <ebroder@mokafive.com>
The netlink event processing is delayed since they are only returned
after control returns to eloop. This can result in netlink down events
being processed at a point when the interface has is actually still
there (the first event on new interface is down) and that can result in
odd behavior especially when the resulting interface-disabled event is
delivered to AP mode interface with wpa_supplicant.
Work around this by filtering netlink down events if the matching
interface is up at the time the netlink event is processed. This fixes
an issue brought up by commit 36d84860bb.
hostapd_wpa_auth_conf() is called on uninitialized memory and the
conditional blocks in this function may leave some fields into
uninitialized state. This can result in unexpected behavior elsewhere
since some of the variables may be used without matching #ifdef
blocks. Fix this by zeroing the memory.
TPK will be needed to be able to generate FTIE MIC for the
teardown message, so maintain peer data for a bit longer in
case the teardown FTIE request comes back from the driver.
The Query Response Length Limit is not allowed to be zero when
this is sent by the AP. Use 0x7F to indicate that the limit is
based on maximum number of GAS fragments.
For P2P, the p2p_connect takes in device address argument to make a
connection. However the connected event AP-STA-CONNECTED comes with
interface address. The application listening on events would find it
difficult to map interface address to the p2p device address which is
provided for connection.
Append P2P Device Address to AP-STA-CONNECTED event for P2P Client
connection. This will help applications to easily map the P2P Interface
Address to P2P Device Address on CONNECTED event. For non-P2P case, it
will just print the usual STA MAC address alone.
Signed-off-by: Jithu Jance <jithu@broadcom.com>
The persistent_reconnect configuration parameter was used to decide
whether to accept invitation to re-establish a persistent group.
However, this was not being advertised in the Group Capability bitmap.
Add the Persistent Reconnect bit based on this configuration to GO
Negotiation frames and Beacon/Probe Response frames from the GO.
Use the wpa_tdls_add_peer function to allocate TDLS peer structures.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Use capability information to decide whether to perform a given TDLS
operation internally or through mgmt-frame Tx.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Before commencing setup, add a new STA entry to the driver representing
the peer. Later during setup, update the STA entry using information
received from the peer.
Extend sta_add() callback for adding/modifying a TDLS peer entry and
connect it to the TDLS state machine. Implement this callback for the
nl80211 driver and send peer information to kernel.
Mark TDLS peer entries with a new flag and translate it to a
corresponding nl80211 flag in the nl80211 driver.
In addition, correct TDLS related documentation in the wpa_driver_ops
structure.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Record the capabilities and supported rates of the TDLS peer during
link setup. These are given in the IEs passed in Setup Request and
Setup Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Disable the direct connection when a TDLS peer stops responding
to packets, as indicated by the "LOW ACK" event coming from a driver.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Allow sending a TDLS discovery request as a frame through the driver.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
When a driver does not implement the TDLS_TEARDOWN operation internally,
send an explicit TDLS link teardown frame to the driver.
Change all teardown calls to use these calling semantics.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Register for the TDLS discovery response public action frame in nl80211.
Print out a debug message when a Discovery Resp frame is received and
validated.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
When a discovery request is received, add the peer to the TDLS peer
cache and send a response containing minimal data. Mandatory IEs in
the discovery response frame will be filled out by the driver.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Put glue code in place to propagate TDLS related driver capabilities to
the TDLS state machine.
If the driver doesn't support capabilities, assume TDLS is supported
internally.
When TDLS is explicitly not supported, disable all user facing TDLS
operations.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
Allow passing high-level TDLS commands and TDLS frames to kernel
via new nl80211 commands.
Propagate TDLS related nl80211 capability flags from kernel and add them
as driver capability flags.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
A zero dialog-token is considered invalid by IEEE Std 802.11z-2010.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
Cc: Kalyan C Gaddam <chakkal@iit.edu>
This function is actually needed for quite a bit more than just
user space MLME implementation. The old comment here has not been
accurate for a long time, so get rid of it.
These driver_ops functions set_channel, set_ssid, set_bssid,
mlme_add_sta, and mlme_remove_sta were used with the user space
MLME implementation in wpa_supplicant. That was only for testing
purposes and was removed, but these driver_ops were forgotten.
Remove them now to remove confusing driver_ops definitions.
This code was used only with driver_test.c to allow MLME operations
in hostapd to be tested without having to use a real radio. There
are no plans on extending this to any other use than testing and
mac80211_hwsim has now obsoled the need for this type of testing.
As such, we can drop this code from wpa_supplicant to clean up the
implementation of unnecessary complexity.
Netlink sockets can be shared among all driver instances, saving lots
of sockets, spurious log messages, memory, and CPU usage when using
multiple interfaces in a single process.
This offloads the station polling to driver wrappers, which may offload
it again to the driver. The hostap driver wrapper uses "real" data
frames while nl80211 uses null data frames.
Also add a specific event to indicate that a poll was successful for
future use with the nl80211 driver.
Some dualband cards can use more than five seconds to run through
a full scan, so increase the timeout to avoid hitting the missing
scan completed event workaround.
This fixes an issue where WPS run leaves a small ClientTimeout
value (2) configured and the next EAPOL authentication is started
with that small value even for Identity exchange. This can cause
problems when an EAPOL packet gets dropped immediately after
association and a retry of that packet is needed (which may take
more than two seconds).
This function can be used to clean up local UNIX domain socket files
that may be left over from clients that were previously connected to
wpa_supplicant. At least for now, this is only available for Android
builds.
Remove the separate driver_ops functions set_cts_protect(),
set_preamble(), set_short_slot_time(), and set_ht_params(). These
belong into same set of operations as set_ap(), so there is no need
to maintain separate functions that just make the driver wrapper
more complex.
Since these have only been used with driver_nl80211.c, the driver_ops
can be removed immediately instead of maintaining backwards
compatibility period with the old functions.
The AP client isolation parameter is now available through set_ap().
driver_nl80211.c was the only driver wrapper using the set_intra_bss()
call in hostap.git, but some external trees may have used this. Once
those are cleared, the set_infra_bss() driver_ops can be removed
completely. The only remaining use case for it currently is in P2P
GO mode with wpa_supplicant.
AP mode operations were used for P2P device discovery Listen state
only during early experiments. This has now been cleaned up and
ieee802_11_set_beacon() is not called for P2P device discovery.
As such, this hack to skip Beacon configuration can be removed.
This is the first step in allowing SA Query mechanism in hostapd to be
used with drivers that implement authentication and association MLME/SME
(i.e., do not use ieee802_11.c).
This adds the basic mechanism for running through network selection:
scan, ANQP fetch, network selection, and connection. Actual rules for
network selection and the creation of the network block are still
missing, but will be added in separate commits.
"hostapd_cli ess_disassoc (STA addr) (URL)" can now be used to send
an ESS Dissassociation Imminent notification to the STA. This event
is shown in wpa_supplicant ctrl_iface monitors (e.g., wpa_cli):
"WNM: ESS Disassociation Imminent - session_info_url=http://example.com/session/"
The new wpa_supplicant.conf file global parameters interworking and
hessid can be used to configure wpa_supplicant to include
Interworking element in Probe Request frames.
Commit 17f6b90056 moved the concatenation
of WPS IEs, but did not include the validation that the IE buffer is not
NULL. In addition, the concatenation needs to be done based on the full
IE buffer instead of the parsed pointer that includes only a single
WPS IE.
The base64 encoded data cannot included pad characters in the middle, so
we can stop the loop at the first sequence of pad characters. If the
sequence includes more than two pad characters, the encoding is invalid
and we can indicate failure.
Use the SSID filter list passed in the scheduled scan request down to
the kernel driver, so it can use the list to return only the wanted
SSIDs. Some kernel drivers can use this information to offload the
SSID filter to the hardware, helping with reducing the power
consumption.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
Pass SSIDs to be matched in scheduled scan results. Only the SSIDs
that are included in the match lists will be reported by the driver,
so the filtering can be offloaded to the hardware and the power
consumption can be reduced.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
With scheduled scan support, we may need to pass more than 10 SSIDs in
a single scan request. Some drivers (e.g., wl12xx) support up to 16
SSIDs at once.
Change WPAS_MAX_SCAN_SSIDS from 10 to 16.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
In new Linux kernel versions (>=3.0), nl80211 adds scheduled scan
capability. In order to use this feature to its full extent, we need
to support it in the wpa_supplicant core, so that it can also be used
by other drivers.
This commit adds initial scheduled scan support operations and events.
Signed-off-by: Luciano Coelho <coelho@ti.com>
Commit 19ec1f262e tried to fix some
cases for history prev selection, but it broke others. Fix this
properly by using a separate entry for the current edit line that
is not yet in history buffer.
Currently the P2P Interface name[p2p-%s-%d] is reset when the P2P
Interface name reaches the "IFNAMSIZ" limit. Monitor interface name is
derived from p2p interface name with the addition of few characters
[mon.p2p-%s-%d] and hence Monitor interface name hits IFNAMSIZ limit
before P2P Interface name. Rename the monitor interface name to
mon-%s-%d to reduce the length to same with p2p-%s-%d.
Data path for stations that get successfully associated to the
hostapd but fail to get added in the driver/firmware, will not
work. In such cases, hostapd should deauth and disconnect such
stations. In such scenario, hostapd should disconnect the STAs.
Sample output with following patch
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: authenticated
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: associated (aid 1)
wlan0: AP-STA-CONNECTED 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: Could not add STA to kernel driver
wlan0: STA 0c:74:c2:9a:4c:59 IEEE 802.11: deauthenticated due to local deauth request
Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
Signed-off-by: Nishant Sarmukadam <nishants@marvell.com>
The password_hash parameter was not copied in case of the integrated
authentication server (but was for RADIUS server). This broke EAP
authentication when the user entry used NT-hash.
This currently unused function would have triggered wpabuf overflows
due to incorrect variable being reset to zero in the case the old
NoA wpabuf was large enough for the new data.
The EAPOL authenticator was previously forcing disconnection in the WPS
use case. However, this can be benefitial operation with any IEEE 802.1X
authentication mechanism and need not be limited to WPS. This helps some
use cases like EAP-FAST where provisioning may require two
authentication runs if the authentication server does not allow the PAC
provisioning step to be used for normal data connection. While the
station would be free to decide to re-associate in such a case, not all
stations do and as such, it helps if the AP does that instead of leaving
the association up with EAPOL state machine in HELD state for 60
seconds.
While EAP-FAST uses protected success notification, RFC 5422, Section
3.5 points out a possibility of EAP-Failure being sent out even after
protected success notification in case of provisioning. Change the
EAP-FAST peer implementation to accept that exception to the protected
success notification. This allows the station to re-connect more quickly
to complete EAP-FAST connection in the case the server rejects the
initial attempt by only allowing it to use to provision a new PAC.
If GO Negotiation Request (or in theory, also GO Negotiation Response)
frame is delivered multiple time for processing, the SSID of the group
could end up getting changed. This could result in possible issues if
the peer ended up using different SSID. To avoid this, make sure the
SSID does not get changed unless the negotiation is for a new group.
Whenever PMK gets changed (e.g., due to re-authentication), all PMKSA
caching entries that were created using the previous PMK needs to be
replaced. Previously, only the entry for the current AP was cleared.
Flush the other entries based on network_ctx matches to get rid of the
OKC entries. These entries can then be re-creating using OKC with the
new PMK.
When polling a station that has been inactive for a while, hostapd currently
always uses a null data frame. This is a bit strange with uAPSD clients
(though it seems to mostly work) since the EOSP bit can never be set in a
non-QoS frame. Make hostapd use QoS null data frames for probing when the
station is a QoS STA.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Wrap self-generated WPS credential for new AP settings and send that to
control interface to provide the needed information in
WPS-NEW-AP-SETTINGS for external processing.
GAS/ANQP is a generic protocol and in no way specific to P2P, so move
routines used to build GAS/ANQP frames to a separate file that can be
shared for other uses than just P2P service discovery.
The new function, p2p_scan_ie_buf_len(), can be used to figure out
how large a buffer needs to be allocated for p2p_scan_ie() use. This
makes it easier to add new data into the buffer without forcing all
callers to be updated to use a larger buffer.
The P2P search mechanism depends on the same scan functionality that
is used for station mode scans. If these operations are being used
at the same time, scan result processing is not handled properly.
Avoid unexpected behavior by delaying station mode scan requests
if a P2P operation is in progress.
Among other things, this allows the station mode connection attempt
to be continued after a P2P find or group formation has been completed
if the interface is available (i.e., when the P2P group uses a
separate virtual interface).
If the initial attempt to start a scan for p2p_find fails, an error
is reported. However, the P2P scan handler and search state was
left behind. That can result in unexpected behavior when the next
non-P2P scan results are indicated. Avoid this by clearing the
P2P search state on failure.
This new flag can be used to change wpa_supplicant behavior in the
default ap_scan=1 mode to move BSS selection into the driver (likely
firmware). This commit is only adding the flag; separate commits
will be used to change the actual connection/roaming behavior.
These protocols seem to be abandoned: latest IETF drafts have expired
years ago and it does not seem likely that EAP-TTLSv1 would be
deployed. The implementation in hostapd/wpa_supplicant was not complete
and not fully tested. In addition, the TLS/IA functionality was only
available when GnuTLS was used. Since GnuTLS removed this functionality
in 3.0.0, there is no available TLS/IA implementation in the latest
version of any supported TLS library.
Remove the EAP-TTLSv1 and TLS/IA implementation to clean up unwanted
complexity from hostapd and wpa_supplicant. In addition, this removes
any potential use of the GnuTLS extra library.
This fixes some build issues in GnuTLS wrapper to be compatible with
at least following GnuTLS versions: 2.2.5, 2.4.3, 2.6.6, 2.8.6,
2.10.5, 2.12.11, 3.0.3.
Instead of using separate bad_record_mac and decryption_failed alerts,
use only bad_record_mac alert regardless of how the CBC decryption
failed. This provides less information to attackers that could modify
packets. In addition, instead of returning immediately on error, run
through the MAC check to make timing attacks more difficult.
When the received data will be decrypted, there is no need to first
copy it and then handle decryption in-place when decryption step can
take care of both operations.
TLS v1.0 and v1.1 RFCs were not exactly clear on the use of the
protocol version in record later. As such, accept any {03,xx} value
to remain compatible with existing implementations and new protocol
versions.
The p2p->drv_in_listen variable is used to track Listen state operations
in the driver. This is cleared when the driver reports that the Listen
state has ended (p2p_listen_end() gets called). However, it is possible
that the driver does not indicate that if the Listen state is canceled.
This can apparently happen in some cases where p2p_connect command is
issues while the Listen state is in progress.
Work around this issue by clearing p2p->drv_in_listen when Listen state
is stopped as part of p2p_stop operation. This allows the P2P module to
process CONNECT_LISTEN timeout in p2p_timeout_connect_listen() to move
to CONNECT state, e.g., when starting GO Negotiation after Device
Discoverability mechanism.
The "too long" buffer (32+1 octets) prevented AP from starting up with
32 octet SSID with WE-21 and newer. Fix this by reducing the
SIOCGIWESSID buffer length.
This adds support for RSN pre-authentication with nl80211 interface and
drivers that handle roaming internally (i.e., wpa_supplicant is not
responsible for requesting scan results that provide the needed
information without these events).
cfg80211 does not currently allow NL80211_CMD_CONNECT when there
is already an association. This can result in wpa_supplicant being
unable to request a connection if the interface is already in
connected state. Work around this by requesting disconnection if
the connect command fails with EALREADY error. This allows
wpa_supplicant to recover from the unexpected state and complete
the connect request on next attempt.
eapol_test command line argument -o<file> can now be used to request
the received server certificate chain to be written to the specified
file. The certificates will be written in PEM format. [Bug 391]
Make the WPS processing of (Re)Association Request frame IEs conditional
on WPS support. This fixes a build issue with wps_is_20() not being
defined and makes the non-WPS build a bit smaller.
os_*() wrappers should be used instead of functions from time.h.
Removing the header from includes.h enforces this. os_unix.c can
include this its uses are valid wrapper calls. wps_upnp.c uses
gmtime() for which there is no os_*() wrapper available yet, so
allow it to use time.h, too. Similarly, allow dump_state.c to
use time.h for ctime().
Currently, the following can happen:
1) P2P state machine requests R-O-C
2) user changes their mind and aborts
3) P2P state machine aborts R-O-C
4) driver_nl80211 rejects abort since there
was no notification about the start yet
5) R-O-C period start notification from kernel
6) P2P state machine requests new R-O-C
7) this overlaps with old R-O-C -- iwlwifi driver
can't handle that and returns -EBUSY
8) state machine stops dead in its tracks
The reason is that the abort isn't going through properly. Instead of
tracking whether a R-O-C is active in driver_nl80211, track whether one
was requested to avoid this scenario.
Reported-by: Reinette Chatre <reinette.chatre@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This allows drivers to disable CCK rates from Probe Request frames.
For nl80211, this is currently applying only to the supported rates
element(s), but this mechanism could be extended to address TX rate
control masking, too, to lessen need for global rate disabling.
Signed-off-by: Rajkumar Manoharan <rmanohar@qca.qualcomm.com>
Since the kernel can now advertise P2P concurrent support by advertising
interface combinations, we can take advantage of that and automatically
use P2P_CONCURRENT / P2P_MGMT_AND_NON_P2P for drivers that advertise
support.
Keep driver_param=use_p2p_group_interface=1 for anyone not advertising
interface combinations in their drivers yet.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The default config methods was hardcoded to claim support for
PushButton, Display, and Keypad. While these are supported by
most P2P devices, there may be some cases where it is convenient
to be able to disable a specific config method. Use config_methods
configuration parameter to set the default values for Config Methods
in the P2P Device Info attribute.
The P2P specification (3.1.4.3) disallows use of the Label configuration
method between two P2P devices. This was previously enforced at upper
level, but the obsolete code can be removed from wpa_supplicant. This
adds a bit more strict enforcement of the policy, but should not result
in practical differences since no known P2P implementation uses Label
config method.
If a network configuration block is removed or modified, flush
all PMKSA cache entries that were created using that network
configuration. Similarly, invalidate EAP state (fast re-auth).
The special case for OKC on wpa_supplicant reconfiguration
(network_ctx pointer change) is now addressed as part of the
PMKSA cache flushing, so it does not need a separate mechanism
for clearing the network_ctx values in the PMKSA cache.
If the driver maintains its own copy of the PMKSA cache, we need to
clear an entry from the driver whenever wpa_supplicant is dropping
an old PMKSA cache entry.
The Deauth/Disassoc TX status callbacks were ending up kicking the
station entry from kernel driver when test functionality was used to
inject Deauth/Disassoc frames from the AP with the purpose of leaving
the local association in place. Fix this by using STA flags to figure
out whether there was a pending callback for the frame that we need
to act on.
In addition, add forgotten functionality for the Disassoc TX status
callback to match the behavior with Deauth.
The previous code was trying to figure out which WPA version is
used based on the extra IEs requested for Association Request. That
did not work properly in cases where non-WPA networks are used with
some extra IEs. Fix this by using more robust mechanism for passing
the WPA versions from core wpa_supplicant to the driver_ops
associate().
Instead of hardcoding the Config Methods attribute value in Probe
Request frames, set this based on the configured parameter
config_methods to allow correct set of methods to be advertised.
The device description file may include multiple devices. Improve the
simplistic parser by first trying to find the WFADevice:1 device before
fetching the device parameters. While this is still far from complete
XML parsing, this should address the most common root device
specifications.
This allows non-mac80211 drivers to report received Probe Request
frames to user space and Probe Response and Action frames to be sent
from user space when using AP/P2P GO mode.
This allows the driver to use PS buffering of Deauthentication and
Disassociation frames when the STA is in power save sleep. The STA
entry (and PTK) will be removed from the kernel only after the
Deauth/Disassoc has been transmitted (e.g., when the STA wakes up).
A hardcoded two second timeout is used to limit the length of this
window should the driver fail to deliver the frame (e.g., the STA
is out of range and does not wake up). The kernel STA entry is
marked unauthorized during the wait to avoid accepting Data
frames from the STA that we have decided to disconnect.
This behavior is available only with drivers that provide TX status
events for Deauth/Disassoc frames (nl80211 at this point). Other
drivers continue to use the previous behavior where the STA entry
is removed immediately.
Extend the code that waits for the station to send EAPOL-Start before
initiating EAPOL authenticator operations to cover the case where the
station includes WPS IE in (Re)Association Request frame if that IE
does not include support for WPS 2.0. While this should not really
be needed, this may help with some deployed WPS 1.0 stations that do
not support EAPOL operations correctly and may get confused of the
EAP-Request/Identity packets that would show up twice if EAPOL-Start
is transmitted.
If an ER tries to send a message to a STA that is not in the middle
of WPS protocol, do not try to deliver that. This can help with issues
where an ER takes long time to reply to M1 and another Registrar has
already completed negotiation.
It is possible to get a response for a pending EAP callback after the
EAP state machine has already completed its work or has timed out. For
those cases, make sure that the callback function is not delivered since
it could result in NULL pointer dereferences.
The Config Methods attribute in M2 and M2D messages is supposed to
indicate which configuration methods are supported by the Registrar. As
such, it should not depend on whether PBC mode is currently active or
not. That will only affect the Selected Registrar Config Methods and
Device Password ID attributes.
This change is a first step in better supporting different driver
architectures for AP mode operations with nl80211. This commit in
itself does not add new functionality, but it makes it easier to add
new AP mode parameters to address needs of drivers that have more of
the MLME/SME in firmware or kernel.
Split WPA initialization into two parts so that the Beacon frames can be
configured fully before the initial keys (GTK/IGTK) are configured. This
makes it easier for drivers that depend on the AP security mode being
fully set before the keys are configured.
This avoids a request to the driver to first start beaconing before
the WPA/RSN IE has been generated and then immediately changing the
beacon IEs once the WPA/RSN IE is ready.
Such using params->wpa_ie to figure out whether the connection is for
WPA/WPA2 is not correct since that buffer is used also to add WPS IE. In
case of WPS, do not add NL80211_ATTR_WPA_VERSIONS to avoid confusing
drivers.
Some compilers complain about fwrite calls if the return value is
not checked, so check the value even if it does not really make
much of a difference in this particular case.
The internal TLS implementation assumes that the certificate chain
is ordered by issuer certificate following the certificate that it
signed. Add the certificates to the chain in suitable order when
loading multiple certificates.
Commit e1d526293b added code for verifying
whether the receive Probe Request frame was indicating support for only
802.11b rates, but it missed the for loop for the extended supported
rates element. Add that to fix the validation code for cases where
non-802.11b rates are in the extended supported rates element.
Currently, wpa_driver_nl80211_authenticate() changes the interface type
to station. However, in case of P2P, we need to change the interface
type to P2P_CLI.
Add p2p field to the authentication params, and consider it for choosing
the correct interface type.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Commit 9f51b11395 added support for P2P
interfaces when adding a new interface. However, it didn't handle the
case in which the same interface is being used and its type is being
changed. Add support for this case.
Consequently, when doing "ap_scan_as_station" we now need to save the
actual AP interface type (AP/P2P GO) in order to restore it properly.
For that, change ap_scan_as_station type from int to nl80211_iftype, and
set it to NL80211_IFTYPE_UNSPECIFED when not used.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
When driver_nl80211.c has to set the netdev down to change iftype, an
RTM_NEWLINK event is generated. Do not generate
EVENT_INTERFACE_DISABLED event based on that.
Reassociation Request/Response frame validation need to count all IEs in
the RIC. In addition, TIE is not protected, so it should not be included
in the count.
Signed-off-by: Hong Wu <hong.wu@dspg.com>
Only accept Probe Request frames that have a Wildcard BSSID and a
destination address that matches with our P2P Device Address or is the
broadcast address per P2P specification 3.1.2.1.1.
When a new interface is created and already has a separate MAC address
assigned by the kernel, then we need to use that address, not just when
we've created a locally administered address.
This fixes use_p2p_group_interface=1 for iwlagn as it already makes
mac80211 assign an address for a second interface since the hardware has
two addresses assigned.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Add support to wpa_supplicant for device-based GTK rekeying. In order to
support that, pass the KEK, KCK, and replay counter to the driver, and
handle rekey events that update the latter.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Send STA flags to kernel when adding a new station. This ensures
stations are added with up to date flags by kernel drivers.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
When adding a new station, set the STA flags as part of the sta_add()
command. This ensures the flags are up to date when the station is added
by lower level drivers.
Signed-off-by: Arik Nemtsov <arik@wizery.com>
A new hostapd configuration parameter, disable_pmksa_caching=1, can now
be used to disable PMKSA caching on the Authenticator. This forces the
stations to complete EAP authentication on every association when WPA2
is being used.
In general, this patch attemps to extend commit
00468b4650 with dbus support.
This can be used by dbus client to implement subject match text
entry with preset value probed from server. This preset value, if
user accepts it, is remembered and passed to subject_match config
for any future authentication.
Signed-off-by: Michael Chang <mchang@novell.com>
Data path is broken when hostapd reloads its configuration
disabling the security which was previously enabled (WEP/WPA),
using kill -1, as old keys were not cleared.
The patch clears the keys configured when hostapd reloads
its configuration.
Signed-off-by: Yogesh Ashok Powar <yogeshp@marvell.com>
This phase1 parameter for TLS-based EAP methods was already supported
with GnuTLS and this commit extends that support for OpenSSL and the
internal TLS implementation.
Fix a bug with the current dev_found()/dev_lost() usage. Previously
in p2p_device_free() dev_lost() was invoked for devices that had
not been dev_found(). This caused dbus related msgs to stderr like:
"Attempted to unregister path (path[0] = fi path[1] = w1) which isn't
registered"
Signed-off-by: Angie Chinchilla <angie.v.chinchilla@intel.com>
Some P2PDevice properties were not updated in p2p->cfg structure:
reg_class, channel, op_reg_class, and op_channel. Hence, update p2p->cfg
parameters through p2p core calls in wpas_p2p_update_config().
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel.Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Move level parameter from p2p_device to p2p_device_info in order to
expose this information and modify D-Bus P2P handler to return this new
parameter through the P2P device properties.
Signed-off-by: Fabien Marotte <fabienx.marotte@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Previously hostapd just masked the STAs HT caps with its own. However,
some HT caps are not symmetric and as such need to be handled
different.
hostapd shouldn't overwrite the STAs SMPS mode as otherwise the driver
cannot know it has to use RTS/CTS to wake the receiver from dynamic
SMPS for MCS rates > 7.
hostapd shouldn't mask the RX and TX STBC caps with it's own. They are
already handled in a special case below.
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
This file is a part of the radiotap parser that Andy Green agreed to
relicense under the BSD license (per email, 11 Aug 2007 07:42:05
+0100). The copyright/license statement was updated in radiotap.c,
but this radiotap_iter.h file was forgotten at that point.
In set_key handler, the seq[8] is in little endian order defined by
WPA. BSD kernel uses a u_int64_t value ik_keyrsc to represent it
internally. The kernel expects the native endian order for the value.
Thus, we need to detect the endian order and swap bytes when
necessary.
This fixes an issue with SA Query Response frames not being processed
anymore after wpa_supplicant started registering a handler for those.
This handler registration is in generic driver_nl80211.c code, so
hostapd uses it, too.
Implement PMKSA cache operations add, remove, and flush using nl80211
commands NL80211_CMD_{SET,DEL,FLUSH}_PMKSA to support PMKSA caching
with drivers that select the AP and generate the RSN IE internally.
When provision discovery fails, this new callback will be called
so P2P users can react to the failure.
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Since the peer may not be in Listen state when the provision discovery
request is sent, try to send the request again number of times when in
IDLE state. This was already done when p2p_find is in progress, but this
commit adds retries to the case where no other P2P operations are in
progress.
Signed-off-by: Jayant Sane <jayant.sane@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This can be used to avoid rejection of first two 4-way handshakes every
time hostapd (or wpa_supplicant in AP/IBSS mode) is restarted. A new
command line parameter, -e, can now be used to specify an entropy file
that will be used to maintain the needed state.
Some of these are required for proper functionality (like
get_seqnum); others may not be needed yet, but including them
allows some extra ifdef/endif blocks to be removed.
.set_rate_sets is not defined for non-hostapd, which prevents
configuring basic_rates when working as P2P GO.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
If the driver wrapper is setting up the interface up only at commit(),
UPnP initialization fails. Fix that by moving UPnP setup to happen after
the driver commit() call.
Windows 7 uses incorrect way of figuring out AP's WPS capabilities by
acting as a Registrar and using M1 from the AP. The config methods
attribute in that message is supposed to indicate only the configuration
method supported by the AP in Enrollee role, i.e., to add an external
Registrar. For that case, PBC shall not be used and as such, the
PushButton config method is removed from M1 by default. If pbc_in_m1=1
is included in the configuration file, the PushButton config method is
left in M1 (if included in config_methods parameter) to allow Windows 7
to use PBC instead of PIN (e.g., from a label in the AP).
cfg80211 maintains separate BSS table entries for APs if the same
BSSID,SSID pair is seen on multiple channels. wpa_supplicant does
not use frequency as a separate key in the BSS table, so filter out
duplicated entries. Prefer associated BSS entry in such a case in
order to get the correct frequency into the BSS table.
It may take some time for the TX status to be delivered for a
(Re)Association Response frame and if any Data frames are received
during that time, they may end up getting dropped as Class 3 frames in
not-associated state. This results in a Disassociation frame being sent
to the station and it assuming that the association has been lost.
Work around the issue by remembering that the (Re)Association Request
has already been accepted and skip the Deauth/Disassoc sending because
of the possible Class 3 frames before the TX status callback is
received.
In theory, these calls could fail, but it is not really likely to
happen in practice in the use case here. Anyway, check that they do
not return an error before accepting the length of the file.
This function does not get called with in_data == NULL in practice, but
it seems to be at least partly prepared for that case, so better make it
consistent by handling the NULL value throughout the function.
Both the SA and IEs from the received Probe Request frames must be
included and the Probe Request RX callback functions may assume that
these are not NULL.
The change to use wpa_dbg() in wpa_sm_parse_own_wpa_ie() could result
in a NULL pointer dereference if the function were called when WPA
state machine has not been initialized. While this cannot really
happen in practice, it is better to be prepared for that since that
was the case before the wpa_dbg() change.
The size_t value here can be 64-bit and result in implicit sign
extension. In this particular case, that gets masked out by
host_to_be32(), so there is no practical difference, but it is better
to get rid of the 64-bit variable explicitly.
The supportedTypes parameter is a list of TNC_MessageType values
and the buffer to be copied should use size of TNC_MessageType, not
TNC_MessageTypeList. In practice, these are of same length on most
platforms, so this is not a critical issue, but anyway, the correct
type should be used.
This avoids reading past the end of the IE buffer should the FTIE
be too short. In addition, one debug hexdump was using uninitialized
pointer to the FTIE buffer, so fixed it to use the pointer from the
parse data.
AF_INET6 is not always enabled by default, so use AF_INET instead. In
addition, use the old fixed length, 2048, as a failover value if the
sysctl fails for any reason.
Commit 03d3f28a69 broke initialization of
EAPOL authenticator state machines since an error value from
wpa_auth_sta_key_mgmt() (-1) was not handled properly and the fixed
wpa_key_mgmt_wpa_psk() identified the value as a PSK-based AKM because
of all bits being set to 1. The special error value needs to handled
separately to avoid skipping EAPOL state machine initialization.
These can be used in some cases with a bitfield having multiple
AKMs enabled (e.g., WPA-PSK and WPA-PSK-SHA256). Address those
cases by checking whether any of the matching AKM are included.
When the SME is in the driver or cfg80211, the automatic selection
of auth_alg is done by leaving out the NL80211_ATTR_AUTH_TYPE
attribute from the NL80211_CMD_CONNECT command.
This should fix EAPOL reauthentication and rekeying timeout issues
with Intel clients when using WMM (e.g., with IEEE 802.11n). These
stations do not seem to be able to handle EAPOL data frames as
non-QoS Data frames after the initial setup.
This adds STA flags to hapd_send_eapol() driver op to allow
driver_nl80211.c to mark the EAPOL frames as QoS Data frame
when injecting it through the monitor interface.
This provides a means for the supplicant to directly request signal
quality metrics from the driver. This is useful, for example for
background scan algorithms that might ask desire this information
out-of-band with CQM events.
Signed-off-by: Paul Stewart <pstew@google.com>
When building IE from an empty string and CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is
not defined, redundant 2 bytes are being added to the string.
We have to return right after building the "dummy" string.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
Some deployed supplicants update their SNonce for every receive
EAPOL-Key message 1/4 even when these messages happen during the
same 4-way handshake. Furthermore, some of these supplicants fail
to use the first SNonce that they sent and derive an incorrect PTK
using another SNonce that does not match with what the authenticator
is using from the first received message 2/4. This results in
failed 4-way handshake whenever the EAPOL-Key 1/4 retransmission
timeout is reached. The timeout for the first retry is fixed to
100 ms in the IEEE 802.11 standard and that seems to be short
enough to make it difficult for some stations to get the response
out before retransmission.
Work around this issue by increasing the initial EAPOL-Key 1/4
timeout by 1000 ms (i.e., total timeout of 1100 ms) if the station
acknowledges reception of the EAPOL-Key frame. If the driver does
not indicate TX status for EAPOL frames, use longer initial
timeout (1000 ms) unconditionally.
Store Manufacturer, Model Name, Model Number, and Serial Number
attributes for P2P peers and expose these through the existing
peer information mechanisms.
Previously, a bug in GKeyDoneStations count would remain in effect
until the authenticator is restarted. Make this more robust by
clearing the station count before each rekeying setup. While this
is not really supposed to be needed, there has been bugs in this
area in the past and it is safer to make the implementation recover
from such an issue automatically.
If the STA to be freed is still included in GKeyDoneStations count,
decrement the count when the STA is freed. This does not happen in
AP mode since there is enough time to go through the authenticator
state machine to clear the STA. However, in the current RSN IBSS
implementation, the authenticator state for the STA is freed in a
way that does not allow the state machine to go through the clearing.
To address this, make sure that wpa_free_sta_sm() decrements the
GKeyDoneStations count if the STA happened to be in the process of
GTK rekeying.
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_RSN_TESTING in .config and rsn_testing=1 in
hostapd.conf can now be used to enable a testing mode that adds
extensions to RSN element. This can be used to check whether
station implementations are incompatible with future extensions
to the RSN element.
The AP code might, currently only in the case of HT40, defer actual
enabling to after a scan. In this case, the wpa_s AP code gets confused.
Add a callback for it to use and make it use it to finish only when the
setup has actually completed.
With appropriate hacks in place this allows using HT40 in P2P mode.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Make the P2P code keep track of WPS vendor extensions received from
peers so they can be exposed via DBus later.
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This adds the ability to add WPS vendor extension attributes in P2P
frames, like GO Negotiation and Probe Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This adds the ability to add WPS vendor extensions to an AP (or GO).
They will be added to the WSC IE(s) in Beacon and Probe Response frames.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Instead of converting back and forth from the string representation,
always use the binary representation internally.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Use only the UUID-E to remove active PBC session(s) at the completion of
successful PBC protocol run. This fixes potential issues with Enrollees
that use multiple MAC addresses and as such, can get multiple entries in
the PBC session list.
Add Secondary Device Type List attribute in WSC IE for P2P
Probe Response frames if one or more secondary device types
are configured.
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The secondary device type list is an optional attribute in the WSC IE.
Signed-off-by: Jean-Michel Bachot <jean-michelx.bachot@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Currently hostapd will force HT Mixed Mode if at least one non-GF STA is
associated. This will force _all_ HT transmissions to be protected.
802.11n-2009 doesn't require HT Mixed Mode to be used in case of non-GF
STAs but instead the HT information element contains a flag if non-GF
STAs are present. All STAs are required to protect GF transmissions in
that case. Hence, setting HT Mixed mode if non-GF STAs are present is
superfluous.
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
Use a specific return value, WPS-PBC-OVERLAP, to indicate a reason
for rejecting a wps_pbc command in wpa_supplicant AP mode if the
PBC mode cannot be started due to PBC session overlap having been
detected during monitor time.
This allows the user to complete WPS provisioning using PBC by
selected a specific Enrollee even if there are other Enrollees
in active PBC mode at the same time. The other Enrollees will be
rejected should they try to connect at the same time.
Ignore possible mismatches in the source address of the frame and only
use UUID-E to check whether a Probe Request or M1 is from the same
Enrollee when figuring out whether there is PBC session overlap. This
is needed to avoid potential issues with Enrollee devices that may have
multiple interfaces indicating active PBC state.
If there is already a link the requested peer, request start of
renegotiation instead of completely new link. This seems to be needed
to allow some driver to accept the trigger for a new negotiation.
tdls_testing 0x80 can now be used to request wpa_supplicant to send
a TDLS Setup Request frame (i.e., try to initiate TDLS setup)
whenever a TDLS Setup Request frame has been received from a peer.
Blindly clearing all struct wpa_tdls_peer members is a risky
operation since it could easily clear pointers to allocated
memory, etc. information that really should not be removed.
Instead of hoping that new code gets added here to restore
the important variables, reverse the approach and only clear
structure members one by one when needed.
This allows the same code path to be used for both protected and
unprotected configurations to limit need for duplicated code in
both the driver and wpa_supplicant.
This adds code for validating that the same Key Lifetime is used
throughout TPK handshake and enables TPK lifetime expiration and
renewal/teardown. These part seem to be working, but the actual
handling of TDLS Setup Confirm and renewal are not fully
functional yet.
tdls_testing bits:
bit 3 = use short TPK lifetime (301 seconds)
bit 4 = use wrong TPK lifetime in TDLS Setup Response
bit 5 = use wrong TPK lifetime in TDLS Setup Confirm
These special test cases can be configured at run time with "wpa_cli
tdls_testing <value>" where <value> is an integer (either as a decimal
or as a hex value with 0x prefix) bitmap of special features with
following bits available at this point:
bit 0 = long frame (add dummy subelement to make FTIE very long)
bit 1 = use alternative RSN IE (different RSN capab value and no extra
replay counters)
bit 2 = send incorrect BSSID in Link Identifier of TDLS Setup Request
(e.g., 1 = long FTIE, 2 = different RSN IE, 3 = both of those)
This is disabled by default and can be enabled for the build by
adding the following line to .config:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_TDLS_TESTING
This allows driver wrappers to indicate whether the association was
done using Association Request/Response or with Reassociation
Request/Response frames.
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_VALGRIND can now be used to enable support for
Valgrind client requests to help in removing some non-issues from
Valgrind reports. This is mainly aimed at allowing unknown ioctl
results to be marked as defined data.
If the os_time_t variable used for the expiration time (seconds)
overflows when the registered timeout value is being added,
assume that the event would happen after an infinite time, i.e.,
would not really happen in practice. This fixes issues with
long key timeouts getting converted to immediate expiration due
to the overflow.
os_snprintf() can be a preprocessor macro and according to
C99 (6.10.3 clause 11) the results of having preprocessor directives
inside the macro arguments is undefined.
Build options can now be used to replace the location of client
sockets for UNIX domain socket control interface:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_CTRL_IFACE_CLIENT_DIR=\"/tmp\"
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_CTRL_IFACE_CLIENT_PREFIX=\"wpa_ctrl_\"
The buffer size for routing socket is fixed to 2048.
This patch fix it to obtain the size from OS.
This patch worked on x86 platform with NetBSD 5.0.2.
This allows keystore:// prefix to be used with client_cert and
private_key configuration parameters.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
This will only retrieve information about peers that have been fully
discovered, not peers that are only half-discovered based on their Probe
Request frames.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The DBus code will want to have perfect matching of dev_found and the
dev_lost it adds so it doesn't need to keep track internally. Enable
that with a new flag in the core that tracks whether we have already
notified about this -- the existing users can ignore it.
The part where this is always set to 1 if the new device is discovered
by a driver that has P2P in the driver is buggy -- the driver should
feed the P2P peer database and then that should feed the notification
here instead.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This embeds some information about each P2P peer that will be publically
visible in a struct that is shared.
The dev_found notification function is also passed the new struct, which
requires some work for the driver-based P2P management.
Signed-off-by: Konguraj(Raj) Kulanthaivel <konguraj.kulanthaivel@intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Fabien Marotte <fabienx.marotte@linux.intel.com>
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When using multiple vifs and dynamic vlan tagging is enabled on any
interface, the created AP VLAN interfaces get the BSSID of the first
AP mode interface instead of the BSSID of the corresponding AP mode
interface.
Example:
wlan0 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x0
wlan1 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x1
Assume a STA connects to the AP interface wlan1 and gets a dynamic
VLAN tag 100 assigned by the RADIUS server. Hostapd will create an AP
VLAN interface wlan1.100 but doesn't set an address for this interface
which results in wlan1.100 getting the same address as wlan0:
wlan1.100 - xx:xx:xx:xx:x0
As a result the STA that was moved to wlan1.100 isn't able to finish its
4-way handshake since mac80211 won't pass its frames to wlan1.100 due to
the different address.
To fix this issue make use of the address of the AP interface when
creating an AP VLAN interface.
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
Add MAC addresses for stations and use wpa_msg instead of printf
methods to make it easier to grep logs and find messages for the
station in question.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
If parsing of the certificate or private key succeeds using any of
the tried encoding types, clear the OpenSSL error queue without
showing the pending errors in debug log since they do not really
provide any useful output and can be confusing.
This patch fixes a problem I had when I tried to connect
an embedded system [wpa_supplicant, CONFIG_TLS=internal]
to my TLS secured network.
TLSv1: Send CertificateVerify
TLSv1: CertificateVerify hash - hexdump(len=36): ha .. ha
PKCS #1: pkcs1_generate_encryption_block - Invalid buffer lengths \
(modlen=512 outlen=454 inlen=36)
It turned out that a fixed 1000 byte message buffer was just
a little bit too small for the 4096 bit RSA certificates
I'm using.
Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
In multi BSS setups it wasn't possible to set up an HT BSS in
conjunction with a WEP/TKIP BSS. HT needed to be turned off entirely
to allow WEP/TKIP BSSes to be used.
In order to allow HT BSSes to coexist with non-HT WEP/TKIP BSSes add a
new BSS conf attribute "disable_11n" which disables HT capabilities on a
single BSS by suppressing HT IEs in the beacon and probe response
frames. Furthermore, mark all STAs associated to a WEP/TKIP BSS as
non-HT STAs. The disable_11n parameter is used internally; no new entry
is parsed from hostapd.conf.
This allows a non-HT WEP/TKIP BSS to coexist with a HT BSS without
having to disable HT mode entirely. Nevertheless, all STAs associated to
the WEP/TKIP BSS will only be served as if they were non-HT STAs.
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
Use l2_packet with Ethernet header included so that the source
address for RRB packets can be forced to be the local BSSID. This
fixes problems where unexpected bridge interface address may end
up getting used and the recipient of the frame dropping it as
unknown R0KH/R1KH.
This is needed to keep kernel and hostapd in sync. In addition,
the obsolete entry in hostapd prevented use of Deauthentication
or Disassociation frame with reason code 6/7 mechanism to indicate
to the STA that there is no association if the STA missed the
broadcast Deauthentication frame for any reason.
The internal pointer to RADIUS client configuration needs to be
updated whenever a new hostapd configuration is loaded. Without
this, freed memory may be dereferenced and this can result in
segmentation faults.
This converts number of debugging messages to use wpa_msg() in order
to allow the interface name to be shown with the messages.
A new function, wpa_dbg(), is introduced to allow
CONFIG_NO_STDOUT_DEBUG=y builds to remove the debug strings. This is
otherwise identical with wpa_msg(), but it gets compiled out if stdout
debugging is disabled.
This is needed to allows WPS PBC session overlap detection to work
with drivers that process Probe Request frames internally. This
code is is run in hostapd, but the wpa_supplicant AP mode did not
have call to the hostapd_probe_req_rx() function even though it
registered handlers for hostapd Probe Request RX callbacks.
An optional parameter, p2p_dev_addr, can now be given to WPS_PBC
command on P2P GO to indicate that only the P2P device with the
specified P2P Device Address is allowed to connect using PBC. If
any other device tries to use PBC, a session overlap is indicated
and the negotiation is rejected with M2D. The command format for
specifying the address is "WPS_PBC p2p_dev_addr=<address>", e.g.,
WPS_PBC p2p_dev_addr=02:03:04:05:06:07
In addition, show the PBC session overlap indication as a WPS failure
event on an AP/GO interface. This particular new case shows up as
"WPS-FAIL msg=4 config_error=12".
This makes log files much more readable if multiple interfaces
are being controlled by the same process. The interface name is
added to stdout/file/syslog entries, but not to the messages
sent to control interface monitors to avoid issues with parsing
in external programs.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Add a callback for station's authorized transitions
to allow wpa_supplicant to emit events in DBus.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
To enable making state change notifications on the WLAN_STA_AUTHORIZED
flag, introduce ap_sta_set_authorized(), and to reduce use of the flag
itself also add a wrapper for testing the flag: ap_sta_is_authorized().
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
If the driver advertises max_remain_on_chan data, use it instead of
the hardcoded value of 5000. Keep the default at 5000 since that is the
value used by earlier versions of cfg80211/mac80211 and not advertised
in nl80211 for those.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
When authenticating, and the interface type is not already
NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION, we need to call wpa_driver_nl80211_set_mode()
only once. Remove the excessive call.
Signed-off-by: Eliad Peller <eliad@wizery.com>
We need to call this function after having completed the neighboring
channel scan to figure out whether HT40 can be used and if so, which
channel is the secondary channel.
ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab is called after ieee80211n_check_40mhz in
function hostapd_check_ht_capab. ieee80211n_check_40mhz can return 1 in
a valid scenario where the initialization is completed in a callback. In
this case ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab is skipped and hostapd does not
check the ht capabilities reported by the driver. Fix this issue making
sure ieee80211n_supported_ht_capab gets called.
Signed-off-by: Nishant Sarmukadam <nishants@marvell.com>
If WMM is not disabled explicitly (wmm_enabled=0 in hostapd.conf),
enable WMM automatically whenever HT (ieee80211n) is enabled. Use
the default WMM parameters for AP TX queues and the EDCA parameters
advertised for stations in WMM IE if no overriding values are
included in the configuration.
We can use the P2P interface types to check if the driver supports P2P
and to tell the kernel that a given interface is going to be used for
P2P (when it is created).
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
There is no real reason to maintain these in the current development
branch anymore. If someone really needs support for the obsolete
driver interfaces, these can be found in older wpa_supplicant
branches.
driver_atmel.c
- vendor-specific interface for ATMEL AT76C5XXx cards
- for some old out-of-tree driver; not for the upstream atmel*
drivers
driver_ndiswrapper.c
- vendor-specific interface for an out-of-tree driver
- ndiswrapper should work with driver_wext.c, too
driver_ipw.c
- vendor-specific interface for old ipw2100/2200 driver
- the upstream driver works with driver_wext.c (and does not work
with the old interface)
driver_hermes.c
- vendor driver that was not even included in the main wpa_supplicant
releases
In order to enable protection mechanisms for different HT opmodes the
driver needs to be aware of the current HT opmode that is calculated by
hostapd. Hence, pass the current opmode to the nl80211 driver via
the bss attribute NL80211_ATTR_BSS_HT_OPMODE.
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
tdls_prohibit=1 and tdls_prohibit_chan_switch=1 and now be used to
disable use of TDLS or TDLS channel switching in the BSS using
extended cabilities IE as defined in IEEE 802.11z.
Make sure that received management frames are long enough before
processing them. This avoids a potential segmentation fault if a
driver delivers an invalid frame all the way to hostapd.
The changes are:
1. the word "and" in the hunting-and-pecking string passed to the KDF
should be capitalized.
2. the primebitlen used in the KDF should be a short not an int.
3. the computation of MK in hostap is based on an older version of the
draft and is not the way it's specified in the RFC.
4. the group being passed into computation of the Commit was not in
network order.
Previously, only the Configuration Error values were indicated in
WPS-FAIL events. Since those values are defined in the specification
it is not feasible to extend them for indicating other errors. Add
a new error indication value that is internal to wpa_supplicant and
hostapd to allow other errors to be indicated.
Use the new mechanism to indicate if negotiation fails because of
WEP or TKIP-only configurations being disallows by WPS 2.0.
This needs to be done both in the more normal location in
p2p_timeout_connect_listen() (internal timeout after driver event) and
in p2p_listen_end() as a workaround for the case where the driver event
is delayed to happen after the internal timeout.
Previously, both NULL and ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff addr were used in various
places to indicate default/broadcast keys. Make this more consistent
and useful by defining NULL to mean default key (i.e., used both for
unicast and broadcast) and ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff to indicate broadcast
key (i.e., used only with broadcast).
When hostapd is removing a virtual BSS interface, the loop here was
incorrectly not updating the iterator during list traversal and
ended up in an infinite loop in some cases.
Use NULL instead of (u8 *) "" as the seq value and make sure the
driver wrapper implementations can handle NULL value. This was
previously already done in number of places, but not everywhere.
wpa_supplicant seems to crash from time to time on a NetBSD 4.0 MIPS
platform. The root cause turned out to be a MIPS alignment issue.
In my wpa_supplicant crash case, in function
wpa_driver_bsd_event_receive (from driver_bsd.c), the buf[2048] address
is started from i.e. 0x7fffd546, which is not 4 bytes aligned. Later
when it is casted to (struct if_msghdr *), and rtm->rtm_flags is used.
rtm->rtm_flags is "int" type, but its address is not 4 bytes aligned.
This is because the start address of rtm is not 4 bytes aligned.
Unfortunately in NetBSD MIPS kernel (unlike Linux MIPS kernel emulates
unaligned access in its exception handler), the default behavior is to
generate a memory fault to the application that accesses unaligned
memory address. Thus comes the early mentioned wpa_supplicant crash. An
interesting note is when I'm using the wpa_supplicant version 0.4.9, I
never saw this problem. Maybe the stack layout is different. But I
didn't look into details.
I used below patch to resolve this problem. Now it runs correctly for at
least several hours. But you might have a better fix (maybe we can use
malloc/free so that it is at least cache line aligned?). I'm also not
sure if other drivers should have the same problem.
This adds partial callbacks and events to allow P2P management to be
implemented in a driver/firmware. This is not yet complete and is
very much subject to change in the future.
CONFIG_WPS_REG_DISABLE_OPEN=y can be used to configure wpa_supplicant
to disable open networks by default when wps_reg command is used to
learn the current AP settings. When this is enabled, there will be a
WPS-OPEN-NETWORK ctrl_iface event and the user will need to explicitly
enable the network (e.g., with "select_network <id>") to connect to
the open network.
If the underlying driver supports off-channel TX, it will now be used by
the nl80211 driver wrapper, setting WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_OFFCHANNEL_TX
accordingly.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
With the new kernel functionality coming to Linux to allow off-channel
TX, we can take advantage of that in the P2P code that currently uses
remain-on-channel. If a driver advertises support for it, it will be
asked to handle off-channel TX by itself.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
The nl80211 driver can report low ACK condition (in fact it reports
complete loss right now only). Use that, along with a config option, to
disconnect stations when the data connection is not working properly,
e.g., due to the STA having went outside the range of the AP. This is
disabled by default and can be enabled with disassoc_low_ack=1 in
hostapd or wpa_supplicant configuration file.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
ClientTimeout changes from EAP peer methods were not supposed to
change behavior for other EAP peer methods or even other sessions
of the same method. Re-initialize ClientTimeout whenever an EAP
peer method is initialized to avoid this. This addresses problems
where WPS (EAP-WSC) reduces the timeout and consecutive EAP runs
may fail due to too small timeout.
If the peer you want to connect to is no longer available (does not
acknowledge frames) when wpa_supplicant sends GO Negotition Request
frames, retransmission of this frame is done until the associated
p2p_device structure is removed on timeout. In that case, no signal
is emitted to inform the GO Negotiation has failed.
When sending an Invitation Request frame, the same retransmission
mechanism is in place but limit the transmission to 100 and hitting
the limit generates an event.
This patch adds the same mechanism as the one in place for Invitation
Request, but with limit of 120 to match the existing wait_count for
for GO Negotiation.
If a station received unprotected Deauthentication or Disassociation
frame with reason code 6 or 7 from the current AP, there may be a
mismatch in association state between the AP and STA. Verify whether
this is the case by using SA Query procedure. If not response is
received from the AP, deauthenticate.
This implementation is only for user space SME with
driver_nl80211.c.
Some new code will require access to P2P group members, so add API to
retrieve the number of members and iterate the members themselves.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
If there is a pending GO Negotiation when p2p_cancel is used,
unauthorize the peer to avoid immediate reconnection from being
accepted without a new p2p_connect command.
This can be used by external programs (e.g., wlantest_cli) to inject
raw frames (hex dump of the frame header and body). The data can be
requested to be sent as-is or protected with the current key.
Previously, pairwise and group cipher suites were configured only
when kernel SME (nl80211 connect API) was used. However, mac80211
needs this information even in the user space SME case for one
thing: to disable HT when TKIP/WEP is used. Add
NL80211_ATTR_CIPHER_SUITES_PAIRWISE to fix this special case with
user space SME. This allows mac80211 to disable HT properly when
the AP is configured with configuration that is not allowed.
This add preliminary code for setting the per-STA RX GTK for
RSN IBSS when nl80211 drivers. For some reason, this does not
seem to fully work, but at least driver_nl80211.c is now aware of
what kind of key is being set and the whatever is missing from
making this key configuration go through should be specific to
nl80211/cfg80211.
The frame needs to be sent from an individual (non-group) address,
so drop invalid frames before sending Deauth/Disassoc frames to
not associated STAs.
One of the pointers to the PAC buffer was not updated after realloc
and if the realloc ended up returning new pointer, the *pos pointer
was still pointing at the old location (i.e., freed memory at
this point).
When controlling multiple virtual interfaces on the same physical
radio, share the scan results events with sibling interfaces. This
decreases the time it takes to connect many virtual interfaces.
This is currently only supported on Linux with cfg80211-based
drivers when using nl80211 or wext driver interface.
Signed-off-by: Ben Greear <greearb@candelatech.com>
Some drivers are not providing exactly reliable error codes (e.g.,
with WEXT), but others may actually indicate reliable information.
Allow driver wrappers to indicate if that is the case and use
optimizations if so. For now, this improves nl80211 with
NL80211_CMD_CONNECT for a case where connection request fails.
driver_param=use_p2p_group_interface=1 can now be used to test
nl80211-drivers with separate P2P group interface. In other words,
the main interface (e.g., wlan0) is reserved for P2P management
operations and non-P2P connections and a new group interface (e.g.,
p2p-wlan0-0) is created for the P2P group.
This implementation is very minimal, i.e., it only support address
allocation for a single P2P group interface (if the driver does not
handle this internally). In addition, not all functionality has yet
been tested, so for now, this is disabled by default and needs that
special driver_param to enable.
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_P2P_MGMT_AND_NON_P2P flag can now be used to
indicate that the initial interface (e.g., wlan0) is used for
P2P management operations and potentially non-P2P connections.
This is otherwise identical to
WPA_DRIVER_FLAGS_P2P_DEDICATED_INTERFACE, but the possibility of
non-P2P connections makes some operations differ.
Getting rid of these inline functions seems to reduce the code size
quite a bit, so convert the most commonly used hostapd driver ops to
function calls.
This is not needed anymore and just makes things more difficult
to understand, so move the remaining function pointers to direct
function calls and get rid of the struct hostapd_driver_ops.
send_eapol, set_key, read_sta_data, sta_clear_stats,
set_radius_acl_auth, set_radius_acl_expire, and set_beacon
to use inline functions instead of extra abstraction.
Commit bf65bc638f started the path to
add this new abstraction for driver operations in AP mode to allow
wpa_supplicant to control AP mode operations. At that point, the
extra abstraction was needed, but it is not needed anymore since
hostapd and wpa_supplicant share the same struct wpa_driver_ops.
Start removing the unneeded abstraction by converting
send_mgmt_frame() to an inline function, hostapd_drv_send_mlme().
This is similar to the design that is used in wpa_supplicant and
that was used in hostapd in the past (hostapd_send_mgmt_frame()
inline function).
driver.h defines these functions to return 0 on success, not
number of bytes transmitted. Most callers are checking "< 0" for
error condition, but not all. Address this by following the driver
API specification on 0 meaning success.
On Linux, verify that the kernel entropy pool is capable of providing
strong random data before allowing WPA/WPA2 connection to be
established. If 20 bytes of data cannot be read from /dev/random,
force first two 4-way handshakes to fail while collecting entropy
into the internal pool in hostapd. After that, give up on /dev/random
and allow the AP to function based on the combination of /dev/urandom
and whatever data has been collected into the internal entropy pool.
wlan0: RADIUS No authentication server configured
MEMLEAK[0x999feb8]: len 1040
WPA_TRACE: memleak - START
[3]: ./hostapd(radius_msg_new+0x33) [0x8074f43]
radius_msg_new() ../src/radius/radius.c:117
[4]: ./hostapd() [0x806095e]
ieee802_1x_encapsulate_radius() ../src/ap/ieee802_1x.c:439
ieee802_1x_aaa_send() ../src/ap/ieee802_1x.c:1496
For example, this error occured when I used WPS hostapd without
"eap_server=1" definition in configuration file.
By default, make hostapd and wpa_supplicant maintain an internal
entropy pool that is fed with following information:
hostapd:
- Probe Request frames (timing, RSSI)
- Association events (timing)
- SNonce from Supplicants
wpa_supplicant:
- Scan results (timing, signal/noise)
- Association events (timing)
The internal pool is used to augment the random numbers generated
with the OS mechanism (os_get_random()). While the internal
implementation is not expected to be very strong due to limited
amount of generic (non-platform specific) information to feed the
pool, this may strengthen key derivation on some devices that are
not configured to provide strong random numbers through
os_get_random() (e.g., /dev/urandom on Linux/BSD).
This new mechanism is not supposed to replace proper OS provided
random number generation mechanism. The OS mechanism needs to be
initialized properly (e.g., hw random number generator,
maintaining entropy pool over reboots, etc.) for any of the
security assumptions to hold.
If the os_get_random() is known to provide strong ramdom data (e.g., on
Linux/BSD, the board in question is known to have reliable source of
random data from /dev/urandom), the internal hostapd random pool can be
disabled. This will save some in binary size and CPU use. However, this
should only be considered for builds that are known to be used on
devices that meet the requirements described above. The internal pool
is disabled by adding CONFIG_NO_RANDOM_POOL=y to the .config file.
This commit adds a new wrapper, random_get_bytes(), that is currently
defined to use os_get_random() as is. The places using
random_get_bytes() depend on the returned value being strong random
number, i.e., something that is infeasible for external device to
figure out. These values are used either directly as a key or as
nonces/challenges that are used as input for key derivation or
authentication.
The remaining direct uses of os_get_random() do not need as strong
random numbers to function correctly.
This adds more time for the system entropy pool to be filled before
requesting random data for generating the WPA/WPA2 encryption keys.
This can be helpful especially on embedded devices that do not have
hardware random number generator and may lack good sources of
randomness especially early in the bootup sequence when hostapd is
likely to be started.
GMK and Key Counter are still initialized once in the beginning to
match the RSN Authenticator state machine behavior and to make sure
that the driver does not transmit broadcast frames unencrypted.
However, both GMK (and GTK derived from it) and Key Counter will be
re-initialized when the first station connects and is about to
enter 4-way handshake.
The example GMK-to-GTK derivation described in the IEEE 802.11 standard
is marked informative and there is no protocol reason for following it
since this derivation is done only on the AP/Authenticator and does not
need to match with the Supplicant. Mix in more data into the derivation
process to get more separation from GMK.
The previous commit broke completion in various places. The proper
way of handling the completion of full word is to verify whether
there are more than one possible match at that point.
Completion needs to be done even if the full word has been entered.
In addition, fix the space-after-full-word to properly allocate room
for the extra character when completion is used in the middle of the
string.
This adds new commands for wlantest_cli to request wlantest to
inject frames. This version can only send out Authentication
frames and unprotected SA Query Request frames, but there is
now place to add more frames and encryption with future commits.
ap_setup_locked=2 can now be used to enable a special mode where
WPS ER can learn the current AP settings, but cannot change then.
In other words, the protocol is allowed to continue past M2, but
is stopped at M7 when AP is in this mode. WPS IE does not
advertise AP Setup Locked in this case to avoid interoperability
issues.
In wpa_supplicant, use ap_setup_locked=2 by default. Since the AP PIN
is disabled by default, this does not enable any new functionality
automatically. To allow the read-only ER to go through the protocol,
wps_ap_pin command needs to be used to enable the AP PIN.
There is no point in maintaining two almost identical versions
of this parser. Move WPA IE parser into wpa_common.c similarly
to what was already the case with RSN IE parse.
When multiple wireless interfaces are used with WPS, the UPnP
subscriptions need to be removed whenever a matching Registrar
instance gets removed. This avoids a segfault due to access to
freed memory during hostapd shutdown.
In addition, the UPnP interface instance structure needs to be
freed to avoid memory leak.
WPS external Registrars can get confused about multiple UPnP
instances (one per radio) on a dual-concurrent APs. Simplify the
design by sharing a single UPnP state machine for all wireless
interfaces controlled by hostapd. This matches with the previous
changes that made a single command enable WPS functionality on
all interfaces.
This is relatively minimal change to address the sharing of the
state among multiple struct hostapd_data instances. More cleanup
can be done separately to remove unnecessary copies of information.
When the peer does not include our initial preference in the Channel
List attribute during GO Negotiation, try to use the best channel of
the other band as the new preference instead of falling back to the
first channel in the intersection.
The driver wrapper may now indicate the preferred channel (e.g., based
on scan results) on both 2.4 GHz and 5 GHz bands (and an overall best
frequency). When setting up a GO, this preference information is used
to select the operating channel if configuration does not include
hardcoded channel. Similarly, this information can be used during
GO Negotiation to indicate preference for a specific channel based
on current channel conditions.
p2p_group_add command can now use special values (freq=2 and freq=5)
to indicate that the GO is to be started on the specified band.
Commit d8d940b746 introduced a regression
that prevented TSN APs from being used with WEP since the AP was
rejected if it advertised WPA or RSN IE when we were configured to use
WEP. Resolve this by checking whether the AP is advertising a TSN, i.e.,
whether the AP allows WEP to be used as a group cipher. If so, allow
the AP to be selected if we are configured to use static WEP or
IEEE 802.1X (non-WPA).
It should be noted that this is still somewhat more restricted in AP
selection than earlier wpa_supplicant branches (0.7.x or older) that
ignore the WPA/RSN IE completely when configured for non-WPA.
This tool can be used to capture IEEE 802.11 frames either from a
monitor interface for realtime capturing or from pcap files for
offline analysis. This version is only adding basic infrastructure for
going through the frames and parsing their headers.
Commit c3fc47ea8e fixed EAP passthrough
server to allow Logoff/Re-authentication to be used. However, it
broke EAP standalone server while doing that. Fix this by reverting
the earlier fix and by clearing the EAP Identity information in the
EAP server code whenever an EAPOL-Start or EAPOL-Logoff packet is
received.
We need to drop the pending frame to avoid issues with the new GO
Negotiation, e.g., when the pending frame was from a previous attempt at
starting a GO Negotiation.
These are not used by any driver wrapper, i.e., only the four
data queues (BK, BE, VI, VO) are configurable. Better remove these
so that there is no confusion about being able to configure
something additional.
Pass data frames from unknown STAs to hostapd in order to reply with
a Deauthentication or Disassociation frame. This fixes compliance
with IEEE Std 802.11-2007, 11.3.
Furthermore, this does not cause a lot of overhead (at least with
mac80211 drivers) since mac80211 does not pass all data frames (but
at least from unauthenticated and unassociated STAs) to cooked monitor
interfaces.
Tested with rt2800pci on a MIPS board.
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
drivers.mak is shared between hostapd and wpa_supplicant and
compiling them together may create "wrong" flags.
Signed-off-by: Dmitry Shmidt <dimitrysh@google.com>
We are not actually interested in the PD Response in join-a-group
case, so there is no point in trying to send PD Request until the
response is received. This avoids an extra PD getting started after
a join-a-group operation in some cases.
This is needed to avoid problems with other applications setting and
leaving the interface to IF_OPER_DORMANT state. In AP mode, the interface
is ready immediately after the keys are set, so we better make sure the
DORMANT state does not prevent normal operations after that.
This is needed to avoid issues with APs that restart their UPnP,
e.g., when ER reconfigures them. The previously known settings are
now cached and taken into use if an AP is detected to leave
(ssdp:byebye) and then return.
Verify that the UUID given to wps_er_pbc command is known and only
activate PBC mode on the matching AP. The UUID can be that of the
AP or the station/Enrollee.
Add a new driver event, EVENT_INTERFACE_UNAVAILABLE, for indicating
that the driver is not able to continue operating the virtual
interface in its current mode anymore, e.g., due to operating
channel for GO interface forced to a DFS channel by another virtual
interface.
When this happens for a P2P group interface, the P2P group will
be terminated and P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event shows the reason for
this as follows:
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan0 GO reason=UNAVAILABLE
A new configuration parameter, p2p_group_idle, can now be used to set
idle timeout value for P2P groups in seconds (0 = no timeout). If set,
this values is used to remove P2P group (both GO and P2P client)
interfaces after the group has been idle (no clients/GO seen) for the
configuration duration.
The P2P-GROUP-REMOVED event is now indicating the reason for group
removal when known. For example:
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan0 GO reason=REQUESTED
P2P-GROUP-REMOVED wlan1 client reason=IDLE
Some driver wrappers may end up indicating a disassociation or
deauthentication event without the address of the station, e.g.,
based on a previous non-AP mode event. Avoid crashing hostapd
by verifying that the require address parameter is available in
the event before processing it.
In order to avoid confusing the driver with a new remain-on-channel
request, delay sending of a new Action frame if the driver indicates
Action frame RX diromg a scan.
This is needed to optimize response to GO Negotiation Request frames.
The extra remain-on-channel cancel followed by new remain-on-channel for
the same channel takes too much time with some driver/firmware
designs for the response to go out quickly enough to avoid peer
timing out while waiting for our response.
This command can be used to enroll a network based on a local
network configuration block instead of having to (re-)learn the
current AP settings with wps_er_learn.
This test command is supposed to change the WPS version number in all
places immediately, so make sure that the IEs used in management
frames get updated immediately.
The P2P group component is now tracking of associated stations
in the group and the Group Limit bit in the Group Capabilities
is updated based on whether there is room for new clients in
the group.
The workaround to ignore no ctrl::ack received for GO Negotiation
Confirmation frame was only supposed to be used when the frame was
actually transmitted and just the ack was not received. However, due
to the way the driver failure on transmitting the frame were reported,
this ended up getting applied for all failures in sending the GO
Negotiation Confirmation frame.
Improve this by providing a mechanism to indicate whether send_action
operations fail locally before the frame was actually transmitted or
because of not receiving ack frame after having transmitted the frame.
UPnP event subscriptions are not supposed to be dropped based on
whether events can be delivered quickly enough. Leave dropping to
happen only based on failed deliveries to avoid issues with a burst
of events kicking out still active subscribers.
Do not send more than five Probe Request WLANEvent notifications
per second. Even though the limit should in theory apply to all
WLANEvents, it is better not to drop EAP notifications because
of Probe Request frames and really, the only real reason for
event bursts is Probe Request frames.
Instead of queuing all events for a subscriber, only queue more
important events if delivery of event notifications starts failing.
This allows more time for the subscriber to recover since the maximum
queue length if not reached because of Probe Request frames only.
Instead of dropping the subscription on first failure, allow up to
10 failures before dropping. In addition, drop the callback URLs
one by one instead of full subscription if only one URL is failing.
If CONFIG_DRIVER_WEXT=y is not used in .config, but driver_wext.c
gets pull in to help another driver wrapper, rfkill code needs to
included to fix the build.
Listen to regulatory event messages from kernel and convert them to
internal driver event notifications indicated that the channel list
may have changed.
The AP operation with wpa_supplicant requires an additional callback
to get the needed event information from hostapd side so that
wpa_msg() can be called for wpa_s->parent if needed.
This makes it easier to figure out what could have failed in the
WPS protocol and potentially provide more information for the
user on how to resolve the issue.
The driver wrapper can now indicate whether the driver supports
concurrent operations on multiple channels (e.g., infra STA connection
on 5 GHz channel 36 and P2P group on 2.4 GHz channel 1). If not,
P2P_CONNECT commands will be rejected if they would require
multi-channel concurrency.
The new failure codes for P2P_CONNECT:
FAIL-CHANNEL-UNAVAILABLE:
The requested/needed channel is not currently available (i.e., user has
an option of disconnecting another interface to make the channel
available).
FAIL-CHANNEL-UNSUPPORTED:
The request channel is not available for P2P.
At least D-Link DIR-600 and DIR-825 have been reported to include
an extra octet after the Network Key attribute within a Credential
attribute. This can happen at least when they are provisioning an
open network.
Add a workaround to detect this incorrectly encoded attribute and
to skip the extra octet when parsing such a Credential.
The new nl80211 API means we don't need to use monitor interfaces. This
means that the P2P implementation now requires a kernel that has support
for generic management frame (not just Action frame) transmission.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
This is backward compatible since older kernels will ignore the extra
attribute and only allow registration for Action frames.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
libnl has a bug, when binding more than two sockets and releasing one,
it will release the wrong address and then try to reuse it, which fails.
Therefore, we need to reimplement the socket address assignment logic
locally for libnl 1.1.
Signed-off-by: Johannes Berg <johannes.berg@intel.com>
Some sequencies of EAPOL logoff/logon/start messages seem to be
able to get the previous implementation into state where hostapd
would not be able to start reauthentication when external
authentication server is used. The EAP server code would bypass
the initial Identity Request generation and EAPOL code would not
be able to send anything to the authentication server or supplicant
at that point. Work around this by forcing EAP server code to
start with Identity Request after INITIALIZE state even if the
Identity is known.
When a single hostapd process is controlling multiple interfaces,
apply the received or auto-generated configuration changes to all
interfaces that have enabled WPS.
When the same hostapd process is controlling multiple interfaces,
apply WPS commands (push button, add PIN, change AP PIN) to all
interfaces that are configured to use WPS.
A separate build number (etc.) version number postfix can now be
added to the build without having to modify source code files by
defining VERSION_STR_POSTFIX. This can be done, e.g., by adding
following line to .config:
CFLAGS += -DVERSION_STR_POSTFIX=\"-foo\"
Commit 3379a3a795 added a direct
iface->for_each_interface use without verification whether the
function is available. This works with hostapd, but not
wpa_supplicant (which crashes on segfault).
The previous implementation ended up incorrectly assuming that all
40 MHz use cases have secondary channel above the primary one. Fix this
by properly masking the secondary channel offset field and checking its
value.
wpa_supplicant showed signal levels incorrectly with some drivers:
Jun 6 16:29:36 rupert wpa_supplicant[18945]: Current BSS: 00:0d:97:11:40:d6
level=190
Jun 6 16:29:36 rupert wpa_supplicant[18945]: Selected BSS: 00:0d:97:11:50:09
level=192
Judging from output from other tools (iwlist) and the min_diff block
at the end of wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam, it seems these values
should actually be negative. Specifically, if one treats that number
as a signed char instead of unsigned, everything matches up.
To be honest, I've little to no understanding of wireless, but looking
at the source code for wireless-tools (iw_print_stats in iwlib.c), it
seems that the fields of the iw_quality struct need to be decoded
differently depending on various flags. I guess
src/drivers/driver_wext.c should have similar logic in
wext_get_scan_qual.
I wrote a patch that attempts to replicate some of that logic,
although it may be more complicated than is necessary; I think some of
the complexity is for backwards-compatibility, which might not be
necessary depending on wpa_supplicant's dependencies? In any case, it
is attached. Again, I don't know how any of this works, so it's likely
the patch is a bit off. But I think at least the logic to determine
min_diff in wpa_supplicant_need_to_roam would be more accurate if
level were determined correctly.
We need to clear the selected registrar timeout from wps_er_learn
when stopping the protocol run at M7 (previously, this was done only
when WSC_Done was being processed). In addition, we need to cancel
the timeout when a new PBC operation is started.
This is needed to update the pointers maintained within WPS code
to use the new configuration data instead of maintaining pointers
to the old configuration which will be freed. This fixes strings in
UPnP discovery after reconfig (they used to be random freed memory..).
Need to figure out whether the message is from a WSC 2.0 -based
device based on the unencrypted attributes, not the contents of the
encrypted data since the Version2 subelement is only included in the
unencrypted area.
This seems to be the easiest way of making sure the Config Methods
value is compliant with the WSC 2.0 specification without having
to modify the configuration file. However, this will only add the
virtual flag, so the configuration files should really be updated
to specify values that match the AP design.
WPS 2.0 mandates the AP to include WPS IE in (Re)Association Response
if the matching (Re)Association Request included WPS IE. Provide the
needed WPS IE information to the driver_ops API for drivers that
process association frames internally.
Note: This modifies the driver_ops API by adding a new argument to
set_ap_wps_ie().
Instead of build time options (CONFIG_WPS_TESTING_EXTRA_CRED and
CONFIG_WPS_EXTENSIBILITY_TESTING), use a single build option
(CONFIG_WPS_TESTING) and runtime configuration of which testing
operations are enabled. This allows a single binary to be used
for various tests.
The runtime configuration can be done through control interface
with wpa_cli/hostapd_cli commands:
Enable extensibility tests:
set wps_version_number 0x57
Disable extensibility tests (WPS2 build):
set wps_version_number 0x20
Enable extra credential tests:
set wps_testing_dummy_cred 1
Disable extra credential tests:
set wps_testing_dummy_cred 0
If the peer is not authorized for GO Negotiation, wps_method is not
actually set. In that case, it is better to fill in our default
config methods rather than end up leaving the field to be zero.
The Beacon frame must include UUID-E and RF Bands attributes when
in active PBC mode to allow stations to figure out that two BSSes in
PBC mode is not a PBC session overlap.
When generating the UUID based on MAC address, share the same UUID
with all interfaces. This fixes a potential issue with concurrent
dualband APs where the UUID needs to be same for PBC to work properly.
If the msg->device_name buffer is filled from two different sources,
the copy from the P2P Device Info attribute needs to make sure that
the values gets null terminated to match the length of the correct
string should the other place use another string (which is not really
allowed by the spec, but could happen).
A new ctrl_interface command, WPS_CANCEL, can now be used to cancel
a pending or ongoing WPS operation. For now, this is only available
with wpa_supplicant (either in station or AP mode). Similar
functionality should be added for hostapd, too.
If an authorized (p2p_connect used locally) GO Negotiation is
rejected when receiving GO Negotiation Request from the peer,
indicate the failure with a ctrl_interface P2P-GO-NEG-FAILURE
event. Previously, this event was only shown on the peer (i.e.,
the device receiving the GO Negotiation Response with non-zero
Status code).
Since this message now includes P2P Device Info attribute, it is
reasonable to learn the peer data and process the message instead of
rejecting the message.
Add (or complete Probe Request only) P2P peer entry when receiving
Provision Discovery Request from a previously unknown peer. This is
especially of use for a GO when a P2P client is requesting to join
a running group.
The scan operation before Provision Discovery Request may not include
the GO. However, we are likely to have the GO in our P2P peer table,
so use that information to figure out the operating channel if BSS
table entry is not available.
This should not really happen, but it looks like the Listen command
may fail is something else (e.g., a scan) was running at an
inconvenient time. As a workaround, allow new Extended Listen
operation to be started if this state is detected.
The previous version had a bug that could result in NULL pointer
dereference if the P2P IE included Manageability attribute, but no
Capability attribute.
This can happen, e.g., when a P2P client connects to a P2P group
using the infrastructure WLAN interface instead of P2P group
interface. In that case, the P2P client may behave as if the GO
would be a P2P Manager WLAN AP.
This is needed to be able to change parameters for dynamically
created interfaces between the creation of the interface and
association/start AP commands.
Following ctrl_interface commands can now be used:
P2P_SET client_apsd disable
- disable configuration (i.e., use driver default) in client mode
P2P_SET client_apsd <BE>,<BK>,<VI>,<VO>;<max SP Length>
- enable UASPD with specific trigger configuration (0/1) per AC
(max SP Length is currently ignored)
P2P_SET go_apsd disable
- disable configuration (i.e., use driver default) in AP mode
P2P_SET go_apsd <0/1>
- disable/enable APSD in AP mode
P2P specification v1.15 fixed the description of the GAS fragmentation
to not duplicate NQP Query Response Field header in all fragments. This
change makes the fragmentation match with the description in IEEE
802.11u. The change is not backwards compatible with previous P2P
specification versions as far as fragmented SD responses are concerned.
This event indicates the Device Password ID that the peer tried
to use in GO Negotiation. For example:
P2P-GO-NEG-REQUEST 02:40:61:c2:f3:b7 dev_passwd_id=4
If enabled, cross connection allows GO to forward IPv4 packets
using masquerading NAT from the P2P clients in the group to an
uplink WLAN connection. This is disabled by default and can be
enabled with "wpa_cli p2p_set cross_connect 1" on the P2P device
interface.
When we receive Device Discoverability Response, we need to initiate
new GO Negotiation as quickly as possible to avoid the target client
from going back to sleep. Make sure we do not end up in
P2P_CONNECT_LISTEN state (short Listen mode) in this case.
For now, this applies to the test command that can be used to set
periodic NoA (p2p_set noa). The value are stored and periodic NoA
is enabled whenever there are no non-P2P STAs connected to the GO.
While this is not strictly speaking required by the P2P specification
for a not-P2P Managed Device, this can provide useful information for
the P2P manager AP and may be needed to pass certification tests.
While there is no real value in this, the spec seems to mark this
attribute as mandatory from GO, so better included it regardless
of whether we have clients or not (the attribute is empty in case
no clients are connected).
"wpa_cli p2p_set peer_filter <MAC address>" can now be used to
only allow a single P2P Device (based on P2P Device Address) to be
discovered for testing. Setting the address to 00:00:00:00:00:00
disables the filter.
The WSC 2.0 specification moved to use another design for the new
attributes to avoid backwards compatibility issues with some
deployed implementations.
If CONFIG_WPS_STRICT is set, validate WPS IE(s) in management frames and
reject the frames if any of the mandatory attributes is missing or if an
included attribute uses an invalid value. In addition, verify that all
mandatory attributes are included and have valid values in the WSC
messages.
If all the device information attributes use their maximum lengths,
a single WPS IE is not enough to fit in all the data and as such,
we must be able to fragment the data. In addition, the wpabuf needs
to be allocated larger to fit in maximum data.
Instead of using 0x00 as the extra character, use space (' ') to
avoid failing tests that verify that the variable length string
attributes are not null terminated. In addition, this workaround
can now be disabled by defining CONFIG_WPS_STRICT for the build.
This can be done by adding following line to .config:
CFLAGS += -DCONFIG_WPS_STRICT
However, it should be noted that such a build may not interoperate
with some deployed WPS 1.0 -based implementations and as such, is
mainly designed for testing.
Whenever wpa_supplication is using Request Type Enrollee, it is trying
to enroll into a network. Indicate this with the explicit inclusion of
Request to Enroll attribute with value TRUE.
Advertize list of authorized enrollee MAC addresses in Beacon and
Probe Response frames and use these when selecting the AP. In order
to provide the list, the enrollee MAC address should be specified
whenever adding a new PIN. In addition, add UUID-R into
SetSelectedRegistrar action to make it potentially easier for an AP
to figure out which ER sent the action should there be multiple ERs
using the same IP address.
This adds definitions and parsing of the new attributes that were added
in WPS 2.0. In addition, the version negotiation is updated to use the
new mechanism, i.e., accept everything received and use the new Version2
attribute in transmitted messages.
While this is not strictly speaking required based on dynamic
configuration (i.e., dot11ShortPreambleOptionImplemented is static
value based on implementation, not runtime configuration), it is better
to follow local configuration parameter for short preamble in addition
to the associated station capabilities.
This function is not really needed in case of drivers that build the
HT IEs internally. However, since this can get called if ieee80211n=1
is set in hostapd.conf, we better not segfault even if the driver
does not provide hw info (hapd->iface->current_mode == NULL).
Commit 5a1cc30f1a added code that was
assuming CONFIG_WPS_UPNP is enabled whenever CONFIG_WPS is. Fix this
by making the UPnP calls conditional on CONFIG_WPS_UPNP define.
Prior to commit 6195adda9b the sm->user
dereference did not exist here. While this is in practice non-NULL,
better use more defensive construction here to avoid NULL pointer
dereference should this ever change.
Some NDIS drivers require a workaround to allow them to associate
with a WPS AP that is already using protection (Privacy field = 1).
Let driver_ndis.c know if the AP is already using Privacy and if so,
configure a dummy WEP key to force the driver to associate.
When using overlapped write, we must have the provided memory
areas available during the operation and cannot just use stack
unless we wait for the completion within the function. In the case
of TX here, we can easily wait for the completion since it is likely
to happen immediately. In addition, this provides more reliable
success/failure return value for l2_packet_send(). [Bug 328]
hostapd simply used its own STBC configuration in the STA's HT caps. This
resulted in TX STBC being used for STAs not supporting RX STBC, which in
turn resulted in the STA not receiving anything.
Fix this by handling the STBC flags in the same way mac80211 does. Mask
out RX STBC if we don't support TX STBC and vice versa.
Tested only with the nl80211 driver and a STBC incapable STA.
Signed-off-by: Helmut Schaa <helmut.schaa@googlemail.com>
This patch adds support for wired IEEE 802.1X client on the Solaris.
I have tested with these:
OS : OpenSolaris 2009.06
EAP : EAP-MD5
Switch : Cisco Catalyst 2950
The arithmetic on void pointer exists in trace routine. On GNU C, it
works because void pointer size is 1, but not all compilers behave like
this. So this patch specifies the size of the pointer.
There is no need to process the public key and generate keys if
the AP is going to reject this M2 anyway. This limits effect of
potential CPU DoS attacks in cases where AP PIN is disabled.
A new hostapd_cli command, wps_ap_pin, can now be used to manage
AP PIN at runtime. This can be used to generate a random AP PIN and
to only enable the AP PIN for short period (e.g., based on user
action on the AP device). Use of random AP PIN that is only enabled
for short duration is highly recommended to avoid security issues
with a static AP PIN.
As a compromise between usability and security, do not disable
AP PIN permanently based on failed PIN validations. Instead, go to
AP Setup Locked state for increasing amount of time between each
failure to slow down brute force attacks against the AP PIN.
This avoids problems with some external Registrars that may try
to use the same PIN multiple times without user input. Now, the
user will still be able to fix the PIN and try again later while
a real attack is delayed enough to make it impractical.
This can happen on the AP if the AP PIN is not configured and
the client tries to go through the protocol instead of just using
Registrar mode to receive M1 from the AP. It is cleaner to send
out the WSC_NACK instead of just stopping the protocol.
This indicates that the peer identity is associated with the
credential and will be required to match with the identity used
during authentication when the PAC is used (RFC 5422, 4.2.4).
When passing several authentication algorithms through auth_alg, we
should try all of them when the first one fails. The wext driver goes
through the connect nl80211 command and the retries are then handled by
the kernel. The nl80211 doesn't and we have to handle that from
userspace.
Signed-off-by: Samuel Ortiz <sameo@linux.intel.com>
DEAUTH messages can come from a number of different sources. The one
that's hurting us currently is DEAUTH netlink messages coming to us
from compat-wireless in response to local_state_change DEAUTH messages
we sent as a part of cleaning up state in driver_nl80211's
clear_state_mismatch() function. However, DEAUTH messages can come
from a variety of unwanted sources, including directed denial-of-service
attacks (although MAC verification doesn't place that high a barrier),
so this validation is actually generically useful, I think.
The downside to this method is that without a kernel based approach
"iw dev wlan0 link" no longer works correctly after clear_state_mismatch()
is done. This will be pursued with the kernel folks.
cfg80211/mac80211 seems to be unwilling to change interface mode in
some cases. Make these less likely to cause problems by trying the
changes up to 10 times with 100 msec intervals.
In theory, this should not really be needed, but Windows 7 uses
Registrar mode to probe AP's WPS capabilities before trying to use
Enrollee and fails if the AP does not allow that probing to happen.
This allows the AP to start as an Enrollee and send M1, but refuse
to continue beyond that (M3 will not be sent if AP PIN is not known).
This makes it easier (and a bit faster) to handle multiple local
radios with FT. There is no need to depend on l2_packet in that
case since the frame can be delivered as a direct function call.
If the station does not include WSC IE in Association Request, it
is marked with WLAN_STA_MAYBE_WPS flag. We can update that to
WLAN_STA_WPS if the station uses either of the WPS identity strings.
This enables some workarounds for WPS stations.
This works around issues with EAP-Failure getting lost for some reason.
Instead of waiting up to 60 seconds on a timeout, 30 second timeout is
now used and whenever the provisioning step has been completed (either
successfully or unsuccessfully), this timeout is reduced to 2 seconds.
The pairwise cipher field is supposed to be little endian, but the
message building functions did not swap the bytes on big endian
hosts while the message processing functions did. Fix this by using
little endian byte order in both places.
It looks like 10.6.3 and 10.6.4 do not like to receive Network Key
with WPA passphrase while PSK format still works. Use peer information
from M1 to figure out whether the Enrollee is likely to be OS X and
if so, force PSK format to be used for Network Key.
Some frequent debug prints are of limited use and make debug output
difficult to read. Make them use a new debug level so that -dd
provides more readable output (-ddd can now be used to enable
the excessive debug prints).
The length of the prime was used incorrectly and this resulted
in WPS DH operation failing whenever the public key ended up having
leading zeros (i.e., about every 1/256th time).
The AP configuration may change after provisioning, so it is better
not to use the current security policy to prioritize results. Instead,
use WPS Selected Registrar attribute as the main sorting key and use
signal strength next without considering security policy or rate sets.
The non-WPS provisioning case remains as-is, i.e., this change applies
only when trying to find an AP for WPS provisioning.
Some deployed implementations do not include the mandatory Network
Key attribute when a WPS Credential is for an open network. Allow
this to improve interoperability since the actual key value is not
really needed for open networks.
Replace use of rfkill block event with rtnetlink ifdown. This makes
the design more robust since the rfkill event could have been for
another interface while the rtnetlink events are already filtered
based of ifindex. In addition, the new design handles other than
rfkill-triggered ifdown/ifup events, too. rfkill unblocked event
is still needed to try to set the interface back up. If the unblock
was for another interface, ifup will fail and the driver state is
not changed.
Some of the driver wrappers need to get set_ieee8021x() call before
they can configure keys. Reorder the operations in the reloading
of configuration case to match with that expectation.
Setting IEEE80211_PARAM_AUTHMODE to IEEE80211_AUTH_AUTO ends up enabling
Privacy mode in the driver. We need to clear that to allow hostapd to be
reconfigured into open mode.
wps_er_config can now be used to configure an AP. It is similar to
wps_er_learn, but instead of only learning the current AP settings,
it continues to send M8 with the new settings for the AP.
wps_er_start command now takes an optional parameter that can be used
to configure a filter to only allow UPnP SSDP messages from the
specified IP address. In practice, this limits the WPS ER operations
to a single AP and filters out all other devices in the network.
When starting the protocol run with an Enrollee, clone the AP Settings
and replace the AP MAC Address with the Enrollee MAC Address so that the
correct value is then used in the Credential attribute in M8.
If the associating station indicates that it is intents to use WPS
by including WPS IE in (Re)Association Request frame, include WPS IE
in (Re)Association Response frame.
There may be more than one attribute of same type (e.g., multiple DC
attributes), so the code needs to be able to handle that. Replace the
fixed structure with an array of attributes.
Previous version driver_bsd.c switches the channel in
wpa_driver_bsd_associate(). This patch changes it to use set_freq().
I have tested this patch on FreeBSD 8.0/NetBSD 5.0.2 with hostapd,
wpa_supplicant(AP) and wpa_supplicant(STA).
Add a new wpa_supplicant state: interface disabled. This can be used
to allow wpa_supplicant to be running with the network interface even
when the driver does not actually allow any radio operations (e.g.,
due to rfkill).
Allow driver_nl80211.c and driver_wext.c to start while rfkill is in
blocked state (i.e., when ifconfig up fails) and process rfkill
events to block/unblock WLAN.
Vendor-specific IEs are supposed to be in the end of the frame, so move
WMM into the end of Beacon, Probe Response, and (Re)Association Response
frames. In addition, move HT IEs to be later in (Re)Association
Response to match the correct order.
hostapd_eid_wpa() adds multiple IEs and the end result may not always be
correct. If WPA is enabled, WPA IE (vendor-specific) gets added in the
middle of the frame and not in the end. This would require a larger
change to spliut the IEs from WPA module into separate locations when
constructing Beacon and Probe Response frames. This is not yet addressed.
Commit 83935317a7 added forced
disconnection in case of 4-way handshake failures. However, it should
not have changed the case where the supplicant is requesting fallback
to full EAP authentication if the PMKID in EAPOL-Key message 1/4 is
not know. This case needs to send an EAPOL-Start frame instead of
EAPOL-Key message 2/4.
This works around a problem with APs that try to force PMKSA caching
even when the client does not include PMKID in (re)association request
frame to request it. [Bug 355]
Commit c02d52b405 removed direct calls
to the WPA authenticator, but the change here was incorrect.
EAPOL_SM_USES_WPA was supposed to be set based on sta->wpa_sm being
set, i.e., no need to check for PMKSA entries for that.
While this could potentially change EAPOL Key TX state machine behavior,
no clear problems have been identified so far. Anyway, better fix this
to get the correct flags set for EAPOL authenticator state machine.
When using WPS, we may end up here if the STA manages to re-associate
without the previous STA entry getting removed. Consequently, we need to
make sure that the WPA state machines gets initialized properly at this
point.
62477841a1 tried to address fragmentation
issues, but it did not address the case where the final EAP-TNC
message gets fragmented. Move the state update to the correct place
to address this case, too.
There are no subdirectories in any of these directories or plans
for adding ones. As such, there is no point in running the loop
that does not do anything and can cause problems with some shells.
Both the wildcard VLAN entry and the statically configured VLAN
interfaces should behave in the same way. Initializing the
full dynamic VLAN code before adding the statically configured VLAN
interfaces allows the same processing to be applied to both statically
and dynamically added VLAN interface (i.e., also the statically
configured ones will be added to a bridge).
The WPS IE was overriding the WPA/RSN IE in driver based MLME case
(hostapd_notif_assoc), but the MLME code here was not using WPS IE
correctly, i.e., it allowed the WPA/RSN IE override the operation.
The returned buffer length was hardcoded to be the prime length
which resulted in shorter results being padded in the end. However,
the results from DH code are supposed to be unpadded (and when used
with WPS, the padding is done in WPS code and it is added to the
beginning of the buffer). This fixes WPS key derivation errors
in about 1/256 of runs ("WPS: Incorrect Authenticator") when using
the internal crypto code.
This adds more details into the CTRL-EVENT-DISCONNECTED event to
make it easier to figure out which network was disconnected in some
race conditions and to what could have been the reason for
disconnection. The reason code is currently only available with
the nl80211 driver wrapper.
There is no absolute requirement for separating address allocation
into separate functions, so simplify the driver wrapper interface
to use just if_add and if_remove instead of adding the new
alloc_interface_addr() and release_interface_addr() functions.
if_add() can now indicate if the driver forced a different interface
name or address on the virtual interface.
The server may still reject authentication at this point, so better
use conditional success decision. This allows the potentially
following EAP-Failure message to be processed properly. [Bug 354]
hostapd does not implement UAPSD functionality. However, if U-APSD
functionality is implemented outside hostapd, add support to advertise
the functionality in beacon.
Signed-off-by: yogeshp@marvell.com
Instead of parsing the IEs in the callers, use the already existing
parser in wpa_ft.c to handle MDIE and FTIE from initial MD association
response. In addition, this provides more complete access to association
response IEs to FT code which will be needed to fix FT 4-way handshake
message 2/4.
ANonce, SNonce, R0KH-ID, and R1KH-ID must match with the values
used in the previous FT authentication sequence message per
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.8.4.
This sets the FT Capability and Policy field in the MDIE to the values
received from the target AP (if available). This fixes the MDIE contents
during FT Protocol, but the correct value may not yet be used in initial
mobility domain association.
We do not have any keys set at this point so there is no point in
adding the MIC. In addition, IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2
describes this frame to have MIC IE count of 0 and MIC of 0.
This removes transmission of some unnecessary Deauthentication
frames in cases where we only need to clear the local state. In
addition, this resolves issues for 802.11r FT-over-DS by allowing
authentication state to be set locally even when no actual
Authentication frame is to be transmitted.
IEEE Std 802.11r-2008, 11A.4.2 describes FT initial mobility domain
association in an RSN to include PMKR1Name in the PMKID-List field
in RSN IE in messages 2/4 and 3/4. This makes the RSN IE not be
bitwise identical with the values used in Beacon, Probe Response,
(Re)association Request frames.
The previous versions of wpa_supplicant and hostapd did not add the
PMKR1Name value in EAPOL-Key frame and did not accept it if added
(due to bitwise comparison of RSN IEs). This commit fixes the
implementation to be compliant with the standard by adding the
PMKR1Name value into EAPOL-Key messages during FT 4-Way Handshake and
by verifying that the received value matches with the value derived
locally.
This breaks interoperability with previous wpa_supplicant/hostapd
versions.
Running hostapd and wpa_supplicant on the same interface at the same
time is not expected to work, but it should not cause hostapd to crash.
Ignore station mode association events (no addr field) to avoid this.
IF WPA/RSN parameters were changed or WPA/RSN was disabled, the
WPA/RSN IE in Beacon/Probe Response frames was only update with
set_beacon(). We need to do this with set_generic_elem(), too, to
work with all driver wrappers.
Call ieee802_11_set_beacon() in addition to set_ap_wps_ie() when
processing WPS IE updates. This is needed with drivers that use
set_beacon() instead of set_ap_wps_ie() (i.e., nl80211).
Some ER implementation (e.g., some versions of Intel PROSet) seem to
use incorrect format for WLANEventMAC variable in PutWLANResponse.
Work around this by allowing various MAC address formats to be used
in this variable (debug message will be shown if the colon-deliminated
format specified in WFA WLANConfig 1.0 is not used).
This version of the MAC address parser allows number of different
string formats for the address (e.g., 00:11:22:33:44:55, 0011.2233.4455,
001122334455, 00-11-22-33-44-55). It returns the number of characters
used from the input string in case of success.
It turns out that this is needed for both FT-over-DS and FT-over-air
when using mac80211, so it looks easiest to just unconditionally
re-configure the keys after reassociation when FT is used.
This is needed to allow reassociation processing to skip 4-way handshake
when FT-over-DS is used with an AP that has a previous association state
with the STA.
This seems to be needed at least with mac80211 when a STA is using
FT-over-DS to reassociate back to the AP when the AP still has the
previous association state.
This makes the call simpler for driver wrappers since there is no need
to parse the IEs anymore before indicating association. In addition,
this allows association processing to be extended to use other IEs
in the future.
This avoids conflict with both Label and Display being included at
the same time (which would make it difficult to figure out which
PIN was actually used).
IGTK get_seqnum needs to be skipped in the same way as GTK one when
rekeying group keys. Previously, the old PN value (the one from the
previous key) was indicated and that resulted in MMIE replay detection
at the station.
This can be used to test 802.11w by sending a protected or unprotected
deauth/disassoc frame.
hostapd_cli deauth <dst addr> test=<0/1>
hostapd_cli disassoc <dst addr> test=<0/1>
test=0: unprotected
test=1: protected
Must update sm->pairwise when fetching PMK-R1 SA.
Add a workaround for drivers that cannot set keys before association
(e.g., cfg80211/mac80211): retry PTK configuration after association.
If the PTK configuration prior to association fails, allow reassociation
attempt to continue and configure PTK after association. This is a
workaround for drivers that do not allow PTK to be configured before
association (e.g., current cfg80211/mac80211).
This attribute is supposed to indicate which methods the AP supports as
an Enrollee for adding external Registrars. It was left to 0 when the
AP code did not yet support external Registrars and was forgotten when
the ER support was added.
On NetBSD 5.0.2, wpa_supplicant build results in messages below.
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_get_ssid':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: warning: passing argument 2 of 'bsd_get_ssid'
from incompatible pointer type
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: warning: passing argument 3 of 'bsd_get_ssid'
makes integer from pointer without a cast
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:876: error: too many arguments to function
'bsd_get_ssid'
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_scan':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: warning: passing argument 2 of 'bsd_set_ssid'
from incompatible pointer type
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: warning: passing argument 3 of 'bsd_set_ssid'
makes integer from pointer without a cast
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:1125: error: too many arguments to function
'bsd_set_ssid'
gmake: *** [../src/drivers/driver_bsd.o] Error 1
This patch solves this issue.
This is a step in adding FT support with nl80211-based drivers.
driver_nl80211.c is now registering to handle the FT Action frames
and is able to transmit FT Request frame. Received FT Action frames
are not yet indicated as driver events.
This is needed to fix PTK derivation to use correct length. Previously,
64-octet PTK may have been derived if the authenticator did not already
have a STA entry. Now, the correct pairwise cipher suite is learned when
then PMK-R1 SA is received.
This was not supposed to have duplicate value with WPA_AUTH_ALG_LEAP.
The previous version was unable to set FT as the authentication
algorithm with nl80211.
With this patch, a client gets kicked out of the last BSS it was
attached to, when it is associating to a different one.
While mac80211 does allow a station to be present on multiple bss
interfaces, this does seem to cause problems both for the stack
and for hostapd.
This patch allows the nl80211 driver to create its own per-bss context
and pass it to the drv_priv pointer of the hostapd bss state.
With this and the following patch, stations can associate to and switch
between multiple BSS interfaces of a single wiphy.
This obsoletes a few instances of passing ifname to a callback, those
can be removed in a separate patch.
It might also be useful to move more fields from the driver data to the
per-bss data structure in the future.
This patch allows wpa_supplicant to compile on Debian's kfreebsd
architectures.
Patch by Stefan Lippers-Hollmann based on work done by Petr Salinger
and Emmanuel Bouthenot for 0.6.X (http://bugs.debian.org/480572).
filter_ssids=1 global configuration parameter can now be used to
enable scan result filtering (with -Dnl80211 only for now) based on
the configured SSIDs. In other words, only the scan results that have
an SSID matching with one of the configured networks are included in the
BSS table. This can be used to reduce memory needs in environments that
have huge number of APs.
wpa_supplicant can now be notified of suspend/resume events, e.g.,
from pm-action scripts. This allows wpa_supplicant to clear information
that may become invalid during a suspend operation.
The kernel side support for this was just added into
wireless-testing.git. This commit adds the driver wrapper code needed
to allow wpa_supplicant to use the new functionality.
Some drivers may need to use a specific ifname for the virtual
interface, so allow them to do this with a new parameter passed
to the alloc_interface_addr() handler.
TNC IF-T is somewhat unclear on this are, but
draft-hanna-nea-pt-eap-00.txt, which is supposed to define the same
protocol, is clearer on the Flags field being included.
This change breaks interoperability with the old implementation if
EAP-TNC fragmentation is used. The old version would not accept
the acknowledgement message with the added Flags octet while the
new version accepts messagss with with both options.
If the last message from the EAP-TNC server was fragmented, the
fragment processing lost the DONE/FAIL state and did not know how
to handle the final ACK from the peer. Fix this by remembering the
earlier DONE/FAIL state when fragmenting a frame.
TNC IF-T specification is unclear on the exact contents of the fragment
acknowledgement frame. An interoperability issue with the tncs@fhh
implementation was reported by Arne Welzel
<arne.welzel@stud.fh-hannover.de> due to the different interpretations
of the specification. Relax EAP-TNC server/peer validation rules to
accept fragmentation acknowledgement frames to include the Flags field
to avoid this issue.
This patch aggregates ioctls.
First is SIOCS80211. The SIOCS80211's arguments has 3 couples.
1-1. i_len, i_data
1-2. i_val
1-3. i_len, i_data, i_val (currently only IEEE80211_IOC_APPIE)
There were 3 routines for each cases. This patch aggregates these to
one.
Second is SIOCG80211. The SIOCG80211 returns 2 type of value.
2-1. i_len
2-2. i_val
There were 2 routines for each cases. This patch aggregates these to
one.
I have tested on both FreeBSD 8.0 and NetBSD 5.0.1 with these cases.
[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
This patch enables FreeBSD channel control.
I have tested on FreeBSD 7.2 with these cases.
[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
The attached patch unifies hostapd wpa_driver_bsd_ops and
wpa_supplicant wpa_driver_bsd_ops.
I have tested on NetBSD 5.0.1 with these cases.
[hostapd]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
[wpa_supplicant(STA)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
[wpa_supplicant(AP)]
RSN-PSK(CCMP)/WPA-PSK(TKIP)
This patch modifies field name of struct bsd_driver_data to use
same name of struct wpa_driver_bsd_data. This is a preparation of
unifying struct bsd_driver_data and struct wpa_driver_bsd_data.
This allows external programs (e.g., UI) to get more information
about server certificate chain used during TLS handshake. This can
be used both to automatically probe the authentication server to
figure out most likely network configuration and to get information
about reasons for failed authentications.
The follow new control interface events are used for this:
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-TLS-CERT-ERROR
In addition, there is now an option for matching the server certificate
instead of the full certificate chain for cases where a trusted CA is
not configured or even known. This can be used, e.g., by first probing
the network and learning the server certificate hash based on the new
events and then adding a network configuration with the server
certificate hash after user have accepted it. Future connections will
then be allowed as long as the same server certificate is used.
Authentication server probing can be done, e.g., with following
configuration options:
eap=TTLS PEAP TLS
identity=""
ca_cert="probe://"
Example set of control events for this:
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-STARTED EAP authentication started
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PROPOSED-METHOD vendor=0 method=21
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-METHOD EAP vendor 0 method 21 (TTLS) selected
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-PEER-CERT depth=0 subject='/C=US/ST=California/L=San Francisco/CN=Server/emailAddress=server@kir.nu' hash=5a1bc1296205e6fdbe3979728efe3920798885c1c4590b5f90f43222d239ca6a
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-TLS-CERT-ERROR reason=8 depth=0 subject='/C=US/ST=California/L=San Francisco/CN=Server/emailAddress=server@kir.nu' err='Server certificate chain probe'
CTRL-EVENT-EAP-FAILURE EAP authentication failed
Server certificate matching is configured with ca_cert, e.g.:
ca_cert="hash://server/sha256/5a1bc1296205e6fdbe3979728efe3920798885c1c4590b5f90f43222d239ca6a"
This functionality is currently available only with OpenSSL. Other
TLS libraries (including internal implementation) may be added in
the future.
The previous version could end leaking memory since os_free() was used
instead of wpabuf_free(). In addition, this could potentially have
triggered a crash if the TLS context were being freed when pending
input data where still in the buffer (though, this may not be possible
to trigger in practice).
The bsd_send_eapol() adds Ethernet header by itself. This patch changes it
to use l2_packet functionality.
I have tested on NetBSD 5.0.1 with WPA-PSK(TKIP).
On NetBSD, we should configure some parameters manually out of hostapd
like below.
ifconfig ath0 mediaopt hostap
ifconfig ath0 mode 11g
ifconfig ath0 chan 6
This patch does these automatically. Maybe there will be some
objections, like "hardware configuration is not hostapd/wpa_supplican's
work". So I will write the reasons why I made this patch.
1. For usability.
2. The first command fails when previous state is adhoc. This patch is
free from previous state.
3. Some driver wrappers configure these automatically (like nl80211).
4. I have wasted time trying to find out these command were needed :(
The ps3 wireless kernel driver has wireless extension support.
There is a legacy wpa_supplicant driver, and support for this
has been removed from the kernel driver, as no distributions
are using it.
This may help in debugging why cfg80211 refused the association
command since the scan results should include information about all
pending authentication and association states.
cfg80211 has a limit on pending authentications, so we better clear
the entries that we do not care about to avoid hitting the limit
when roaming between multiple APs.
This patch moves the authentication server setup before
IEEE 802.1X initialization. It's because 802.1X already
needs to have a valid SSL context.
Signed-off-by: Christian Lamparter <chunkeey@googlemail.com>
This allows the driver wrappers to return two sets of IEs, so that
the BSS code can use information from both Beacon and Probe Response
frames if needed. For example, some Cisco APs seem to include more
information in Wireless Provisioning Services IE when it is in the
Beacon frame.
This makes the bridge parameter unnecessary for cases where the interface
is already in a bridge and sysfs is mounted to /sys so that the detection
code works.
For nl80211, the bridge parameter can be used to request the AP
interface to be added to the bridge automatically (brctl may refuse to
do this before hostapd has been started to change the interface mode).
If needed, the bridge interface is also created.
If the driver is detected to use cfg80211, we can rely on it being able
to disconnect with SIOCSIWMLME commands and to use empty SSID as a way
to stop it from associating when we are in progress of configuring the
driver for association. Consequently, we can remove the hack that uses
random 32-octet SSID to force disconnection and re-order association
commands to match the expectations that cfg80211 has for WEXT ioctls.
This gets rid of extra scan rounds and attempts to associate with the
silly 32-octet SSID.
Better make sure the eloop_timeout data gets fully initialized. The
current code is filling in all the fields, but it is clearer to just
zero the buffer to make sure any new field added to the structure gets
initialized.
This avoids potential use of uninitialized stack memory when printing
out peer address based on SMK error message that does not include the
MAC address.
wpa_sm_step() could theoretically free the statemachine, but it does
not do it in this particular case. Anyway, the code can be cleaned to
verify whether the state machine data is still available after the
wpa_sm_step() call.
On FreeBSD 8.0, driver_bsd.c build fails because of changes from
older versions of FreeBSD. The error messages are below:
In file included from ../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:38:
/usr/include/net80211/ieee80211_crypto.h:94: error: 'IEEE80211_TID_SIZE'
undeclared here (not in a function)
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c: In function 'wpa_driver_bsd_set_wpa_ie':
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:968: error: 'IEEE80211_IOC_OPTIE' undeclared (first
use in this function)
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:968: error: (Each undeclared identifier is reported
only once
../src/drivers/driver_bsd.c:968: error: for each function it appears in.)
gmake: *** [../src/drivers/driver_bsd.o] Error 1
This patch solves this issue.
wmm_ac_??_cw{min,max} parameters are in log form
When the wme_ac_??_cw{min,max} parameters aren't specified in
hostapd.conf, hostapd uses an incorrect set of default values, as the
defaults are in 2^x-1 form instead of in log form. This patch changes
them over to the expected log form.
Number of Linux driver wrappers included this more or less identical
function, so lets add a new helper file to be able to share some more
code between the driver wrappers.
The three existing enums were already depending on using the same
values in couple of places and it is just simpler to standardize on
one of these to avoid need for mapping between different enums for
the exact same thing.
Most of this file was already moved into wpa_supplicant/scan.c and
we can remove the file completely by having couple of small helper
functions copied to the remaining users outside core wpa_supplicant
code.
This fits better in wpa_supplicant/scan.c. Couple of remaining
scan_helpers.c functions are currently used in driver wrappers,
but they can likely be removed in the future.
This adds new commands and events for allowing off-channel Action
frame exchanges to be requested. This functionality is not yet used
and is only fully supported by driver_test.c at this point.
driver_nl80211.c has support for the remain-on-channel commands, but
the Action frame TX/RX part is still pending review for the kernel
code and as such, is not yet included here.
This adds placeholder code for allowing the virtual interfaces to be
pre-allocated a MAC address before the interface type is known with
drivers that do not handle interface type changes.
Get rid of wpa_supplicant_sta_rx() and add a new driver event that is
marked to be used only with driver_test.c. In addition, remove this
functionality from privsep wrapper. This is only use for client mode
MLME testing with driver_test.c.
Get more information about scans when updating BSS table information.
This allows the missing-from-scans expiration rule to work properly
when only partial set of channels or SSIDs are being scanned.
WPS IE parsing for PBC mode did not check whether the UUID-E attribute
was included before dereferencing the pointer. This could result in the
AP crashing when processing and invalid Probe Request frame.
There does not seem to be a driver interface for fetching auth_algs
capability, but this may be used by some external application, so
hardcode all auth_algs as supported for now.
This allows the driver interface to be deinitialized before
struct hostapd_data instance gets freed. This needs to be done so
that the driver wrapper does not maintain a context pointer to
freed memory.
Doxygen and some build tools may get a bit confused about same file
name being used in different directories. Clean this up a bit by
renaming some of the duplicated file names in src/ap.
Initialize struct hostapd_data driver context with the same driver
information that was initialized earlier during wpa_supplicant start.
This allows the AP mode operations to be completed directly with the
same calls in AP code without having to maintain a separate translation
layer between the AP and station mode driver context.
Skip WPS IE building for Beacon and Probe Response frames is set_ie_cb()
is not set. This fixes a memory leak and optimizes operations by not
allocating memory and building the WPS IEs unnecessarily.
This code can be shared by both hostapd and wpa_supplicant and this
is an initial step in getting the generic code moved to be under the
src directories. Couple of generic files still remain under the
hostapd directory due to direct dependencies to files there. Once the
dependencies have been removed, they will also be moved to the src/ap
directory to allow wpa_supplicant to be built without requiring anything
from the hostapd directory.
set_ap_wps_ie() is not used to set WPS IE for both Beacon and Probe
Response frames with a single call. In addition, struct wpabuf is used
instead of separate u8* and length fields. This avoids duplicated
allocation of the IEs and simplifies code in general.
This mode allows associated stations to use 4-address frames to allow
layer 2 bridging to be used. At least for the time being, this is only
supported with driver=nl80211.
This WPA_TRACE=y additions allows components to register active references
to memory that has been provided to them as a pointer. If such an actively
referenced memory area is freed, tracer will report this as an error and
backtraces of both the invalid free and the location where this pointer
was marked referenced are shown.
This adds config_methods configuration option for wpa_supplicant
following the design used in hostapd. In addition, the string is
now parsed in common code from src/wps/wps_common.c and the list
of configurable methods include all the defined methods from
WPS 1.0h spec.
Since an Enrollee that does not advertise display as one of the
Config Methods is unlikely to be able to show the ASCII passphrase
to the user, prefer PSK format with such an Enrollee to reduce key
derivation time. This can help with some low-powered devices that
would take long time to derive the PSK from the passphrase.
The use_psk_key parameter can now be used to force the Registrar to
use PSK format instead of ASCII passphrase when building a Credential
for the Enrollee. For now, this is not enabled, but it could be enabled
either based on external (to WPS) configuration or automatically set
based on some WPS attribute values from the Enrollee.
Undocumented (at least for the time being) TLS parameters can now
be provided in wpa_supplicant configuration to enable some workarounds
for being able to connect insecurely to some networks. phase1 and
phase2 network parameters can use following options:
tls_allow_md5=1
- allow MD5 signature to be used (disabled by default with GnuTLS)
tls_disable_time_checks=1
- ignore certificate expiration time
For now, only the GnuTLS TLS wrapper implements support for these.
The new TLS wrapper use may end up returning alert data and we need to
make sure here that it does not end up getting interpreted as success
due to non-NULL response.
This converts tls_connection_handshake(),
tls_connection_server_handshake(), tls_connection_encrypt(), and
tls_connection_decrypt() to use struct wpa_buf to allow higher layer
code to be cleaned up with consistent struct wpabuf use.
Use an extra header to move the returned pointer to break os_free()
or free() of the returned value and verify that the correct magic
is present when freeing or resizing the wpabuf. Show backtrace on
invalid wpabuf use.
If Finished message from peer has been received before the server
Finished message, start Phase 2 with the same message to avoid extra
roundtrip when the peer does not have anything to send after the server
Finished message.
Instead of forcefully deinitializing ER immediately, give it some
time to complete unsubscription and call eloop_terminate() only once
ER code has completed its work.
WPA_TRACE=y builds will now verify that memory allocation in done
consistently using os_{zalloc,malloc,realloc,strdup,free} (i.e., no
mixing of os_* functions and unwrapper functions). In addition, some
common memory allocation issues (double-free, memory leaks, etc.) are
detected automatically.
WPA_TRACE=y can now be used to enable internal backtrace support that
will provide more details about implementation errors, e.g., when some
resources are not released correctly. In addition, this will print out
a backtrace automatically if SIGSEGV is received.
As an initial step in sharing netlink helper functions among driver
wrappers, create a new file for netlink code and move operstate send
function there.
This message from tls_connection_handshake() is not really an error in
most cases, so do not show it if there was indeed no Application Data
available (which is a normal scenario and not an indication of any
error).
Replace driver wrapper calls to hostapd_tx_status(),
hostapd_rx_from_unknown_sta(), hostapd_mgmt_rx(), and
hostapd_mgmt_tx_cb() with new generic driver events
EVENT_TX_STATUS, EVENT_RX_FROM_UNKNOWN, and EVENT_RX_MGMT.
This cleans up lot of the driver wrapper code to be less dependent
on whether it is being used within wpa_supplicant AP mode or hostapd.
This remove the need from driver_test.c to go through internal hostapd
structures to find the appropriate BSS when reporting events on secondary
BSSes.
